Springville Electric Specs

Project Manual
for
Electric Operations Center

Springville City Electric Department
777 North 400 West
Springville, Utah 84663
November 2, 2010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION SECTION TITLE
DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

001113 NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
002113 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS AIA A701
002213 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
004113 BID FORM
004373 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS & SCHEDULE OF VALUES
005213 FORM OF AGREEMENT AIA A101-207 DRAFT
006113 PAYMENT BOND AIA A312-2010 DRAFT
006113 PERFORMANCE BOND AIA A312-2010 DRAFT
006310 BID BOND AIA A310-2010 DRAFT
007213 GENERAL CONDITIONS AIA A201-2007
007313 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 SUMMARY
012300 ALTERNATES
012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014200 REFERENCES
015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
017300 EXECUTION
017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033300 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
034500 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
SPRINGVILLE CITY TABLE OF CONTENTS

ELECTRIC OPERATIONS CENTER TOC - 1
DIVISION 05 - METALS
051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051213 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
052100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING
053100 STEEL DECKING
055000 METAL FABRICATIONS
055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055300 METAL GRATINGS
DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY
061600 SHEATHING
061753 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
061800 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATED-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071900 WATER REPELLENTS
072100 THERMAL INSULATION
072500 WEATHER BARRIERS
074113 ARCHITECTURAL METAL ROOF PANELS
074243 COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
075423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
076100 STRUCTURAL METAL ROOF PANELS
076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
077253 SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM MECHANICALLY FASTENED
078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
079200 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083613 SECTIONAL DOORS
084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
086300 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS
087100 DOORS AND HARDWARE
088000 GLAZING
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092900 GYPSUM BOARD
093000 TILING
095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
096813 TILE CARPETING
097200 WALL COVERINGS
099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
101100 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
101419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
101423 PANEL SIGNAGE
102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102800 TOILET ACCESSORIES
104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
105113 METAL LOCKERS
107050 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
111126 VEHICLE WASHING EQUIPMENT
114000 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
115700 SHOP FURNITURE
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
123623 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS
123661 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS AND WINDOW SILLS
124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

133423 FABRICATED STRUCTURES
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
220500 GENERAL PROVISIONS
220501 PLUMBING SUMMARY
220594 TESTING
220716 GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS
220718 PIPING SPECIALTIES
220719 PIPE INSULATION FOR PLUMBING
221116 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM
221313 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM
224200 PLUMBING FIXTURES
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

230501 GENERAL PROVISIONS
230593 AIR BALANCING
230594 TESTING
230933 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
231000 FUEL GAS SYSTEM (NATURAL GAS)
232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING
233114 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK
233300 DUCT SPECIALTIES
233301 DUCT AND PIPE INSULATION
235418 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
260500 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260519 POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING
260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
260534 CONDUIT
260535 SURFACE RACEWAYS
260537 BOXES
260553 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION
260918 REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHING DEVICES
260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
262200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
262416 PANELBOARDS
262701 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
262717 EQUIPMENT WIRING
262726 WIRING DEVICES
262818 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
262913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS
271005 STRUCTURED CABLING
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

281300 ACCESS CONTROL
282300 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
311000 SITE CLEARING
312000 EARTH MOVING
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

312216 FINE GRADING
320101 PLANT MAINTENANCE
321216 ASPHALT PAVING
323113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
328423 UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION
329001 COMMON PLANTING REQUIREMENTS
329113 FINISH GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION
329223 SODDING
329300 PLANTS
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
330500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
331116 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING
331331 SANITARY SEWERAGE
334100 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

SECTION 00 11 13 - NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
Sealed bids will be received by Springville City for:
ELECTRIC OPERATIONS CENTER

SPRINGVILLE CITY ELECTRIC DEPARTMENT
777 NORTH 400 WEST
SPRINGVILLE, UTAH 84663
The project includes the construction of a building with approximately 21,000 sq. ft., including offices and
work stations, storage spaces, vehicle bays and associated site improvements. Alternate bids will be
received for the construction of a vehicle wash bay and a parking canopy.
The City of Springville is requiring qualified General Contractors for this bid. To be eligible to bid this
project, bidder must provide documentation that demonstrates their qualifications. See Section 00 22 13
– Supplementary Instructions to Bidders.
Contract documents will be available at the offices of WPA Architecture, 475 North Freedom Boulevard,
Provo, Utah 84601, Tel: 801-374-0800. All construction documents (drawings and project manuals) will
be available on a CD in PDF format. Only electronic media will be provided.
The documents were prepared by WPA Architecture of 475 North Freedom Boulevard Provo, Utah
84601.Questions during the bid period may be direct to the Project Architect, Ron Jones, who may be
reached at 801-374-0800 or at rjones@wpa-architecture.com .
Sealed bids will be received until the hour of 2:00 PM on Tuesday November 23, 2010 at the Springville
City Hall Council Chambers, 110 South Main Street, Springville, Utah 84663. Bids will be opened and
read aloud at that time. Bid Forms provided in the Contract Documents must be filled out completely and
sealed in an envelope. Bids must be received in hard copy by the specified time.
A bid bond in the amount of five percent (5%) of the bid amount, made payable to Springville City, shall
accompany the bid. A performance and a labor and material payment bond for 100% of the contract will
be required for the project.
The construction period for this project is 240 calendar days with a start date of on approximately
December 8, 2010.
Contract Documents will be available for review at the following locations:
Mountainlands Area Plan Room Mountainlands Area Plan Room

1116 South State Street 583 West 3560 South # 4
Orem, UT 84097 Salt Lake City, UT 84115
801-226-2437 801-288-1188
Dodge/AGC Plan Room Dodge/AGC Plan Room

313 East 1200 South The White Building
Orem, UT, 84058-6904 2195 West 5400 South, Suite 101
801-224-4333 Taylorsville, UT 84118
801-955-6837
Springville City reserves the right to reject any or all bids or to waive any formality or technicality in any
bid in the interest of Springville City.
SPRINGVILLE CITY NOTICE TO BIDDERS

ELECTRIC OPERATIONS CENTER 00 11 13 - 1
ERROR: undefined
OFFENDING COMMAND: get
STACK:
/quit
-dictionary-
-mark-
SECTION 00 22 13 – SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, documents in the Project Manual and Addenda form the Contract Documents for the project.
Contractor must acknowledge receipt of all addenda on Bid Form.
1.2 AVAILABILITY OF DOCUMENTS
A. All plans, drawings, and specifications for this project can be picked up from:
1. All construction documents (drawings and project manuals) will be available on a CD in PDF
format. Documents can be picked up from WPA Architecture, 475 N. Freedom Blvd., Provo, Utah
beginning Tuesday, November 2, 2010, thereafter until the closing date. Only electronic media will
be furnished by the Owner.
a. Bidders shall register with the Architect in order to receive Addenda.
2. Contract Documents will be available for review at the following locations:

a. Mountainlands Area Plan Room
1116 South State Street
Orem, UT 84097
801-226-2437
b. Mountainlands Area Plan Room
583 West 3560 South # 4
Salt Lake City, UT 84115
801-288-1188
c. Dodge/AGC Plan Room
313 East 1200 South
Orem, UT, 84058-6904
801-224-4333
d. Dodge/AGC Plan Room
The White Building
2195 West 5400 South, Suite 101
Taylorsville, UT 84118
801-955-6837
1.3 ELIGIBILITY TO BID
A. The City of Springville is requiring qualified General Contractors for this bid. To be eligible to bid this
project, bidder must provide documentation that demonstrates:
1. The ability to meet all City requirements pertaining to Bonding and Insurance coverage.
2. The holding of a valid contractor’s license to perform all the work associated with the construction
of the facilities.
3. Financial and operational resources necessary for the execution and completion of this contract.
4. Completion of one or more projects of similar scope, use and type during the past ten (10) years.
5. Completion of three (3) or more, non-residential projects exceeding two million dollars
($2,000,000.00) in construction costs during the past five (5) years.
6. Project Manager/Superintendent with experience managing the above-described project.
7. References from clients or architects on projects meeting criteria of items 4 and 5 above.
8. Provide documented ability to adhere to project budgets and schedules.
9. Provide record of litigation for both current situations and history for the past 5 years..
1.4 BONDING AND INSURANCE
A. Bid Bond: A Bid Bond shall accompany the submitted bid in the amount of five percent (5%) of the amount
of the largest base cost bid submitted.
B. Performance and Payment Bonds: A 100% Performance Bond and a 100% Payment Bond shall be
furnished by the successful bidder prior to the commencement of Construction activities.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

C. Insurance: The City requires the following Insurance Requirements for City Projects be in place before
construction begins. Contractor shall procure and maintain the following types of insurance and minimum
coverage limits for the duration of this Agreement. Any sub-contractor hired by the Contractor to perform
work on the Project shall also meet these insurance requirements
1. Commercial General Liability and Automobile: $2,000,000.00 combined single limit per occurrence
for bodily injury, personal injury and property damage. If the policy contains a general aggregate
limit, the general aggregate limit must apply separately to this Agreement or the general aggregate
limit shall be $4,000,000.00.
2. Worker’s Compensation and Employer’s Liability: Workers’ Compensation as required by the State
of Utah and $1,000,000.00 per accident for Employer’s Liability.
3. Deductibles: any deductibles or self-insured retentions must be declared to and approved by the
City. At the City’s option, the City may require that the insurer reduce or eliminate the deductibles
or self-insured retentions as respects the City, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers; or
The Contractor procure a bond or letter of credit guaranteeing payment of any deductibles or self-
insured retentions.
4. Certificates of Insurance: The Contractor shall provide the City with certificates of Insurance and
with original endorsements effecting coverage required by this Agreement. The certificates and
endorsements for each insurance policy shall be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to
bind coverage on its behalf. All certificates and endorsements shall be received and approved by
the City before work commences. The City reserves the right to require complete, certified copies
of all required insurance policies, at any time.
5. Subcontractors: The Contractor shall include any subcontractors as insureds under its policies or
shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each sub-contractor. All coverages for
sub-contractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein.
6. Indemnification: The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the City and its officers, officials,
employees, agents and volunteers harmless from and against all claims, damages, losses and
expenses (including attorney’s fees), and costs relating to environmental clean-up or non-
compliance, arising out of or resulting from the Contractor’s acts or failures to act in performing this
Agreement and completing the Project. The Contractor shall not be liable for the City’s own
negligent acts.
1.5 BID SUBMITTAL
A. Bid Contents: Bids shall be submitted in a sealed envelope and shall include:
1. Completed Bid Form.

2. Bid Bond in the amount of the largest bid sum (base bid and alternates).
3. Documentation that demonstrates Eligibility to Bid.
B. Bid Submission: Sealed bids will be received until the hour of 2:00 PM MST on Tuesday November 23,
2010 at the Springville City Hall Council Chambers, 110 South Main Street, Springville, Utah 84663. Bids
will be opened and read aloud at that time. Bid Forms provided in the Contract Documents must be filled
out completely and sealed in an envelope. Bids must be received in hard copy by the specified time and
must be on the Bid Form provided in the Project Manual.
1. No bids will be accepted after the deadline.
2. Firms are responsible for delivery of their bid documents prior to the time of the bid closing.
C. Bid Evaluation: The selection of the firm to perform the work will be based upon the bid amount,
compliance with all bidding procedures and confirmation of compliance with requirements for Eligibility to
Bid.
1. All bids become the property of the City of Springville. The City reserves the right to reject any or
all bids and/or to select the bid which is deemed to be in the best interest of the City. The City
reserves the right to negotiate in determining the choice of the firm or individual to do the work
necessary. Bid acceptance may be determined by the lowest base bid, or the base bid plus
accepted alternates.

1.6 PRODUCT APPROVALS PRIOR TO BID
A. In Sections indicating comparable products which may be provided as approved in advance or product
listings are indicated as possible products, Contractor may submit information regarding the comparable
products according to Section 016000 Product Requirements. Submittals must be received no earlier than
date of issuance of bidding documents and by 5:00 P.M. MST, six days prior to bid. All information
received late will be rejected. Submittal does not constitute acceptance. Only confirmation by specific
mention in addenda constitutes acceptance. All requests must be submitted to the Architect.
1.7 QUESTIONS DURING BIDDING
A. Any and all questions regarding the documents shall be directed to the Architect in writing. Email
questions to rjones@wpa-architecture.com. Every effort will be made to respond. The response will
be issued as an addendum item if it affects all bidders. Oral interpretations will not be offered. All
questions must be received no later than 5:00 P.M. MDT five days prior to bid. All questions received after
this date will not be addressed.
1.8 BIDS SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE FOR SIXTY(60) DAYS
A. All bids remain subject to acceptance for 60 days after the day of the bid submission. The City may, in its
sole discretion, release any Proposal and return the Bid security prior to that date.
1.9 BID REVIEW
A. Bids received will be reviewed and evaluated by the City. Bids will be opened publicly.
1.10 CONTRACT TIME AND DAMAGES
A. The Contractor shall achieve substantial completion within two hundred and forty (240) calendar days
from Notice to Proceed. Liquidated damages shall be eight hundred dollars ($800.00) per calendar day.
1.11 BIDDERS FURTHER OBLIGATIONS
A. Other obligations of the apparent low bidder include: Provide list of subcontractors and schedule of values
within twenty-four (24) hours of receipt of bid.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 00 22 13

SECTION 00 41 13 - BID FORM
BID OF __________________________________________________________________________
(Name of Bidder)
BID FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF:
ELECTRIC OPERATIONS CENTER

SPRINGVILLE CITY ELECTRIC DEPARTMENT
To Whom It May Concern:
The undersigned, having examined the Contract Documents, including the drawings, specifications,
addenda and all related documents; having examined the site of the proposed work; being familiar with all
of the conditions relating to the construction of the proposed project, including the availability of materials
and labor, hereby proposes to furnished all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required
in connection with or incidental to the construction of the above named project in strict conformance with
the Contract Documents.
Contract Documents include drawings, documents included in the Project Manual and applicable
addenda as prepared by WPA Architecture, PC, and shall also include documents not included but
referenced in the Contract Documents.
For the work describing the Springville City Electric Operations Center the undersigned proposes the
amount of:
Base Bid:
______________________________________________________________________________ Dollars
($ )
Alternate No. 1 – Wash Bay:

______________________________________________________________________________ Dollars
($ )
Alternate No. 2 – Parking Canopy (Over 4 Stalls):

______________________________________________________________________________ Dollars
($ )
Alternate No. 3 – Parking Canopy (Over 8 Stalls):

______________________________________________________________________________ Dollars
($ )
Enclosed is __________as required in the sum of ____________________________________________

(Bond or Check) Dollars ($ )
SPRINGVILLE CITY BID FORM

The above bid requires a construction time of 240 calendar days from the date of Notice to Proceed.
This bid shall be good for 60 days after bid opening.
Addenda:
The undersigned hereby acknowledges receipt of the following addenda to the drawings and
specifications and all of the provisions and requirements of the addenda have been taken into
consideration in the preparation of the foregoing proposal.
I / We acknowledge receipt of the following Addenda:
____________________________________________________________________________________
RESPECTFULLY SUBMITTED
CORPORATIONS ONLY FILL IN BIDDERS (OTHER THAN CORPORATIONS)

THE FOLLOWING: FILL IN THE FOLLOWING:
______________________________________ ______________________________________
(Legal Name of Corporation (Legal Name of Bidding Firm)
______________________________________ ______________________________________
(State of Incorporation) (Address)
______________________________________ ______________________________________
(Type Name of Officer) (Type Name of Officer)
______________________________________ ______________________________________
(Signature Of Officer) Signature of Officer)
______________________________________ ______________________________________
(Title of Officer) (Title of Officer)
______________________________________ ______________________________________
(Date) (Date)
SEAL OF CORPORATION:
(Signature of bidder, including corporation officer, must
be witnessed and proposal date to valid.)
SPRINGVILLE CITY BID FORM

SECTION 00 43 73 - BIDDER'S PROPOSED LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
AND SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Project: Electric Operations Center Contractor: ____________________________

Springville City Electric Department __________________________
We submit the following list of subcontractors for Owner review and approval. We recognize this list as
binding on us, and acknowledge Owner's right to reject any or all subcontractors, suppliers, or vendors listed
or unlisted which the Owner determines are unqualified to do the work.
Section Type of Work Subcontractor Scheduled

Amount
SPRINGVILLE CITY LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS & SCHEDULE OF VALUES

Attach additional sheets if necessary
We certify that:
1. This list includes all first-tier subcontractors whose bids are $ 4,000 or over.
2. Where we have listed "self" it is our intent to perform said work and that we generally and regularly perform
that type of work, and are appropriately licensed.
3. Any approved change in subcontractors which results in a lower contract price for sub-bid work may result in
a reduction in the total sum of the prime contract at the Owner's discretion
SIGNED BY: DATE:
NOTE: FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM, PROPERLY COMPLETED AND SIGNED, WITHIN 24 HOURS AFTER
RECEIPT OF BID, SHALL BE GROUNDS FOR OWNERS REFUSAL TO ENTER INTO A WRITTEN CONTRACT WITH
BIDDER. TIMELY NOTICE OF UNACCEPTABLE SUBCONTRACTORS WILL BE GIVEN TO THE BIDDER.

®
TM
AIA Document A101 – 2007
Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor
where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum
AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year

(In words, indicate day, month and year)
ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS:
BETWEEN the Owner: The author of this document
(Name, address and other information) has added information
needed for its completion.
Springville City Corporation The author may also have
revised the text of the
110 South Main Street original AIA standard form.
Springville, Utah 84663 An Additions and Deletions
Report that notes added
information as well as
revisions to the standard
form text is available from
and the Contractor: the author and should be
(Name, address and other information) reviewed.
This document has important
legal consequences.
Consultation with an
attorney is encouraged with
respect to its completion
or modification.
for the following Project: AIA Document A201™–2007,
(Name, location, and detailed description) General Conditions of the
Contract for Construction,
is adopted in this document
Springville City Electrical Operations Center by reference. Do not use
777 North 400 West with other general
Springville, Utah 84663 conditions unless this
document is modified.
The Architect:
(Name, address and other information)
WPA Architecture, PC
475 N. Freedom Blvd.
Provo, Utah 84601
The Owner and Contractor agree as follows.
ELECTRONIC COPYING of any

portion of this AIA® Document
to another electronic file is
prohibited and constitutes a
violation of copyright laws
as set forth in the footer of
this document.
AIA Document A101™ – 2007. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal 1
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 08:46:51 on
10/28/2010 under Order No.1310941308_1 which expires on 12/15/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (82202092)
TABLE OF ARTICLES
1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT
3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
4 CONTRACT SUM
5 PAYMENTS
6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION
8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
10 INSURANCE AND BONDS
ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other
Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed
in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, all of which form the Contract, and
are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the
entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or
agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than a Modification, appears in
Article 9.
ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT

The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except as specifically indicated in
the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others.
ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

§ 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated
below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner.
(Insert the date of commencement if it differs from the date of this Agreement or, if applicable, state that the date
will be fixed in a notice to proceed.)
If, prior to the commencement of the Work, the Owner requires time to file mortgages and other security interests,
the Owner’s time requirement shall be as follows:
§ 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement.
§ 3.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than ( ) days from the
date of commencement, or as follows:
(Insert number of calendar days. Alternatively, a calendar date may be used when coordinated with the date of
commencement. If appropriate, insert requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the
Work.)
Portion of Work Substantial Completion Date
, subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents.

(Insert provisions, if any, for liquidated damages relating to failure to achieve Substantial Completion on time or for
bonus payments for early completion of the Work.)
ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM

§ 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor’s performance of the
Contract. The Contract Sum shall be ($ ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract
Documents.
§ 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract
Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner:
(State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If the bidding or proposal documents permit the
Owner to accept other alternates subsequent to the execution of this Agreement, attach a schedule of such other
alternates showing the amount for each and the date when that amount expires.)
§ 4.3 Unit prices, if any:

(Identify and state the unit price; state quantity limitations, if any, to which the unit price will be applicable.)
Item Units and Limitations Price Per Unit
§ 4.4 Allowances included in the Contract Sum, if any:

(Identify allowance and state exclusions, if any, from the allowance price.)
Item Price
ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS
§ 5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
§ 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for
Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the
Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
§ 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of
the month, or as follows:
§ 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month,
the Owner shall make payment of the certified amount to the Contractor not later than the day of the same
month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment
shall be made by the Owner not later than ( ) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment.
(Federal, state or local laws may require payment within a certain period of time.)
§ 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the
Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract
Sum among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported
by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the
Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment.
§ 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall show the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end
of the period covered by the Application for Payment.
§ 5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be
computed as follows:
.1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by
multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Contract Sum
allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values, less retainage of ( ). Pending
final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute shall be
included as provided in Section 7.3.9 of AIA Document A201™–2007, General Conditions of the
Contract for Construction;
.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and
suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved
in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less
retainage of ( );
.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and
.4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment
as provided in Section 9.5 of AIA Document A201–2007.
§ 5.1.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Section 5.1.6 shall be further modified under
the following circumstances:
.1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to the
full amount of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete
Work, retainage applicable to such work and unsettled claims; and
(Section 9.8.5 of AIA Document A201–2007 requires release of applicable retainage upon
Substantial Completion of Work with consent of surety, if any.)
.2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the
Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Section 9.10.3 of AIA Document
A201–2007.
§ 5.1.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows:

(If it is intended, prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, to reduce or limit the retainage resulting from
the percentages inserted in Sections 5.1.6.1 and 5.1.6.2 above, and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contract
Documents, insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.)
§ 5.1.9 Except with the Owner’s prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for
materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site.
§ 5.2 FINAL PAYMENT

§ 5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the
Contractor when
.1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor’s responsibility to correct
Work as provided in Section 12.2.2 of AIA Document A201–2007, and to satisfy other requirements,
if any, which extend beyond final payment; and
.2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect.
§ 5.2.2 The Owner’s final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the
Architect’s final Certificate for Payment, or as follows:
ARTICLE 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION

§ 6.1 INITIAL DECISION MAKER
The Architect will serve as Initial Decision Maker pursuant to Section 15.2 of AIA Document A201–2007, unless
the parties appoint below another individual, not a party to this Agreement, to serve as Initial Decision Maker.
(If the parties mutually agree, insert the name, address and other contact information of the Initial Decision Maker,
if other than the Architect.)
§ 6.2 BINDING DISPUTE RESOLUTION

For any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation pursuant to Section 15.3 of AIA Document A201–2007, the
method of binding dispute resolution shall be as follows:
(Check the appropriate box. If the Owner and Contractor do not select a method of binding dispute resolution
below, or do not subsequently agree in writing to a binding dispute resolution method other than litigation, Claims
will be resolved by litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction.)
[ X ] Arbitration pursuant to Section 15.4 of AIA Document A201–2007
[ ] Litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction
[ ] Other (Specify)
ARTICLE 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION

§ 7.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document
A201–2007.
§ 7.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2007.
ARTICLE 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

§ 8.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201–2007 or another Contract
Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract
Documents.
§ 8.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated
below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is
located.
(Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.)
per annum
§ 8.3 The Owner’s representative:

§ 8.4 The Contractor’s representative:

§ 8.5 Neither the Owner’s nor the Contractor’s representative shall be changed without ten days written notice to the
other party.
§ 8.6 Other provisions:
ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
§ 9.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated in
the sections below.
§ 9.1.1 The Agreement is this executed AIA Document A101–2007, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner
and Contractor.
§ 9.1.2 The General Conditions are AIA Document A201–2007, General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction.
§ 9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract:
Document Title Date Pages
§ 9.1.4 The Specifications:

(Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.)
Title of Specifications exhibit:
§ 9.1.5 The Drawings:

(Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.)
Title of Drawings exhibit:
§ 9.1.6 The Addenda, if any:
Number Date Pages
Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding
requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9.
§ 9.1.7 Additional documents, if any, forming part of the Contract Documents:
.1 AIA Document E201™–2007, Digital Data Protocol Exhibit, if completed by the parties, or the
following:
.2 Other documents, if any, listed below:

(List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. AIA
Document A201–2007 provides that bidding requirements such as advertisement or invitation to bid,
Instructions to Bidders, sample forms and the Contractor’s bid are not part of the Contract
Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. They should be listed here only if intended to be
part of the Contract Documents.)
ARTICLE 10 INSURANCE AND BONDS

The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance and provide bonds as set forth in Article 11 of AIA Document
A201–2007.
(State bonding requirements, if any, and limits of liability for insurance required in Article 11 of AIA Document
A201–2007.)
Type of insurance or bond Limit of liability or bond amount ($ 0.00)
This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above.
OWNER (Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature)
(Printed name and title) (Printed name and title)
®
TM
Payment Bond
CONTRACTOR: SURETY:
(Name, legal status and address) (Name, legal status and principal
place of business)
« »« » « »« » ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS:
« » « » The author of this document
has added information
OWNER: The author may also have
(Name, legal status and address) revised the text of the
«Springville City Corporation »« » original AIA standard form.
An Additions and Deletions
«110 South Main Street Report that notes added
Springville, Utah 84663 » information as well as
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT the author and should be
Date: « » reviewed.
Amount: $ « » This document has important
Description: legal consequences.
(Name and location) Consultation with an
«Springville City Electric Operations Center attorney is encouraged with
777 North 400 West or modification.
Springville, Utah 84663al»
Any singular reference to
« » Contractor, Surety, Owner
or other party shall be
BOND considered plural where
applicable.
Date:
(Not earlier than Construction Contract Date)
« »
Amount: $ « »
Modifications to this Bond: « » None « » See Section 18
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal)
Signature: Signature:
Name and « »« » Name and « »« »
Title: Title:
(Any additional signatures appear on the last page of this Payment Bond.)
(FOR INFORMATION ONLY — Name, address and telephone)

AGENT or BROKER: OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE:
(Architect, Engineer or other party:)
« » «WPA Architecture, PC »
« » « 475 North Freedom Blvd. »
« » « Provo, Utah 84601 » ELECTRONIC COPYING of any
« » portion of this AIA® Document
« » to another electronic file is
« » prohibited and constitutes a
as set forth in the footer of
this document.
AIA Document A312™ – 2010 Payment Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is
protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any
portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. 1
This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:46:11 on 10/28/2010 under Order No.1310941308_1 which expires on 12/15/2010, and is not for
resale.
User Notes: (1902475634)
§ 1 The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,
successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance
of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms.
§ 2 If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies and holds
harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor,
materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, then the Surety and the
Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond.
§ 3 If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation to the Owner under this
Bond shall arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in
Section 13) of claims, demands, liens or suits against the Owner or the Owner’s property by any person or entity
seeking payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract
and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety.
§ 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense
defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien or suit.
§ 5 The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond shall arise after the following:
§ 5.1 Claimants, who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor,
.1 have furnished a written notice of non-payment to the Contractor, stating with substantial accuracy
the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was,
furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after
having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and
.2 have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Section 13).
§ 5.2 Claimants, who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor, have sent a Claim to the Surety
(at the address described in Section 13).
§ 6 If a notice of non-payment required by Section 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to
satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Section 5.1.1.
§ 7 When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Sections 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall
promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following actions:
§ 7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim,
stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and
§ 7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.
§ 7.3 The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2 shall not be deemed to
constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed
amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If, however, the Surety fails to discharge its
obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2, the Surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney’s
fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant.
§ 8 The Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s
fees provided under Section 7.3, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith
by the Surety.
§ 9 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the
performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any construction performance bond.
By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor
in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and Surety
under this Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work.
resale.
User Notes: (1902475634)
§ 10 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are
unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of
any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to, or give notice on
behalf of, Claimants or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond.
§ 11 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to
related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.
§ 12 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent
jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the
expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Section 5.1.2
or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were
furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this
Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the
jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.
§ 13 Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown
on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, shall be
sufficient compliance as of the date received.
§ 14 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where
the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement
shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be
deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond
and not as a common law bond.
§ 15 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and
Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.
§ 16 Definitions
§ 16.1 Claim. A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum:
.1 the name of the Claimant;
.2 the name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment furnished;
.3 a copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials or equipment was
furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;
.4 a brief description of the labor, materials or equipment furnished;
.5 the date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use
in the performance of the Construction Contract;
.6 the total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials or equipment furnished as of the date of
the Claim;
.7 the total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and
.8 the total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials or equipment furnished as of the
date of the Claim.
§ 16.2 Claimant. An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the
Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. The
term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable
mechanic’s lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond
shall be to include without limitation in the terms “labor, materials or equipment” that part of water, gas, power,
light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and
engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor’s subcontractors,
and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or
equipment were furnished.
§ 16.3 Construction Contract. The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page,
including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.
resale.
User Notes: (1902475634)
§ 16.4 Owner Default. Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as
required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the
Construction Contract.
§ 16.5 Contract Documents. All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.
§ 17 If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this
Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.
§ 18 Modifications to this bond are as follows:
« »
(Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.)
Name and Title: « »« » Name and Title: « »« »
Address: « » Address: « »
resale.
User Notes: (1902475634)
®
TM
Performance Bond
CONTRACTOR: SURETY:
(Name, legal status and address) (Name, legal status and principal
place of business)
« »« » « »« » ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS:
« » « » The author of this document
OWNER: The author may also have
(Name, legal status and address) revised the text of the
«Springville City Corporation »« » original AIA standard form.
«110 South Main Street Report that notes added
Springville, Utah 84663 » information as well as
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT the author and should be
Date: « » reviewed.
Amount: $ « » This document has important
Description: legal consequences.
(Name and location) Consultation with an
«Springville City Electric Operations Center attorney is encouraged with
777 North 400 West or modification.
Springville, Utah 84663al»
« » Contractor, Surety, Owner
or other party shall be
BOND considered plural where
applicable.
Date:
(Not earlier than Construction Contract Date)
« »
Amount: $ « »
Modifications to this Bond: « » None « » See Section 16

Name and « »« » Name and « »« »
Title: Title:
(Any additional signatures appear on the last page of this Performance Bond.)
(FOR INFORMATION ONLY — Name, address and telephone)

AGENT or BROKER: OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE:
(Architect, Engineer or other party:)
« » «WPA Architecture, PC »
« » «475 N. Freedom Blvd.
« » Provo, Utah 84601 » ELECTRONIC COPYING of any
«Telephone Number: 801-374-0800 » portion of this AIA® Document
« » to another electronic file is
« » prohibited and constitutes a
« » as set forth in the footer of
this document.
AIA Document A312™ – 2010 Performance Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is
resale.
User Notes: (812461909)
§ 1 The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,
successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein
by reference.
§ 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation
under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Section 3.
§ 3 If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation under this Bond shall arise
after
.1 the Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering
declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is requesting a
conference among the Owner, Contractor and Surety to discuss the Contractor’s performance. If the
Owner does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt of
the Owner’s notice, request such a conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Owner
shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Section 3.1
shall be held within ten (10) business days of the Surety’s receipt of the Owner’s notice. If the
Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to
perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner’s right, if any,
subsequently to declare a Contractor Default;
.2 the Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the
Surety; and
.3 the Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the
Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract.
§ 4 Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Section 3.1 shall not constitute a
failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or release the Surety from its obligations,
except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice.
§ 5 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense
take one of the following actions:
§ 5.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract;
§ 5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent
contractors;
§ 5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for
performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the
Owner and a contractor selected with the Owner’s concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds
executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the
amount of damages as described in Section 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner
as a result of the Contractor Default; or
§ 5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with
reasonable promptness under the circumstances:
.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as
practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Owner; or
.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for denial.
§ 6 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Section 5 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed
to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety
demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any
remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Section 5.4, and the Owner refuses the
payment or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to
enforce any remedy available to the Owner.
§ 7 If the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1, 5.2 or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall
not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to
resale.
User Notes: (812461909)
the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment
by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication, for
.1 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the
Construction Contract;
.2 additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and
resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Section 5; and
.3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual
damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor.
§ 8 If the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1, 5.3 or 5.4, the Surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this
Bond.
§ 9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the
Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such
unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its
heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns.
§ 10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to
related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.
§ 11 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in
the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after a
declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after
the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this
Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the
jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.
§ 12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page
on which their signature appears.
§ 13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where
the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement
shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be
deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond
and not as a common law bond.
§ 14 Definitions
§ 14.1 Balance of the Contract Price. The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction
Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts
received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the
Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the
§ 14.2 Construction Contract. The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page,
including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.
§ 14.3 Contractor Default. Failure of the Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise
to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract.
§ 14.4 Owner Default. Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as
required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the
§ 14.5 Contract Documents. All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.
§ 15 If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this
Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.
resale.
User Notes: (812461909)
§ 16 Modifications to this bond are as follows:
« »
(Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.)
Name and Title: « »« » Name and Title: « »« »
Address: « » Address: « »
resale.
User Notes: (812461909)
®
TM
Bid Bond
CONTRACTOR: SURETY:
(Name, legal status and address) (Name, legal status and principal place
of business)
« »« » « »« »
« » « » ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS:
The author of this document
OWNER: needed for its completion.
(Name, legal status and address) The author may also have
«Springville City Corporation »« » revised the text of the
«110 South Main Street original AIA standard form.
Springville, Utah 84663 » Report that notes added
information as well as
BOND AMOUNT: $ « » revisions to the standard
the author and should be
PROJECT: reviewed.
(Name, location or address, and Project number, if any) This document has important
«Springville City Electric Operations Center legal consequences.
777 North 400 West Consultation with an
Springville, Utah 84663al» attorney is encouraged with
« » or modification.
« »
Contractor, Surety, Owner
The Contractor and Surety are bound to the Owner in the amount set forth above, for the or other party shall be
payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, considered plural where
applicable.
administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, as provided herein. The
conditions of this Bond are such that if the Owner accepts the bid of the Contractor
within the time specified in the bid documents, or within such time period as may be
agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, and the Contractor either (1) enters into a
contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms of such bid, and gives such bond or
bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents, with a surety admitted
in the jurisdiction of the Project and otherwise acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful
performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished
in the prosecution thereof; or (2) pays to the Owner the difference, not to exceed the
amount of this Bond, between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount
for which the Owner may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work
covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full
force and effect. The Surety hereby waives any notice of an agreement between the
Owner and Contractor to extend the time in which the Owner may accept the bid. Waiver
of notice by the Surety shall not apply to any extension exceeding sixty (60) days in the
aggregate beyond the time for acceptance of bids specified in the bid documents, and the
Owner and Contractor shall obtain the Surety’s consent for an extension beyond sixty
(60) days.
If this Bond is issued in connection with a subcontractor’s bid to a Contractor, the term
Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be ELECTRONIC COPYING of any
deemed to be Contractor. portion of this AIA® Document
to another electronic file is
prohibited and constitutes a
When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement violation of copyright laws
in the location of the Project, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or as set forth in the footer of
legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such this document.
statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so
AIA Document A310™ – 2010. Copyright © 1963, 1970 and 2010 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA®
Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,
or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the 1
law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:44:04 on 10/28/2010 under Order No.1310941308_1 which expires on 12/15/2010, and is not
for resale.
User Notes: (1280332368)
furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.
Signed and sealed this « » day of « » , « »
« »
(Contractor as Principal) (Seal)
« »
(Witness) (Title)
« »
(Surety) (Seal)
« »
(Witness) (Title)
AIA Document A310™ – 2010. Copyright © 1963, 1970 and 2010 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA®
Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,
or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the 2
law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:44:04 on 10/28/2010 under Order No.1310941308_1 which expires on 12/15/2010, and is not
for resale.
User Notes: (1280332368)
ERROR: undefined
OFFENDING COMMAND: get
STACK:
/quit
-dictionary-
-mark-
SECTION 00 73 13 – SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent who shall be responsible for the project site at all
times during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall not be replaced except with prior consent
of the Architect and Owner or unless the superintendent ceases to be in the Contractor's employment.
The replacement superintendent shall also be subject to these conditions.
B. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall
be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other
communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case.
1.2 WEATHER DELAYS
A. The Owner and Contractor agree that adverse weather conditions are normal and expected at the site
during the Contract period. The Contractor=s project schedule shall include a sufficient number of days for
adverse weather conditions during the Contract period that will account for potential delays caused by
normal and expected weather conditions at the site.
1. If unusually severe and adverse weather conditions are the basis for a claim for additional time,
such claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were unusually
severe for the period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated. Unusually severe
weather is the Contractors burden to prove and must be reconciled with averages shown for this
area by the U.S. Weather Service, and that said weather conditions have had an adverse effect on
the scheduled construction by impacting critical path activities.
2. Contractor shall notify the Owner and Architect of any weather conditions that affect the progress of
critical path items. Notification must be sent on the date of adverse weather. Acceptance of the
weather impact notice will not guarantee the approval of any extension to the Contract period.
1.3 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
A. The Owner and Contractor agree that litigation shall be the method for binding dispute resolution, not
arbitration.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SUPPLEMENTARY GENERASL CONDITIONS

SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Work by others.
4. Access to site.
5. Coordination with occupants.
6. Work restrictions.
7. Specification and drawing conventions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing
temporary use of Owner's facilities.
1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: <Insert Project identifier such as Project name and number>.
1. Project Location: Electric Operations Center
Springville City Electric Department
777 North 400 West
B. Owner: Springville Electric Department

110 South Main Street
Tel: 801-489-2700
1. Owner's Representative: Leon Fredrickson.
C. Architect: WPA Architecture

475 North Freedom Boulevard
Provo, Utah 84601
1. Project Architect: Ron Jones
Tel: 801-374-0800
E-mail: rjones@wpa-architecture.com
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1. The project includes the construction of a building with approximately 21,000 sq. ft.,
including offices and work stations, storage spaces, vehicle bays and associated site
improvements. Alternate bids will be received for the construction of a vehicle wash bay
and a parking canopy.
B. Type of Contract.
1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.4 WORK BY OTHERS
A. Concurrent Work: Owner’s personnel will perform work related to exterior electrical site work. See
electrical drawings. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.
B. General: Cooperate fully with Owner’s personnel so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering
with or delaying work under this Contract or other by Owner’s personnel. Coordinate the Work of this
Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SUMMARY

1.5 ACCESS TO SITE
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction
period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other
contractors on portions of Project.
B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on
Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.
C. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site
beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Limits: Limit site disturbance, including earthwork and clearing of vegetation, to 40 feet (12.2 m)
beyond building perimeter; 10 feet (3 m) beyond surface walkways, surface parking, and utilities
less than 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter; 15 feet (4.5 m) beyond primary roadway curbs and main
utility branch trenches; and 25 feet (7.6 m) beyond constructed areas with permeable surfaces
(such as pervious paving areas, stormwater detention facilities, and playing fields) that require
additional staging areas in order to limit compaction in the constructed area.
2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving
premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times.
Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and
equipment on-site.
D. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in
a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction
operations.
1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and adjacent building(s) during entire construction period.
Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage.
Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do
not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written
permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations.
1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according
to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.
C. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration,
odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.
1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.
2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.
D. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of entrances,
operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.
E. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the existing
building is not permitted.

1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the
intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These
conventions are as follows:
1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words
"shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is
used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.
B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all
Sections in the Specifications.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in
detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and
products:
1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the
individual Specifications Sections.
2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S.
National CAD Standard.
3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification
Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

SECTION 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the
bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to
accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products,
materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.
2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to
incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
1.3 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the
alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the
status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later
consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections
referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under
each alternate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Additive Alternate No. 1: Wash Bay.

1. Construct Wash Bay where shown on site plan as described in the Contract Documents.
B. Additive Alternate No. 2: Parking Canopy (Over 4 Stalls).

1. Construct Parking Canopy (45 feet long) where shown on site plan as described in the Contract
Documents.
a. Base Bid: Construct parking stalls including earthwork, paving, curb and gutter.
C. Additive Alternate No. 3: Parking Canopy (Over 8 Stalls).

1. Construct Parking Canopy (89’-6” long) where shown on site plan as described in the Contract
Documents.
a. Base Bid: Construct parking stalls including earthwork, paving, curb and gutter.
SPRINGVILLE CITY ALTERNATES

SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product
submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those
required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or
fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and
Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request : Provide formal request for substitution.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as
applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided,
if applicable.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of
the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be
necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work
specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities
may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect,
sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements
indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-
ES or other applicable organization.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with
products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified
product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include
letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase
order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the
Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related
materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become
necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for
evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor
of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven
days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's
Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related
products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by
manufacturers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change,
but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been
coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with
other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed.
C. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days
after the Notice to Proceed.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must
assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for
redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been
coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with
other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract
modifications.
1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving
adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. A sample of the Architect’s Supplemental
Instruction form is included in at the end of this Section.
1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the
Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. A sample of the Proposal
Request form is included at the end of this Section. If necessary, the description will include supplemental
or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in
progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation
estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the
change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and
activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract
Time.
B. Contractor-Initiated Work Change Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work.
Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change
on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of
purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change,
including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity
relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change
requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive which instructs
Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. A sample
of the Construction Change Directive form is included at the end of this Section.
1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also
designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
SPRINGVILLE CITY CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for
signatures of Owner and Contractor. A sample of the Change Order form is included at the end of this
Section.
SPRINGVILLE CITY CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

Architect’s Supplemental Instructions
TO CONTRACTOR: FROM ARCHITECT:
XYZ Construction WPA Architecture
123 S. Main Street 475 North Freedom Blvd
SLC, Utah 84114 Provo, UT 84601
PROJECT: ABC Project

DATE OF ISSUANCE: 2010
SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION NO: ASI 01

OWNER: Springville Electric Department
A total of page(s) are/is included in this ASI.
cc:
The Work shall be carried out in accordance with the following supplemental instructions issued in accordance with the
Contract Documents without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Proceeding with the Work in accordance with these
instructions indicates your acknowledgment that there will be no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
DESCRIPTION:
EXPLANATION:
Proposal Request
TO CONTRACTOR: PROJECT:
ABC Construction Electric Operations Center
P.O. Box 123 Springville Electric Department
Anywhere, UT 840000 110 North Main Street
Springville, UT 84663
TO OWNER:
Springville Electric Department
Springville, UT 84663 DATE OF ISSUANCE: January 1, 2010
FROM ARCHITECT:
Ron Jones PROPOSAL REQUEST NO: PR-01
WPA Architecture
475 North Freedom Blvd ATTACHMENTS: none
Provo, UT 84601
CC: John Johnson
Please submit an itemized proposal for changes in the Contract Sum and Contract Time for proposed modifications to the Contract
Documents described herein. Submit proposal within 7 (SEVEN) CALENDER days, or notify the Architect in writing of the date on
which you anticipate submitting your proposal.
NOTE: THIS IS NOT A CHANGE ORDER, A CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTEIVE, OR DIRECTION
TO PROCEED WITH THE WORK DESCRIBED IN THE PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS.
Provide pricing for the following change(s):
DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide and install 3’ x 3’ tack board.
JUSTIFICATION:
1. Requested by Owner.
Construction Change Directive
TO CONTRACTOR: PROJECT:
ABC Construction Springville Electric
DATE OF ISSUANCE: 2010

TO OWNER:
Springville Electric Department
PROPOSAL REQUEST NO: CCD-001
FROM ARCHITECT:
WPA Architecture CC:
475 North Freedom Blvd
Provo, UT 84601 ATTACHMENTS:
You are hereby directed to make the following change(s) in this Contract:
Complete work as described.
Justification:
Required.
PROPOSED ADJUSTMENTS
1. The proposed basis of adjustment to the Contract Sum is:
Lump Sum: Increase Decrease) of $
Unit Price: $ per
Not to exceed:
As follows:
2. The Contract Time is proposed to Be Adjusted Remain Unchanged. The

proposed adjustment is:
An increase of days A decrease of days
When signed by the Owner and Architect and received by the Signature by the Contractor indicates the
Contractor, this document becomes effective IMMEDIATELY as a Contractor=s agreement with the proposed
Construction Change Directive (CCD), and the Contractor shall proceed adjustments in Contract Sum and Contract
with the change(s) described above. Time set forth in this Construction Change
Directive:
Architect: Owner:
WPA Architecture Springville Electric Dept. Contractor:
475 North Freedom Blvd ABC Construction
By: By: By:
Date: Date: Date:
®
TM
AIA Document G701 – 2001
Change Order
PROJECT (Name and address): CHANGE ORDER NUMBER: 001 OWNER:
Sample CO DATE: March 16, 2005
ARCHITECT:
Sample Change Order
TO CONTRACTOR (Name and address): ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER: 00041000 CONTRACTOR:
CONTRACT DATE: FIELD:
CONTRACT FOR: General Construction
OTHER:
THE CONTRACT IS CHANGED AS FOLLOWS:

(Include, where applicable, any undisputed amount attributable to previously executed Construction Change Directives)
The original Contract Sum was $ 0.00

The net change by previously authorized Change Orders $ 0.00
The Contract Sum prior to this Change Order was $ 0.00
The Contract Sum will be increased by this Change Order in the amount of $ 0.00
The new Contract Sum including this Change Order will be $ 0.00
The Contract Time will be increased by Zero ( 0 ) days.
The date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is
NOTE: This Change Order does not include changes in the Contract Sum, Contract Time or Guaranteed Maximum Price which
have been authorized by Construction Change Directive until the cost and time have been agreed upon by both the Owner and
Contractor, in which case a Change Order is executed to supersede the Construction Change Directive.
NOT VALID UNTIL SIGNED BY THE ARCHITECT, CONTRACTOR AND OWNER.
ARCHITECT (Firm name) CONTRACTOR (Firm name) OWNER (Firm name)
ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS
BY (Signature) BY (Signature) BY (Signature)
(Typed name) (Typed name) (Typed name)
DATE DATE DATE
AIA Document G701™ – 2001. Copyright © 1979, 1987, 2000 and 2001 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved.
WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of
this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum 1
extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 08:46:17 on 03/16/2005 under Order No.1000167257_1 which
expires on 3/7/2006, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2971155347)
SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
Applications for Payment.
1. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling
changes to the Contract.
2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements
governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's

construction schedule.
1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and
schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.
b. Submittal schedule.
c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days
before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately
phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each phase of payment.
B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the
schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of
Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents.
Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the
Contract Sum.
a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout
requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract
amount.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications
for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet
installed.
6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-
item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity.
Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.
8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total
cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-
place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as
general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for
Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the
Contract Sum.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PAYMENT PROCEDURES

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by
Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final
Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between
Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the
period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the 15th day of the month.
The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.
D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for
Applications for Payment.
E. Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment. Sample copies are included in Project
Manual.
F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to
sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use
updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of
construction period covered by application.
G. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Architect Construction Manager by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and
similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from
entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered
by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction
for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.
I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with
submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Schedule of unit prices.
5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
6. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
7. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
8. Copies of building permits.
9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the
Work.
10. Initial progress report.
11. Report of preconstruction conference.
12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work
claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement
showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for
Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
K. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for
Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including,
but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes,
fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of
Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for
corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.

SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Coordination drawings.
2. Requests for Information (RFIs).
3. Project Web site.
4. Project meetings.
1. Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for a description of the division of work among
separate contracts and responsibility for coordination activities not in this Section.
2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-
engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the
Contract Documents.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of
the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include
the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to

ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations,
included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation
of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own
installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility
for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for
coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is
required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with
other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such
administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual

Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability
necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials
fabricated or installed by more than one entity.
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and
resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil,
mechanical, and electrical systems.
b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be
in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide
alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor
dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.
B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible
ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid.
2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and
electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate
layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings.
3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and
elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.
4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor
closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.
6. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated,
but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility.
1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract
Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no
response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work
of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and
the following:
1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing
interpretation.
C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable
to Architect.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven
working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be
considered as received the following working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for
response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum
may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section
"Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.
E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log
weekly. Include the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected
parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.
1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal
Request, as appropriate.
2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.
1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Architect will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of
date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and
agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner
and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before
starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after
execution of the Agreement.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and
its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the
conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude
matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for RFIs.
g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
j. Submittal procedures.
k. Preparation of record documents.

l. Use of the premises.
m. Work restrictions.
n. Working hours.
o. Owner's occupancy requirements.
p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
q. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
r. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
s. Construction waste management and recycling.
t. Parking availability.
u. Office, work, and storage areas.
v. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
w. First aid.
x. Security.
y. Progress cleaning.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction
activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by
the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have
preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity
under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Review of mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility problems.
k. Time schedules.
l. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturer's written instructions.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
u. Installation procedures.
v. Coordination with other work.
w. Required performance results.
x. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required
corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring
information.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate
whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene
the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Progress Meetings: Architect will conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor,
supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or
performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the
meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other
items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to
status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine
whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to
Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be
expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule
revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Progress cleaning.
10) Quality and work standards.
11) Status of correction of deficient items.
12) Field observations.
13) Status of RFIs.
14) Status of proposal requests.
15) Pending changes.
16) Status of Change Orders.
17) Pending claims and disputes.
18) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting
minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting
where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule
concurrently with the report of each meeting.

SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction
during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Construction schedule updating reports.
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Site condition reports.
1. Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for preparing a combined Contractor's
construction schedule.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and
controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and
resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start
and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where
activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can
be performed and the critical path of Project.
C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that
establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly
owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones
and Contract completion date.
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.
2. PDF electronic file.
B. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show
logic ties for activities.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire
construction period.
1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with
requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.
D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each
activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, original duration, remaining duration,
early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.
1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual
start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order
by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
SPRINGVILLE CITY CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.
G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction
activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal
schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in
proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial
Completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early
completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the
Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed
by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items
and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule.
Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing,
fabrication, and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section
"Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction
schedule with submittal schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial
Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of
Substantial Completion.
6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items
and final completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows
in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.
4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
c. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
f. Provisions for future construction.
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.
5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work.
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited
to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion[.]

E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence
prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1. Unresolved issues.
2. Unanswered Requests for Information.
3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.
4. Notations on returned submittals.
5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the
current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor
intends to regain compliance with the schedule.
G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been
developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type,

Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week
with a continuous vertical line.
1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated
completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual
construction progress and activities. Issue schedule monthly with each Application for Payment.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to,
changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and
inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule
responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same
locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the
Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

SECTION 01 32 33 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs.
2. Periodic construction photographs.
1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as Project
Record Documents at Project closeout.
A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location
and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as
corresponding photographic documentation.
B. Digital Photographs: Submit unaltered, original, full-size image files within three days of taking
photographs.
1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 5 megapixels.
2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag:
a. Name of Project.
b. Date photograph was taken.
c. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation
or story of construction.
A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a professional

photographer of construction projects for not less than three years.
1.4 USAGE RIGHTS
A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of
photographic documentation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, with minimum size of 5 megapixels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.
B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly
show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.
1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic
location.
C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without
alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.
1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site,
available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to
Architect.
D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site and
surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage
points, as directed by Architect.
1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs.
2. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work.
3. Take 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record
physical conditions at start of construction.
4. Photograph areas of existing damaged construction. Failure to document existing damages to
buildings and or site improvements may result in requirement for contractor to repair or replace.
E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 10 photographs weekly, with timing each month adjusted to
coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show
status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
F. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of Substantial
Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Architect will inform photographer of desired
vantage points.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements
for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports,
including Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance
manuals.
3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
4. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration
of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's
responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require
Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required
by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and
delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to
submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those
corrections.
1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be
provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for
use in preparing Shop Drawings.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data
drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of the Agreement included
in Project Manual.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction

activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and
related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing
will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with
other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for
review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be
authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing,
including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a
submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial
submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to
each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall
include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and
action taken by Architect.
4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing
the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name of Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
h. Category and type of submittal.
i. Submittal purpose and description.
j. Specification Section number and title.
k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of
multiple items.
l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
n. Related physical samples submitted directly.
o. Indication of full or partial submittal.
p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
r. Other necessary identification.
s. Remarks.
5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:
a. Project name.
b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
c. Manufacturer name.
d. Product name.
E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
F. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators,

installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction
activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action
submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements:

1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic
Project record document file.
2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity
responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or
other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted certificates and
certifications where indicated.
b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where
indicated.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of
product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not
suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
6. Submit Product Data in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop
Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on
Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following
information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings
on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by
1067 mm).
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and
actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one
submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of
Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification
information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine
final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification
Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are
the property of Contractor.
5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of
units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern,
texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product
line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same
material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical
with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations
expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured
or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used
materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for
independent testing and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets;
remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record
sample.
1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or
product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show
approximate limits of variations.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating
types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in
tabular form:
1. Submit product schedule in the following format:
F. Coordination Drawings Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project
Management and Coordination."
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section

"Construction Progress Documentation."
H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Payment Procedures."
I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
L. LEED Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 sustainable design requirements
Section.
M. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or
person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of
architects and owners, and other information specified.
N. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with
requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and
Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
O. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer
for this specific Project.

P. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing
experience where required.
Q. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
S. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard
form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract
Documents.
T. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency.
U. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
V. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality
Requirements."
W. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of
product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
X. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either
during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
Y. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of
assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if
applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design
professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and
systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written
request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the
responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be
designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract
Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of
the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions.
Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Division 01 Section
"Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and
location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's
approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for
compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return
them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions
required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp
appropriately to indicate action.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does
not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for
resubmittal without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.

Digital Data Use Agreement
Contractor:
At your request, WPA Architecture (WPA) will provide electronic files for your convenience and use in the
preparation of shop drawings related to the _____________________________________________________
(Project) subject to the following terms and conditions:
Electronic files were prepared using AutoCad software. WPA makes no representation as to the compatibility
of these files with your hardware or your software.
Data contained on these electronic files are part of an Instrument of Service by WPA and shall not be used by
you, your firm or anyone else receiving this data through or from you for any other purpose other than as a
convenience in the preparation of shop drawings for the referenced project. Any other use or reuse by you or
by others will be at your sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to WPA. You agree to make no claim
and hereby waive, to the fullest extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against
WPA, including their officers, directors, employees, agents or sub-consultants that may arise out of or in
connection with your use of the electronic files.
Furthermore, you shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold harmless against all damages,
liabilities or costs, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and defense costs, arising out of or resulting from your
use of these electronic files.
These electronic files are not construction documents. Differences may exist between these electronic files
and corresponding hard-copy construction documents. WPA makes no representation regarding the accuracy
or completeness of the electronic files you receive. You are responsible for determining if any conflicts exist.
By your use of these electronic files, you are not relieved of your duty to fully comply with the contract
documents, including, and without limitation, the need to check, confirm and coordinate all dimensions and
details, take field measurements, verify field conditions and coordinate your work with that of other contractors
for the project.
Because information presented on the electronic files can be modified, unintentionally or otherwise, WPA
reserves the right to remove all indication of ownership and/or involvement from each electronic display.
WPA will furnish you electronic files of the following drawing sheets [please indicate]:
Under no circumstances shall delivery of the electronic files for use by you be deemed a sale by WPA, and
WPA makes no warranties, either express or implied, of merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose.
In no event shall WPA be liable for any loss of profit or any consequential damages as a result of your use or
reuse of these electronic files.
WPA Architecture
475 North Freedom Boulevard Contractor
Provo, Utah 84601
Address
City, State, Zip
BY
DATE
E-mail

ELECTRIC OPERATIONS CENTER 0133 00 - 7
SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated.
These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance
and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by
Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of
the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply
with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of
the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply
with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency
qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product
performance and compliance with specified requirements.
D. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill,
factory, or shop.
E. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work
and for completed Work.
F. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall
mean the same as testing agency.
G. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,

Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation,
erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain
construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements
specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
H. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed
a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with
special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent
requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a
decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum
provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality
specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements,
SPRINGVILLE CITY QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer
uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.4 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections.
Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract
Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if
not, what corrective action was taken.
4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies
with requirements.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications,
inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments,
correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and
regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required;
individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to
produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction
with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in

jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind
indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly,
or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed
by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification
requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with
additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having
jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is

trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that
are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will
engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies
engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed
to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be
adjusted by Change Order.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's
responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with
requirements, whether specified or not.
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to
perform these quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by
Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or
inspecting will be performed.
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written
report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are
Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they
so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and
inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and
conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written
reports.
D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that
replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties.
Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work
during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are
conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or
accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-
control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in
advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting.
Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control

services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to
accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and
inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and
reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work
during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to
Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes
a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and
inspection log for Architect's, reference during normal working hours.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged
construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification
Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend
restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with
the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for
quality-control services.

SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and
requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the
Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized,"

"selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in

Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled,"
and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and
rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and
similar operations.
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling,
erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and
similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown
on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be
built.
1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly
into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract
Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry
standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the
Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies
directly from publication source.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Where names, abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they
shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in
Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." These are subject to
change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in a list which can be
requested from the Architect.
SPRINGVILLE CITY REFERENCES

2. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in a list which can be requested
from the Architect.
3. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in a list which can
be requested from the Architect.
4. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations
in a list which can be requested from the Architect.
5. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in a list which can
be requested from the Architect.
SPRINGVILLE CITY REFERENCES

SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection
facilities.
1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction
personnel.
B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction
General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric
service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility
before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a
construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and
foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction
personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections.
Keep office clean and orderly.
1. Provide table and chairs for approximately 10 individuals.
C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials
and equipment for construction operations.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and
classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-
contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is
prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.
SPRINGVILLE CITY TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use
during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at
end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Division 01 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.
1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no
longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if
necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service
facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition
existing before initial use.
E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction
personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned
and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these
facilities to condition existing before initial use.
F. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed
installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high
humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being
installed.
G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for
curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of
high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements
being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize
energy consumption.
H. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a
condition acceptable to Owner. Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,
capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.
I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without
operating entire system.
J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:

a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Police and fire departments.
b. Ambulance service.
c. Contractor's home office.
d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.
e. Architect's office.
f. Engineers' offices.
g. Owner's office.
h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from
field office.
K. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for
use by Architect and Owner to access project electronic documents and maintain electronic
communications. Equip computer with not less than the following:
1. Processor: Intel Pentium D or Intel CoreDuo, 3.0 GHz processing speed.
2. Memory: 4 gigabyte.
3. Disk Storage: 300 gigabyte hard-disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW drive.
4. Display: 22-inch (300-mm) LCD monitor with 128 Mb dedicated video RAM.
5. Network Connectivity: 10/100BaseT Ethernet.
6. Productivity Software:
a. Microsoft Office Professional, XP or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook.
b. Adobe Reader 7.0 or higher.
c. WinZip 7.0 or higher.
7. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, photocopying,
scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions.
8. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall, providing
minimum 384 Kbps upload and 1 Mbps download speeds at each computer.
9. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, phishing, and
spam protection in a combined application.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or
within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with
NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove
before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted
to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate
for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated
on Drawings.
1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required
to minimize dust.
C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same
location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits
indicated, as necessary for construction operations.
1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas.
2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to
Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, re-grading, proof-
rolling, compacting, and testing.
4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before
Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final
course according to Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving."
D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

E. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.
F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain
Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties
or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs. Sign shall include the following:
a. Title of project.
b. Names and logo of Utah DFCM.
c. Name and logo of state agency.
d. Name, logo and telephone number of architect.
e. Name, logo and telephone number of contractor
2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals
seeking entrance to Project.
a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."
I. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from
construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with
progress cleaning requirements in Division 01 Section "Execution."
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other
improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered.
Repair damage to existing facilities.
B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as
required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil
contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of 2003 EPA Construction
General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent and requirements specified in
Division 31 Section "Site Clearing."
D. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge
of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and
walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings.
E. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and
around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy
rains.
F. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to
protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage,
flooding, and erosion.
G. Site Enclosure Fence: Use existing fence and gates to prevent people and animals from easily entering
site except by entrance gates. Maintain existing fence until new fence has been installed.
1. A fence, new or existing shall be maintained at al times to secure Owner’s equipment and supplies
as well as the construction site.
2. Control security of site by complying with Owner’s requirements and by limiting number of keys and
restricting distribution to authorized personnel.
H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

I. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and
completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide
temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary
enclosures.
3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of
mold that may appear during construction.
B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to
wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and keep porous
and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit
availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and
similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid
possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection
facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it
has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion.
Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of
interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace
construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner
reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Closeout Procedures."

SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project;
product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special
warranties; and comparable products.
1. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from
previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and
terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model
number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is
current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility.
Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to
have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical
properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named

and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating
comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.
A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title
and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for
evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify
Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of
receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is
later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product
request within time allocated.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section

"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use
on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected
products were also options.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and
loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of
construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are
flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed
container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing,
unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to
determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation
and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and
weather-protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do
not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular
product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights
for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready
for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly
executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written
document using indicated form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 33. Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are
undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a
complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified,
provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar
situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish
salient characteristics of products.
B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named
product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's
convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a
product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable
products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
3. Products:
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and
products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable
b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product,
that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"
Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable
b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that
complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on
Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a
comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications
indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.
Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed
product by one of the other named manufacturers.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product
that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on
whether a proposed product matches.
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified
requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for
proposal of product.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect
will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both
standard and premium items.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when
the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is
consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is
compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability,
visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names
and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.

SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
6. Progress cleaning.
7. Starting and adjusting.
8. Protection of installed construction.
9. Correction of the Work.
1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record
Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final
cleaning.
3. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction.
A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of
improvements comply with requirements.
B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous
materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the
kind indicated.
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction
elements.
1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations
and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and
support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in
a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in
a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to
perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety.
4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of
cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in
Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that
has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
SPRINGVILLE CITY EXECUTION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and
procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements of Division 01 sustainable
design requirements Section.
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will
provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place
materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence
and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary
sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving
Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work,
examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
Record observations.
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections
before equipment and fixture installation.
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be
installed.
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or
primers.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the
Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other
construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on
Drawings.
C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of
Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section
"Project Management and Coordination."
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in
relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect
promptly.
B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and
elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish limits on use of Project site.
3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required
dimensions.
4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.
7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil
placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations,
column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer
survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two
or more locations.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points
before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during
construction operations.
B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for
type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as
indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease
of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain
conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in
excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on
site and placement in permanent locations.
F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory
prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are
made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and
number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of
the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load
conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights
directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for
installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral
anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in
time for installation.
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange
joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with
cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other
construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during
installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting
and patching operations.
E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to
adjoining areas.
F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required
to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize
interruption to occupied areas.
G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations,
including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If
possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written
recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and
chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of
adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core
drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed.
Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or
other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following
performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide
materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate
physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into
retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of
uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and
replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface
of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils,
putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly.
Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper
execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work
area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of
manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If
specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health
or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers
or into waterways.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already
in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the
remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability
without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure
during the construction period.
3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units,
replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace
damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality
Requirements."

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

SECTION 01 74 19 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste.
2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste.
3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.
1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.
2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and removal
of above- and below-grade improvements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from
construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective
demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or
deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.
F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the
Work.
A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
A. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and
incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
B. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator.
1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section.
Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate
quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.
B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site-clearing and construction waste
generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.
SPRINGVILLE CITY CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste
materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate
on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
SPRINGVILLE CITY CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not
limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures.
2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
5. Repair of the Work.
1. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction
photographic documentation.
2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual
requirements.
3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
4. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel.
5. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the
Work in those Sections.
A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.
B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other
Sections.
1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected
(Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is
incomplete.
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to
requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete
at time of request.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting
Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy
permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record
documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic
SPRINGVILLE CITY CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record
information.
3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including
specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and
similar documents.
4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections,
including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by
Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance
material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of
related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals.
5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
6. Submit sustainable design submittals required in Division 01 sustainable design requirements
Section and in individual Division 02 through 33 Sections.
7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to
requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete
at time of request.
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel
of changeover in security provisions.
3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and
systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training."
6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders.
8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction
tools, and similar elements.
9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10
days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of
items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or
corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the
following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."
2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion
inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect.
Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with
insurance requirements.
4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and
systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will
prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be
completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction
operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by
Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from
lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual
walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work
where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay
in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project
Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as
necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm)
paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to
identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation,
including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project
name, and name of Contractor.
4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond
submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each
item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the
surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or
that might damage finished surfaces.
1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use
products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local
laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or
unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply
with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including
landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign
substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign
deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.

f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of
stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior
surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums,
shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according
to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove
glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or
broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking
care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication,
paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.
l. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from
water exposure.
m. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of
diffusers, registers, and grills.
n. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
o. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial
Completion.
B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts,
refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating
equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements.
Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and
permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged
transparent materials.
2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace
finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.
3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or
reduce longevity.
4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy
starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance
manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Product maintenance manuals.
5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for
the Work in those Sections.
A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification
Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and
organized as required by this Section.
1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are
acceptable.
2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field
conditions.
B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on
digital media acceptable to Architect.
a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name.
Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.
b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.
2. Two paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages
and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two copies.
3. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial
Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and
materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information.
B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system
and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual
shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
C. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.
SPRINGVILLE CITY OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

7. Name and contact information for Architect.
8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.
9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems
contained in the manuals.
10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the
content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.
E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system,
subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and
components of one system into a single binder.
F. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for
each manual type required.
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning
of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names.
Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual
directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual
composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the
system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic
manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.
G. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic
sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and
indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for
multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark
each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment
included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title
of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software
storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as
foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert
typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.
2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions
and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar
codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer,
supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
2.3 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual
Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment
indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.
2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source
information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties
and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to
match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer

or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in
Project Manual.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related
services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions
that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source
information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and
service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty
and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified
by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address,
and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the

following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and
component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance
procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required
lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with
standard time allotment.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified
and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance
materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone
number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions
that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by
emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.
B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and
maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data
indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a
system.
D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets
pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component
incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using
appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete
references to information not applicable.
E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of
component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams.
Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of
completed installation.
1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.
F. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.

SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the
following:
1. Record Drawings.
1. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual
requirements.
2. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the
Work in those Sections.
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings,
incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity
is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding
marked-up record prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to
identify or measure and record later.
b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel
proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.
3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and
similar identification, where applicable.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record
keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous
records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as [PDF electronic file] [paper copy] [scanned PDF
electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals].
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record
document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait
until end of Project.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office
apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for
construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition,
protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's
reference during normal working hours.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

SECTION 01 79 00 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including
the following:
1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
3. Demonstration and training video recordings.
A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list
of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors'
names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.
1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video
recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional
module.
A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each
training module.
1. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared and bound
in format matching operation and maintenance manuals and in PDF electronic file format on
compact disc.
A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel

in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has
resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.
B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in

Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and
training.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize
disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.
B. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance
manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and
approved by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each
system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a
description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module,
include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
SPRINGVILLE CITY DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

c. Operating standards.
d. Regulatory requirements.
e. Equipment function.
f. Operating characteristics.
g. Limiting conditions.
h. Performance curves.
2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a. Emergency manuals.
b. Operations manuals.
c. Maintenance manuals.
d. Project record documents.
e. Identification systems.
f. Warranties and bonds.
g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.
b. Instructions on stopping.
c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f. Special operating instructions and procedures.
4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Startup procedures.
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m. Special operating instructions and procedures.
5. Adjustments: Include the following:
a. Alignments.
b. Checking adjustments.
c. Noise and vibration adjustments.
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a. Diagnostic instructions.
b. Test and inspection procedures.
7. Maintenance: Include the following:
a. Inspection procedures.
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d. Procedures for routine cleaning
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.
g. Instruction on use of special tools.
8. Repairs: Include the following:
a. Diagnosis instructions.
b. Repair instructions.
c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module.
Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Operations and Maintenance Data."

3.2 INSTRUCTION
A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to
coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants,
instruction times, and location.
B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems,
subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements,
criteria, and regulatory requirements.
2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.
3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal
operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational
facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data
submittals.
E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of
module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS
A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video
recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations,
board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.
1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson
outline.
B. Video Recording Format: Provide high-quality color video recordings with menu navigation in format
acceptable to Architect.
C. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video recording is
recorded. Include description of items being viewed.
D. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in
same format as recordings of live training.

SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to
be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where
indicated.
C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
A. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to
accept hazardous wastes.
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as
practical.
B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with
selective demolition.
C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and
Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.
D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage
during selective demolition operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective
demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective
demolition required.
C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or
design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a
written report to Architect.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them
against damage.
1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 011000
"Summary."
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and

seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively
demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary
services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of
services/systems to other parts of building.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to
ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used
facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary
Facilities and Controls."
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to
people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and
as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and
as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting
methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or
small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize
disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing
finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces,
such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-
cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting
operations.
4. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during
selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage
location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition
operations are complete.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated
to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in
an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey
debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and
Disposal."
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture
design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement.
A. Material certificates.
B. Material test reports.
C. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that
complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production
Facilities."
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and
ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
C. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation
tests and to design concrete mixtures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth
concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide
lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
SPRINGVILLE CITY CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged
coating in each 12-inch (300-mm) bar length.
C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic,
or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source,
throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, gray. Supplement with the following:
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inches (38 mm) nominal.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened
concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh
concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately
9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.
F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

nondissipating.
G. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1,
Class A.
1. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
H. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.
1. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.6 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory
trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as
needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40
percent.
C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and
workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or
other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and
parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious
materials ratio below 0.50.
D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength:
a. Exterior Pavements: 4500 psi (31 MPa) at 28 days.
b. Building Concrete (Except Footings): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.
c. Building Concrete (Footings): 3000 psi (20.7MPa) at 28 days.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 (for 3000 psi); 0.45 (for 4000 psi).
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2
to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing
admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25mm).
4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm)
nominal maximum aggregate size.
5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
2.8 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.9 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and
furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery
time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral,
static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such
loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and
position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is
attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing
concrete.
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into
areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete
thickness as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of
joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface
finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or
diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will
not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction
cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with
vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as
indicated.
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is
complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete
will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section
cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid
segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and
defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-
surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly
and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins
and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish or to be covered with
a water-proof membrane applied directly to concrete.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and
rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not
apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.
2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to
coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand
with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts

determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into
voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep
surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland cement
and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement
in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces.
Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to
formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue
final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise
indicated.
3.7 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing
operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float
passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet
waterproofing.
C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-
driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform
in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied
coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet,
ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating
system.
2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled,
freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on
the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).
D. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be
installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a
fine broom.
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.
E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as
indicated.
3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull
floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing
concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300
mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately
repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours
after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging
concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous
operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas
subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later
and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.9 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace
concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests
and inspections and prepare test reports.

SECTION 03 33 00 - ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes integrally colored, cast-in-place architectural concrete including form facings,
reinforcement accessories, concrete materials, concrete mixture design, placement procedures, and
finishes.
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
C. Formwork shop drawings.
D. Placement schedule.
E. Samples: For each of the following materials:

1. Form ties.
2. Coarse- and fine-aggregate gradations.
3. Chamfers and rustications.
A. Material certificates.
B. Material test reports.
A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5 and Section 6, "Architectural
Concrete."
2. ACI 303.1, "Specification for Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete."
B. Field Sample Panels: After approval of verification sample and before casting architectural concrete,
produce field sample panels to demonstrate the approved range of selections made under Sample
submittals. Produce a minimum of three sets of full-scale panels, cast vertically, approximately 48 by 48
by 6 inches (1200 by 1200 by 150 mm) minimum, to demonstrate the expected range of finish, color, and
texture variations.
C. Mockups: Before casting architectural concrete, build mockups to verify selections made under Sample
submittals and to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of
workmanship. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the
completed Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork and other form-facing
material requirements.
B. Form-Facing Panels for As-Cast Finishes: Steel, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, or other approved
nonabsorptive panel materials that will provide continuous, true, and smooth architectural concrete
surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
SPRINGVILLE CITY ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

C. Chamfer and V-groove Strips: Metal, rigid plastic, elastomeric rubber, or dressed wood, 3/4 by 3/4 inch
(19 by 19 mm), minimum; nonstaining; in longest practicable lengths.
D. Form Joint Tape: Compressible foam tape; pressure sensitive; AAMA 800, "Specification 810.1,
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape"; minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.
E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, internally disconnecting or removable ties designed to resist lateral
pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for steel reinforcement and other
requirements for reinforcement accessories.
B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded-wire fabric in place; manufacture according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard
Practice."
1. Where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1, gray, plastic-protected or CRSI
Class 2, stainless-steel bar supports.
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source,
throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, gray. Supplement with the following:
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or Grade 120.
c. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from single
source[ with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar
applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials].
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm). Gradation: Uniformly graded.
C. Normal-Weight Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33 or ASTM C 144, manufactured or natural sand, from same
source for entire Project.
D. Water: Potable, complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M except free of wash water from mixer washout
operations.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened
concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
C. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures;
color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately
9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C. Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.

1. For integrally colored concrete, curing compound shall be[ approved by color pigment
manufacturer.
2. For concrete indicated to be sealed, curing compound shall be compatible with sealer.
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of cast-in-place architectural concrete proportioned on
basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed design mixtures
based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B. Proportion concrete mixtures as follows:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa).
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.42.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal
maximum aggregate size.
C. Cementitious Materials: For cast-in-place architectural concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by
weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements.
D. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and
to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Architectural Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information.
1. Clean equipment used to mix and deliver cast-in-place architectural concrete to prevent
contamination from other concrete.
2. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery
time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. General: Comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, embedded items, and
shoring and reshoring.
B. Limit deflection of form-facing panels to not exceed ACI 303.1 requirements.
C. Fabricate forms to result in cast-in-place architectural concrete that complies with ACI 117, "Specifications
for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
D. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of cast-in-place architectural concrete.
E. Place v-grooves in wall panels where indicated.
F. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other
debris just before placing concrete.
G. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain
proper alignment.
H. Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid backing and attach
securely to prevent deflection and maintain stability of liners during concreting. Prevent form liners from

sagging and stretching in hot weather. Seal joints of form liners and form liner accessories to prevent
mortar leaks. Coat form liner with form-release agent.
3.2 REINFORCEMENT AND INSERTS
A. General: Comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for fabricating and installing steel
reinforcement. Securely fasten steel reinforcement and wire ties against shifting during concrete
placement.
B. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of
concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after
placing concrete if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and
protection operations are maintained.
1. Cut off and grind glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties flush with surface of concrete.
B. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of
concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.
Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or
disturbing shores.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and
secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for cast-in-place architectural concrete surfaces.
3.4 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: Install construction joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of cast-
in-place architectural concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction
joints unless otherwise indicated.
B. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints true to line with faces perpendicular to
surface plane of cast-in-place architectural concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not
impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by
Architect.
B. Deposit concrete continuously between construction joints. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or
reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
3.6 FINISHES
A. Architectural Concrete Finish: Match Architect's design reference sample, identified and described as
indicated, to satisfaction of Architect.
B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to
formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.
1. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Maintain uniformity of special finishes over construction joints unless otherwise indicated.

D. Abrasive-Blast Finish: Perform abrasive blasting after compressive strength of concrete exceeds 2000 psi
(13.8 MPa). Coordinate with formwork removal to ensure that surfaces to be abrasive blasted are treated
at same age for uniform results.
1. Depth of Cut: Use an abrasive grit of proper type and gradation to expose aggregate and
surrounding matrix surfaces to match design reference sample or mockup, as follows:
a. Brush: Remove cement matrix to dull surface sheen and expose face of fine aggregate;
with no significant reveal.
b. Light: Expose fine aggregate with occasional exposure of coarse aggregate and uniform
color; with maximum reveal of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
c. Medium: Generally expose coarse aggregate; with slight reveal, a maximum of 1/4 inch (6
mm).
d. Heavy: Expose and reveal coarse aggregate to a maximum projection of one-third its
diameter; with reveal range of 1/4 to 1/2 inch (6 to 13 mm).
3.7 CONCRETE CURING
A. Begin curing cast-in-place architectural concrete immediately after removing forms from concrete. Cure
according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods that will not mottle, discolor, or
stain concrete:
1. Moisture curing.
2. Moisture-retaining-cover curing.
3. Curing compound.
A. General: Comply with field quality-control requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.9 REPAIRS, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING
A. Repair and cure damaged finished surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete when approved by
Architect. Match repairs to color, texture, and uniformity of surrounding surfaces and to repairs on
approved mockups.
1. Remove and replace cast-in-place architectural concrete that cannot be repaired and cured to
Architect's approval.
B. Protect corners, edges, and surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete from damage; use guards and
barricades.
C. Protect cast-in-place architectural concrete from staining, laitance, and contamination during remainder of
construction period.

SECTION 03 45 00 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Architectural precast concrete cladding units.
2. Architectural precast concrete shall match color and finish of cast-in-place architectural concrete.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide architectural precast concrete units and connections capable of
withstanding the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Loads: As indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water-absorption
tests.
C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units. Indicate
locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit. Indicate joints, reveals,
and extent and location of each surface finish. Indicate details at building corners.
D. Samples: For each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, in
sets of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2
inches (300 by 300 by 50 mm).
A. Welding certificates.
B. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers:
C. Material test reports: For aggregates.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural precast concrete
units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings
and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI
Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of architectural precast
concrete units indicated.
C. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-control

recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 117,
"Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products."
D. Sample Panels: After sample approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete units, produce
a minimum of 2 sample panels approximately 2 sq. ft. (.19 sq. m) in area for review by Architect.
Incorporate full-scale details of architectural features, finishes, textures, and transitions in sample panels.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REINFORCING MATERIALS
B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat
sheets.
D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.
E. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices
for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to
PCI MNL 117.
F. Prestressing Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 270 (Grade 1860), uncoated, 7-wire, low-relaxation
strand.
1. Coat unbonded post-tensioning strand with corrosion inhibitor passing ASTM D 1743 and sheath
with polypropylene tendon sheathing. Include anchorage devices and coupler assemblies.
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, mix gray with white cement, of same type,
brand, and mill source.
B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials:

1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3 percent.
2. Metakaolin Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class N.
3. Silica Fume Admixture: ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physical requirement.
4. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates
complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a
single source (pit or quarry) for Project.
1. Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts with
cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample.
a. Gradation: Uniformly graded.
2. Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of same material as
coarse aggregate, unless otherwise approved by Architect.
D. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing
admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading.
E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required
admixtures.
F. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not contain
calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of admixture.
2.3 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS
A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Carbon-Steel Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished, AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
Type A or B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3.
C. Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M.
D. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M.

E. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60-30 (Grade 415-205).
F. Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A 675/A 675M, Grade 65 (Grade 450).
G. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496 or ASTM A 706/A 706M.
H. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); carbon-steel,
hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and flat, unhardened steel
washers, ASTM F 844.
I. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts;
heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and hardened carbon-steel washers,
ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M).
J. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items and items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot-
dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less than 94
percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035A or SSPC-Paint 20.
2.4 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 144 or
ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required
for placement and hydration.
B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected
silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents,
complying with ASTM C 1107, Grade A for drypack and Grades B and C for flowable grout and of
consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working time.
C. Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C 881/C 881M, of type, grade, and
class to suit requirements.
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.

1. Limit use of fly ash and silica fume to 20 percent of portland cement by weight; limit metakaolin and
silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant
personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option.
C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318
(ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.
D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch or field test data
methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete
with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) minimum.
E. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to PCI MNL 117.
F. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement
having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117.
G. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware
with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. Accurately position for

attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage
hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement.
1. Weld headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M
and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."
B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps,
hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units to supporting and
adjacent construction.
C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as indicated on
the Contract Drawings.
D. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and supporting
reinforcement.
E. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses.
F. Prestress tendons for architectural precast concrete units by either pretensioning or post-tensioning
methods. Comply with PCI MNL 117.
G. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section for measuring, mixing,
transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added.
H. Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 1 inch (25 mm) or 1.5 times
the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover specified.
I. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast
concrete units.
1. Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.
J. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging
reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air on surfaces.
Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117.
1. Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR-6, "Interim Guidelines for
the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants."
K. Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.
L. Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent
markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting
date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure.
M. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or by
accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until
compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on performance or
appearance of final product.
N. Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including
structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 117
and Architect's approval.
2.7 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and
corners precise and true so each finished panel complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as
position tolerances for cast-in items.
2.8 FINISHES
A. Panel faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners, including false joints
shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast concrete units
to match approved sample panels and as follows:

1. Design Reference Sample: Match Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete.
2. Abrasive-Blast Finish: Use abrasive grit, equipment, application techniques, and cleaning
procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces.
B. Finish exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match face-surface finish.
C. Finish unexposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units by float finish.
2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117 requirements. If
using self-consolidating concrete, also test and inspect according to PCI TR-6, "Interim Guidelines for the
Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants."
B. Owner will employ an independent testing agency to evaluate architectural precast concrete fabricator's
quality-control and testing methods.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting architectural precast
concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.
B. Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances.
Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment as units
are being permanently connected.
1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide for uniform joint widths of 3/4 inch (19 mm).
C. Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise
indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as practical after
connecting and grouting are completed.
D. Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4 for welding, welding electrodes,
appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
E. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent loosening of
nuts after final adjustment.
F. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in place until hard
enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled.
Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp
for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it
affects finishes or hardens.
G. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without exceeding
the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I.
A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections and
prepare reports:
1. Erection of precast concrete members.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test
reports.
C. Field welds will be subject to visual inspections and nondestructive testing according to ASTM E 165 or
ASTM E 709. High-strength bolted connections will be subject to inspections.

D. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
E. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.3 FINISHES
A. Concrete Finish: Match color and finish of Cast-in-Place Architectural concrete.
B. Abrasive-Blast Finish: Perform abrasive blasting after compressive strength of concrete exceeds 2000 psi
(13.8 MPa). Coordinate with formwork removal to ensure that surfaces to be abrasive blasted are treated
at same age for uniform results.
1. Depth of Cut: Use an abrasive grit of proper type and gradation to expose aggregate and
surrounding matrix surfaces to match design reference sample or mockup, as follows:
a. Brush: Remove cement matrix to dull surface sheen and expose face of fine aggregate;
with no significant reveal.
b. Light: Expose fine aggregate with occasional exposure of coarse aggregate and uniform
color; with maximum reveal of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
c. Medium: Generally expose coarse aggregate; with slight reveal, a maximum of 1/4 inch (6
mm).
d. Heavy: Expose and reveal coarse aggregate to a maximum projection of one-third its
diameter; with reveal range of 1/4 to 1/2 inch (6 to 13 mm).
3.4 REPAIRS
A. Repair damaged architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Architect. The Architect reserves the
right to reject repaired units that do not comply with requirements.
B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity of
adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between original and repaired work,
when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 feet (6 m).
C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780.
D. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop primer.
E. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not comply with
requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view.
B. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and
adjacent materials immediately.
C. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to
remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.
1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's
recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and water, using stiff
fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other work from staining or damage
due to cleaning operations.
2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete
finishes or damage adjacent materials.

SECTION 04 22 00 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Concrete masonry units (CMU's).
2. Decorative concrete masonry units.
3. Steel reinforcing bars.
4. Masonry-cell insulation.
1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified
requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 for
compressive strength.
2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for
compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780 for
compressive strength.
4. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019.
B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
C. Samples: For each type and color of colored mortar.
A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units include data on
material properties.
B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according
to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and
ASTM C 91 for air content.
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents.
A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost.
Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing
conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
SPRINGVILLE CITY CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain
chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such
defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of
1500 psi (8.9 MPa).
2. Density Classification: Normal weight.
C. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90. (Interior CMU wall only)

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of
1500 psi (8.9 MPa).
2. Density Classification: Normal weight.
3. Pattern and Texture:
a. Standard pattern, ground-face (honed) finish. Colored block selected by Architect from
manufacturer’s standard selection.
b. Standard pattern, split-face finish. Colored block selected by Architect from manufacturer’s
standard selection.
c. Scored vertically, standard finish. Colored block selected by Architect from manufacturer’s
standard selection.
2.3 MASONRY LINTELS
A. General: Provide one of the following:
B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs with
reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout.
2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction.
Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other
ingredients.
D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar
mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in
masonry mortar.
G. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime and mortar
pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.

H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the
No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required
mortar color.
I. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
J. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with

ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of
composition indicated.
K. Water: Potable.
2.5 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with
the following unless otherwise indicated.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2
coating.
2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Wood Stud Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical
or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal
adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
D. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- (2.66-mm-) thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter metal
rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod
to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
E. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick by 24
inches (610 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (51 mm) or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated.
F. Anchor Bolts: Headed o L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M,
Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-
dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.
2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim and as follows:
1. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall and 1/2
inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.
2. Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall and
out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm)
and down into joint 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
B. Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive
rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to
produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch (1.02 mm).

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal.
2) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
3) Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500.
4) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier Wall
Flashing.
5) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing.
6) W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Air-Shield Thru-Wall Flashing.
C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim."
D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or
products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to
substrates.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to
35 percent; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from [styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with

ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805] [or] [PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406] and
designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration
as indicated.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15
asphalt felt).
2.9 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION
A. Molded-Polystyrene Insulation Units: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion of
polystyrene-resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C 578, Type I. Provide
specially shaped units designed for installing in cores of masonry units.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Concrete Block Insulating Systems; Korfil.
b. Shelter Enterprises Inc.; Omni Core.
2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-
repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view,
regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure
quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to
Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types
of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S.
2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product [or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients
to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products].
1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight.
3. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:
a. Decorative CMUs.
b. Pre-faced CMUs.

E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color
or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.
1. Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:
a. Decorative CMUs.
b. Pre-faced CMUs.
F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply
with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day
compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi (14 MPa).
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or
minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch
(12 mm).
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4
inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.
B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10
feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level
by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12
mm) maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3
m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and
control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20
feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8
inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm),
with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm).
2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm)
or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch
(3 mm).
3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and
for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-
size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit
adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow
units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where
possible, cut edges concealed.
C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do
not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly
with masonry around built-in items.
E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire
mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and
similar items unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings
where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill
head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint)
3.4 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION
A. Install molded-polystyrene insulation units into masonry unit cells before laying units.
3.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm)
on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150
mm).
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and
extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE
A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete
to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 mm) wide between masonry and structural steel or
concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches
(915 mm) o.c. horizontally.

3.7 FLASHING
A. General: Install embedded flashing in masonry at lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of
water in wall, and where indicated.
B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture
flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar
and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive,
sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads
and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to
form end dams.
3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2
inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.
4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal
flashing termination.
C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells
and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that
they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.
3.8 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced
masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated.
Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms
to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to
carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to
resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement,
including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 48 inches (1216 mm) without prior permission
from engineer.
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and
prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and
inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's
expense.
B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes,
and locations of reinforcement.
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive
strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.
G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for
mortar air content and compressive strength.
H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and
smears before tooling joints.
B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes.
2. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of
stain on exposed surfaces.
3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated
sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.
1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.
B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described
above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes structural steel and grout.
1. Section 051213 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements for
architecturally exposed structural steel.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice
for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
A. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
D. Source quality-control reports.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program
and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD. In lieu of these requirements, the fabricator
may retain a special inspector to certify all plant produced work.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and
is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.
2. AISC 360.
3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M, Grade 50 (345).
SPRINGVILLE CITY STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

B. Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel
structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and
ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.
1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible-
washer type with plain finish.
B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon
steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.
C. Headed Anchor Rods: [ASTM F 1554, Grade 36] [ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable], straight.
1. Finish: Plain.
D. Threaded Rods: [ASTM A 36/A 36M] [ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade B7].
1. Finish: Plain.
E. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035.
2.3 PRIMER
A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with
MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
2.4 GROUT
A. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed
with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout,

noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute
working time.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to
AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360.
B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use
automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and
manufacturer's written instructions.
2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure
specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a
depth of 2 inches (50 mm).
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).
5. Galvanized surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or
flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:
1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written
instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038
mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests
and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or
produced to perform tests and inspections.
B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract
Documents.
C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and
inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's
option:
1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks
or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of
anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and
AISC 360.
B. Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen
surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not
remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with
grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish
exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges."
3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections,
and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field
welds and high-strength bolted connections.
B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.
Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract
Documents.

SECTION 05 12 13 - ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes architecturally exposed structural-steel framing.

1. Requirements in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" also apply to AESS framing.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Structural steel designated as "architecturally exposed structural
steel" or "AESS" in the Contract Documents.
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of AESS components.

1. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols. Show backing bars that are to be removed and
supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
2. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts.
B. Samples: Submit samples of AESS to set quality standards for exposed welds.
1. Two steel plates, 3/8 by 8 by 4 inches (9.5 by 200 by 100 mm), with long edges joined by a groove
weld and with weld ground smooth.
2. Steel plate, 3/8 by 8 by 8 inches (9.5 by 200 by 200 mm), with one end of a short length of
rectangular steel tube, 4 by 6 by 3/8 inches (100 by 150 by 9.5 mm), welded to plate with a
continuous fillet weld and with weld ground smooth and blended.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and
is designated an AISC-Certified Erector.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program
and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.
C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsements or SSPC-

QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Use special care in handling to prevent twisting, warping, nicking, and other damage. Store materials to
permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using
pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to
members or supporting structures.
A. Field Measurements: Where AESS is indicated to fit against other construction, verify actual dimensions
by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, round-head

assemblies.
1. Finish: Plain.
SPRINGVILLE CITY ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

B. Corrosion-Resisting (Weathering Steel), Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies:
ASTM F 1852, Type 3, round-head assemblies.
2.2 PRIMER
A. Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. In addition to special care used to handle and fabricate AESS, comply with the following:
1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes.
2. Grind sheared, punched, and flame-cut edges smooth.
3. Fabricate with exposed surfaces free of mill marks.
4. Fabricate with exposed surfaces free of seams to maximum extent possible.
5. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating, and
shop priming.
6. Fabricate with piece marks fully hidden in the completed structure or made with media that permits
full removal after erection.
7. Fabricate to the tolerances specified in AISC 303.
8. Seal-weld open ends of hollow structural sections with 1/4-inch (9.5-mm) closure plates.
B. Curved Members: Fabricate indicated members to curved shape by rolling to final shape in fabrication
shop.
1. Distortion of webs, stems, outstanding flanges, and legs of angles shall not be visible from a
distance of 20 feet (6 m) under any lighting conditions.
2. Tolerances for walls of hollow steel sections after rolling shall be approximately 1/2 inch (13 mm).
C. Coping, Blocking, and Joint Gaps: Maintain uniform gaps of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) with a tolerance of 1/32
inch (0.8 mm).
D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
E. Cleaning Corrosion-Resisting Structural Steel: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain
unpainted according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass
through steel framing members.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge
holes by burning.
2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel
surfaces.
3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
2.4 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work, and comply with the following:
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without
exceeding specified tolerances.
2. Use weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment that limit distortions to allowable tolerances.
3. Provide continuous, sealed welds at angle to gusset-plate connections and similar locations where
AESS is exposed to weather.
4. Provide continuous welds of uniform size and profile where AESS is welded.

5. Grind butt and groove welds flush to adjacent surfaces within tolerance of plus 1/16 inch, minus 0
inch (plus 1.5 mm, minus 0 mm).
6. Make butt and groove welds flush to adjacent surfaces within tolerance of plus 1/16 inch, minus 0
inch (plus 1.5 mm, minus 0 mm). Do not grind unless required for clearances or for fitting other
components, or unless directed to correct unacceptable work.
7. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth.
8. At locations where welding on the far side of an exposed connection of AESS occurs, grind
distortions and marking of the steel to a smooth profile aligned with adjacent material.
9. Make fillet welds oversize and grind to uniform profile with smooth face and transition.
10. Make fillet welds of uniform size and profile with exposed face smooth and slightly concave. Do not
grind unless directed to correct unacceptable work.
2.5 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
1. Do not quench or apply post-galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.
2. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as
weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
3. Galvanize lintels attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.
2.6 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a
depth of 2 inches (50 mm).
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
5. Galvanized surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation[ for Nongalvanized Steel]:

1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
2. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-Off Blast Cleaning."
3. SSPC-SP 14/NACE No. 8, "Industrial Blast Cleaning."
4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
5. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
6. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning."
C. Preparing Galvanized Steel for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean steel of grease, dirt, oil,
flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
D. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written
instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038
mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of
anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.
1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments
showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep AESS secure, plumb,
and in alignment.

1. If possible, locate welded tabs for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling where they will
be concealed from view in the completed Work.
B. Set AESS accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.
C. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
2. Orient bolt heads in same direction for each connection and to maximum extent possible in same
direction for similar connections.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with requirements in "Weld Connections" Paragraph in "Shop Connections"
Article.
1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth.
2. Remove erection bolts, fill holes, and grind smooth.
3. Fill weld access holes and grind smooth.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect
AESS as specified in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing." The testing agency will not be
responsible for enforcing requirements relating to aesthetic effect.
B. Architect will observe AESS in place to determine acceptability relating to aesthetic effect.
3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove welded tabs that were used for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling and that are
exposed to view in the completed Work. Grind steel smooth.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to
comply with ASTM A 780.

SECTION 05 21 00 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. K-series steel joists.
2. K-series steel joist substitutes.
3. LH- and DLH-series long-span steel joists.
4. Joist girders.
5. Joist accessories.
A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists.
2. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and
connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.
B. Manufacturer certificates.
C. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with

applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications."
1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing
special joists to comply with performance requirements.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS
A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists,
K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and
parallel top chord.
B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-
Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members.
SPRINGVILLE CITY STEEL JOIST FRAMING

2.2 LONG-SPAN STEEL JOISTS
A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and
Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord
members; of joist type and end and top-chord arrangements as indicated.
2.3 JOIST GIRDERS
A. Manufacture joist girders according to "Standard Specifications for Joist Girders" in SJI's "Specifications,"
with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members; with end and top-chord arrangements as indicated.
2.4 PRIMERS
A. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions
from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance
requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.
C. Primer: Provide shop primer that complies with [Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123
"Interior Painting."] [Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."]
2.5 JOIST ACCESSORIES
A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of bridging of material, size, and type required by
SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if
required for stability.
B. Bridging: Schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate according to SJI's "Specifications." Furnish
additional erection bridging if required for stability.
C. Furnish ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough
strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finished wall surface
D. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6),
carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel
washers.
1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.
E. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural
bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M)
hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain.
F. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to
complete joist assembly.
2.6 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING
A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and
accessories.
B. Apply one coat of shop primer.
C. Shop priming of joists and joist accessories is specified in [Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and
Section 099123 "Interior Painting."] [Section "High-Performance Coatings."]

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.
B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction
according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this
Section.
1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.
3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are
stabilized during construction.
C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and
procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts.
E. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with Research
Council on Structural Connection's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490
Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.
F. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor
ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field
welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection
reports.

SECTION 05 31 00 - STEEL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Roof deck.
2. Composite floor deck.
3. Noncomposite form deck.
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck
openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.
B. Product certificates.
C. Evaluation reports.
D. Field quality-control reports.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding
Code - Sheet Steel."
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering
and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's
"North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
2.2 ROOF DECK
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group..
2. Verco Manufacturing Co.
B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications
and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following:
SPRINGVILLE CITY STEEL DECKING

1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230)
minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Color: Gray top surface with white underside.
2. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230) zinc coating.
3. Deck Profile: As indicated.
4. Profile Depth: As indicated.
5. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements
indicated.
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-

steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws,

No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter.
D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230
MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as
deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
F. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as
deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.
G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: [ASTM A 780] [SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B, with dry film containing a
minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight].
H. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI
Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and
bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap
interlocks.
C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or
adjacent to deck.
E. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of
deck, and support of other work.
F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
G. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and
install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld flanges to top of
deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart with at least one weld at each corner.

I. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and
reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a
complete deck installation.
1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.
J. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel-sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure
according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.
K. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel-sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according
to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected

work with specified requirements.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with
galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-
painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.

SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Metal ladders.
2. Miscellaneous steel trim.
3. Metal bollards.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:

1. Loose steel lintels.
2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be
cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Paint products.
2. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.
1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm).
2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B, with G90 (Z275)
coating; 0.108-inch (2.8-mm) nominal thickness.
F. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M.
2.3 NONFERROUS METALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.
B. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
SPRINGVILLE CITY METAL FABRICATIONS

2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-
plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M),
Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.
1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.
B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated;
galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel.
Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
C. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with
MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3
inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head
bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as
needed for fastening to inserts.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying
with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible
with paints specified to be used over it.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying

with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior
applications.
E. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-
entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or
rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds
where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel
strap anchors not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the
Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated.
Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.
C. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes indicated.
1. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or punch holes at 24
inches (600 mm) o.c.
2.8 METAL LADDERS
A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated.
2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.
B. Steel Ladders:
1. Space siderails 18 inches (457 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated.
2. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch (9.5-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges.
3. Rungs: 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter steel bars.
4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
5. Provide nonslip abrasive surfaces on top of each rung.
6. Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with
continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices
where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other
work.
C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
2.10 METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate metal bollards from 5-inch x 5-inch x 5/16-inch (127-mm x 127-mm) x 8-mm) wall-thickness
square steel tubing.
B. Galvanize bollards..
2.11 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction.
Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
2.12 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in
masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
2.13 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete
construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded
steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.14 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations
for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.15 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron
hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in
concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless indicated.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with [SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."] [SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."] [requirements indicated below:]
1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast
Cleaning."
3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings":
SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and
surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be
left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or
abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or
screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

of base metals.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications
are required to be fastened to in-place construction.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or
similar construction.
3.2 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS
A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation.
Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas.
Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-
PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

SECTION 05 52 13 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Steel pipe railings.
B. See Section 055100 "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs.
A. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and
stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093
sq. m).
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other
materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
2. Railing brackets.
3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported
rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 STEEL AND IRON
A. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another
grade and weight are required by structural loads.
B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
A. Fasteners: Provide the following:

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941
(ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.
B. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying
with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
D. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying

with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior
applications.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for
this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
of base metals.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows
after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
D. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
E. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling or otherwise deforming exposed
surfaces.
F. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.
H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and
anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant
fillers to transfer loads through wall finishes
I. Toeboards: Form toeboards with steel plate welded to posts.
J. Removable Railing Sections: Fabricate removable sections of railings where indicated using materials
sized and assembled to hold removable railing sections plumb and in line with adjoining railing sections.
Adjust to facilitate easy removal of railings.
2.5 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and
Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels
and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after
fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further
cutting or fitting.
B. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete,
masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
C. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into formed or core-drilled holes and grouting annular space.
D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges.
E. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction.
F. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces.
G. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Use type of bracket with
predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
H. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag
bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between studs.
Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with
SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

SECTION 05 53 00 - METAL GRATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Metal bar gratings.
2. Metal frames and supports for gratings.
A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual " and
NAAMM MBG 532, "Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FERROUS METALS
B. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or
ASTM A 1018/A 1018M.
2.2 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-
plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M),
Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
2. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible
with paints specified to be used over it.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support
indicated loads.
2.5 METAL BAR GRATINGS
A. Welded Steel Grating:

1. Bearing Bar Spacing: 15/16 inch (24 mm) o.c.
2. Bearing Bar Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
3. Bearing Bar Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
4. Crossbar Spacing: 4 inches (102 mm) o.c.
5. Traffic Surface: Plain.
6. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 1.8 oz./sq. ft. (550 g/sq. m)
of coated surface.
SPRINGVILLE CITY METAL GRATINGS

B. Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each
section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by
manufacturer for attaching to supports.
C. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.
2.6 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS
A. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded
construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld
connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings.
2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally welded anchors.
Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and provide minimum anchor
units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick by 8 inches
(200 mm) long.
B. Galvanize steel frames and supports in the following locations:

1. Exterior.
2. Interior.
2.7 STEEL FINISHES
A. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly.
B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron
hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set
units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free
of rack.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of
shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
3.2 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS
A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that
apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring
details.
B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not
indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown.
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-
PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
SPRINGVILLE CITY METAL GRATINGS

SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Framing with engineered wood products.
3. Shear wall panels.
4. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
5. Wood blocking and nailers.
6. Wood furring.
7. Plywood backing panels.
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by
treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses.
Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of
Review.
B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3. Engineered wood products.
4. Shear panels.
5. Power-driven fasteners.
6. Powder-actuated fasteners.
7. Expansion anchors.
8. Metal framing anchors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by
the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review
to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.
C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance
with building code in effect for Project.
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as
published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values
shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
SPRINGVILLE CITY ROUGH CARPENTRY

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2[ for interior construction not
in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and
Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground].
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or
chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is
warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in
connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or
concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or
concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawlspaces or
unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Stud Grade.

1. Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing.
2. Species:
a. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
b. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
B. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: No. 2 grade.

1. Application: Framing other than interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing.
2. Species:
a. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
b. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Engineered Wood Products, General: Products shall [contain no urea formaldehyde.] [comply with the
testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."]
B. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily
parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with
an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi (17.9 MPa) for 12-inch nominal- (286-mm
actual-) depth members.
2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1,800,000 psi (13 100 MPa).
C. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural composite
lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to flanges. Provide units as
indicated.
D. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I-joists at bearing
ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists.
1. Material: All-veneer product.
2. Thickness: 1-1/8 inches (28 mm).
3. Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board or rim board plus
grade, factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with APA
standard.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Stud grade lumber of any species.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and the following
species and grades:
1. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this
article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or
in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with
ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide
products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60
(Z180) coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
D. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-
alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550)
coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick.
1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.
A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1-inch
(25-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from manufacturer's standard
widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
B. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
C. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or
rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded
polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers,
blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction,"
C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with
D. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed
to view.
E. Shear Wall Panels: Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
G. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
H. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.
I. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible
flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
J. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with
the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate
Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection,
inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution
by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes sufficiently wet that
moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by
spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Wall sheathing.
2. Roof sheathing.
3. Subflooring.
4. Underlayment.
5. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and
dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by
treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements.
A. Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES:

1. Preservative-treated plywood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood.
3. Foam-plastic sheathing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2 unless otherwise indicated.
B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.
2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2.
B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities
C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawing and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used
with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2.3 WALL SHEATHING
A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.
B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.
2.4 ROOF SHEATHING
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.
B. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SHEATHING

2.5 FLOOR SHEATHING
A. Oriented-Stand-Board Floor Sheathing: Exposure 1 single-floor panels.
B. Plywood Floor Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I single-floor panels or sheathing.
2.6 FASTENERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with
minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span
between fewer than three support members.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate
Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings."
D. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed
in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.
E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural
support elements.
3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood
Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Floor Sheathing:
a. Glue and nail to wood framing.
b. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
2. Wall and Roof Sheathing:
a. Nail to wood framing.
b. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SHEATHING

SECTION 06 17 53 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Wood roof trusses.
2. Wood floor trusses.
3. Wood girder trusses.
4. Wood truss bracing.
5. Metal truss accessories.
B. Allowances: Provide wood truss bracing under the Metal-Plate-Connected Truss Bracing Allowance as
specified in Section 012100 "Allowances."
A. Product Data: For metal-plate connectors, metal truss accessories, and fasteners.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for trusses.

1. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required.
2. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber.
3. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss members
due to design loads.
4. Indicate locations, sizes, and materials for permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of
individual truss members due to design loads.
5. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal connector
plates.
6. Show splice details and bearing details.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
A. Product certificates.
B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Metal-plate connectors.
2. Metal truss accessories.
A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that
complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates.
1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to
assume engineering responsibility.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that [participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that complies
with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third-party inspection by an independent testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction] [and] [is certified for
chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body].
SPRINGVILLE CITY SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES

A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in TPI BCSI, "Building Component Safety
Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate
Connected Wood Trusses."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality
Requirements," to design metal-plate-connected wood trusses.
B. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design

loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1 unless more
stringent requirements are specified below.
2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Certified Wood: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses, provide materials produced from wood obtained
from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC
Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to
inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
C. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous lumber in
Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."
2.3 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES
A. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1.
B. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel
Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G60 (Z180) coating
designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick.
2.4 FASTENERS
1. Provide fasteners for use with metal framing anchors that comply with written recommendations of
metal framing manufacturer.
2. Where trusses are exposed to weather, in ground contact, made from pressure-preservative
treated wood, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings.
B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60
(Z180) coating designation.

2.6 FABRICATION
A. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity
and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to
produce design camber indicated.
1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.
B. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both
sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.
B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing.
C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not
to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.
D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated.
E. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as applicable.
Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchors according to manufacturer's
fastening schedules and written instructions.
F. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses.
G. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied.
Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.
H. Install bracing to comply with [Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."] [Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough
Carpentry."]
1. Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord floor trusses at
centers indicated.
I. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1.
J. Do not alter trusses in field. Do not cut, drill, notch, or remove truss members.
K. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements.

SECTION 06 18 00 - GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes framing using structural glued-laminated timber.
A. Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency indicating that structural
glued-laminated timber complies with requirements in AITC A190.1.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide factory-glued structural units produced by an AITC- or APA-licensed

firm.
1. Factory mark each piece of structural glued-laminated timber with AITC Quality Mark or APA-EWS
trademark. Place mark on surfaces that will not be exposed in the completed Work.
B. Quality Standard: Comply with AITC A190.1.
A. General: Comply with provisions in AITC 111.
B. Individually wrap members using plastic-coated paper covering with water-resistant seams.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
A. General: Provide structural glued-laminated timber that complies with AITC 117 or research/evaluation
reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made with wet-use adhesive complying with AITC
A190.1.
B. Species and Grades for Structural Glued-Laminated Timber: Any species that complies with structural
properties indicated.
C. Species and Grades for Beams:

1. Species and Beam Stress Classification: Douglas fir-larch, 24F-1.8E.
2. Lay-up: Either balanced or unbalanced.
D. Appearance Grade: Framing, complying with AITC 110.
E. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the
transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish.
F. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with
indicated finish.
2.2 TIMBER CONNECTORS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials:
SPRINGVILLE CITY GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION

1. Structural-steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020.
3. Hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33.
B. Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with rust-inhibitive primer, 2-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
1. Primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies and fasteners after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate for connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to length and drilling bolt
holes.
B. Camber: Fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with either circular or parabolic
camber equal to 1/500 of span.
C. End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end cutting each member to final length, apply a saturation coat of
end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces, keeping surfaces flood coated for not less than 10
minutes.
D. Seal Coat: After fabricating, sanding, and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating
sealer on surfaces of each unit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Erect structural glued-laminated timber true and plumb, and with uniform, close-fitting joints.
Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place.
1. Lift with padded slings and protect corners with wood blocking.
B. Fit structural glued-laminated timber by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified
surfacing.
1. Predrill for fasteners using timber connectors as templates.
2. Dress exposed surfaces as needed to remove planing and surfacing marks.
3. Coat cross cuts with end sealer.
C. Cutting: Avoid cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for
shop fabrication.
D. Repair damaged surfaces after completing erection. Replace damaged structural glued-laminated timber
if repairs are not approved by Architect.
E. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful purpose
including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from work of other trades.
1. Slit underside of wrapping to prevent accumulation of moisture inside the wrapping.
SPRINGVILLE CITY GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 06 20 23 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Interior trim.
2. Shelving and clothes rods.
3. Metal pegboard.
1. Section 064116 "Plastic Laminate Faced Architectural Cabinets" for interior woodwork not specified
in this Section.
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade,
species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
a. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp
and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.
B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
C. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
D. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
F. Melamine-Faced Particleboard: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, finished on both
faces with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of
NEMA LD3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
1. Color: White.
2.2 INTERIOR TRIM
A. Softwood Lumber Trim:

1. Species and Grade: Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir south, Superior or C & Btr finish; NLGA,
WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent.
B. Hardwood Lumber Trim:

1. Species and Grade: Red oak; Clear; NHLA.
C. Hardwood Moldings for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): WMMPA HWM 2, N-grade wood
moldings made to patterns included in WMMPA HWM 1.
1. Species: Red oak.
D. Moldings for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish): Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12.
SPRINGVILLE CITY INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

1. Softwood Moldings: WMMPA WM 4, P grade.
a. Species: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar pine.
b. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent.
2. Optional Material: Primed MDF.
2.3 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS
A. Shelving: Made from the following material, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.
1. MDF with radiused or solid-wood front edge.
B. Shelf Cleats: 3/4-by-3-1/2-inch (19-by-89-mm) boards and 3/4-by-5-1/2-inch (19-by-140-mm) boards with
hole and notch to receive clothes rods, as specified above for lumber trim.
C. Shelf Brackets with Rod Support: BHMA A156.16, B04051; prime-painted formed steel.
D. Shelf Brackets without Rod Support: BHMA A156.16, B04041; prime-painted formed steel.
E. Clothes Rods: ANSI / BHMA A156.16 steel rod with supports required for length of rod, oval shaped.
1. Polished chrome finish.
2.4 METAL PEGBOARD
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide RPM Manufacturing

galvanized steel pegboard in 32” x 44” panels with ¾” bent edge flanges and ¼” diameter holes at 1” o.c.
or comparable product by one of the following:
1. DiamondLife
2. Wall Control
A. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general
carpentry use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation
areas for a minimum of 24 hours.
A. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install
adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and
1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.
4. Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm) variation between adjacent treads and risers
and with no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) variation between largest and smallest treads and risers
within each flight.
3.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber
available. Cope or miter at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight-
fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.

3.4 SHELVING AND CLOTHES ROD INSTALLATION
A. Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 1/2 inch (13 mm) less than width of shelves and sand exposed
ends smooth.
B. Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or backing with finish nails or trim screws, set below face and
filled. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
C. Install shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than 32 inches
(800 mm) o.c. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall
anchors.
D. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and reinstalled.
Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports.
3.5 METAL PEGBOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install metal pegboard sections in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Align and space holes in sections to even increments between sections.

SECTION 06 41 16 – PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.
2. Wood veneer-faced architectural cabinet panels.
3. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced architectural
cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.
1. Section 12 36 61 "Simulated-Stone Countertops" for solid surface countertops.
2. Section 12 36 21 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops" for plastic laminate countertops.
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding
,plastic laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,
attachment devices, and other components.
C. Samples:
1. Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.
2. Lumber for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge.
3. Thermoset decorative panels, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.
A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products or certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification

Program.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for
grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other
requirements.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Type of Construction: Frameless.
D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

E. Reveal Dimension: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by

woodwork quality standard.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Formica Corporation.
b. Lamin-Art, Inc.
c. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
G. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.
2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.
H. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge banding.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.
I. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless
located directly under tops.
J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of
exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories:
a. Solid colors, gloss or matte finish.
b. Wood grains, matte finish.
c. Patterns, gloss or matte finish.
2.2 WOOD CABINETS PANELS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Wood for Exposed Surfaces:

2. Cut: Quarter cut/quarter sawn.
3. Grain Direction: Vertically for fixed panels.
4. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match.
2.3 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Moisture Content: [5 to 10] [8 to 13] [4 to 9] percent.
2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except
for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-
closing.
C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter.
E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.
F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip.
G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.

1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer; full-extension
type; zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers.
2. For drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide,
provide Grade 1.
3. For drawers more than 3 inches (75 mm) high but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and not
more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.
4. For drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide
Grade 1HD-200.
H. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.
I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for
BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15
percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide
metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip
galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before
shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
B. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and
similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce
accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and
plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
C. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
D. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk,
concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening,
countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned.
Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation.
Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other
variation from a straight line.

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400
mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) penetration into
wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

SECTION 07 19 00 - WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical and horizontal surfaces:
1. Cast-in-place concrete.
2. Precast concrete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS
A. Siloxane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 10 percent or more solids of oligomerous
alkylalkoxysiloxanes; with alcohol, ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and
with 400 g/L or less of VOCs.
a. Chemical Products Industries, Inc.; CP-500W.
b. ChemMasters; Aquanil Plus WB.
c. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; 303-C.
d. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Euco-Guard VOX.
e. H&C Concrete Care Products, Sherwin-Williams Company (The); H&C SX-7.
f. SaverSystems; DEFY Water Repellent for Brick.
g. Specco Industries, Inc.; Waterstopper S-10 WB Siloxane.
h. Tamms Industries, Inc., Euclid Chemical Company (The); Baracade M.E.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's requirements.
Check moisture content in representative locations by method recommended by manufacturer.
2. Inspect for previously applied treatments that may inhibit penetration or performance of water
repellents.
3. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped beneath the
application of water repellent.
4. Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water repellent.
B. Test pH level according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure chemical bond to
silica-containing or siliceous minerals.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could impair
penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Coordination with Mortar Joints: Do not apply water repellent until pointing mortar for joints adjacent to
surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment has been installed and cured.
SPRINGVILLE CITY WATER REPELLENTS

C. Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces
receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.
1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility
have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to
those required.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect the substrate
before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be
used.
B. Apply a heavy-saturation coating of water repellent, on surfaces indicated for treatment, using low-
pressure spray to the point of saturation. Remove excess material; do not allow material to puddle beyond
saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application procedure unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Precast Concrete and Cast Stone: At Contractor's option, first application of water repellent on
units may be completed before installing them. Mask mortar and sealant bond surfaces to prevent
water repellent from migrating onto joint surfaces.
C. Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between
coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project
conditions.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-
repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades caused by water-
repellent application.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.
SPRINGVILLE CITY WATER REPELLENTS

SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Foam-plastic board insulation.
2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
3. Vapor retarders.
A. Product test reports.
B. Research/evaluation reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
a. DiversiFoam Products.
b. Dow Chemical Company (The).
c. Owens Corning.
d. Pactiv Building Products.
2. Type VI, 40 psi (276 kPa).
2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Insulation.
5. Owens Corning.
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion
characteristics.
C. Polypropylene-Scrim-Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II (non-reflective

faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor
barrier).
D. Reinforced-Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class A
(faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced
with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.
1. No printing on foil-face where exposed.
E. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between
roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves.
SPRINGVILLE CITY THERMAL INSULATION

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications
indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or
snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill
voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths,
and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are
otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION
A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation to footings below exterior grade line.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical
anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according
to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than
one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of
insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or
protected from contact with insulation.
4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented
eaves.
5. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows:
a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent
blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it.
6. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each
continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.
a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward interior of construction.
C. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to
prevent gaps in insulation.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to
protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage
system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates,
including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs.
1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall
openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
2. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as
recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.

C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with
vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders.
D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with
vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.

SECTION 07 25 00 - WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Building paper.
2. Flexible flashing.
A. Evaluation Reports: For flexible flashing, from ICC-ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER
A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated.
A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density

polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than
0.025 inch (0.6 mm).
a. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); DuPont Flashing Tape.
b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Butyl Self Adhered
Flashing.
c. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Wind-o-wrap.
d. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
e. Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500.
f. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Plus Self-Adhered
Flashing or Vycor V40 Self-Adhered Flashing.
g. MFM Building Products Corp.; Window Wrap.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:

1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion-
or control-joint locations.
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch (50-mm) overlap and a 6-inch (150-mm) end lap; fasten to
sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm) except that at flashing
flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
2. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings.
SPRINGVILLE CITY WEATHER BARRIERS

3. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings.
SPRINGVILLE CITY WEATHER BARRIERS

SECTION 07 41 13 – ARCHITECTURAL METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Standing-seam metal roof panels.
2. Metal soffit panels.
1. Section 076100 "Sheet Metal Roofing" for custom-fabricated and on-site, roll-formed sheet metal
roofing.
A. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-
resistance class indicated.
1. Uplift Rating: UL 90
B. ASTM E283: Static pressure air infiltration

1. 1.57 PSF 0.179 cfm/sq.ft.
2. 6.24 PSF 0.390 cfm/sq.ft
3. 20.0 PSF 0.577 cfm/sq.ft
C. ASTM E331: Static pressure water infiltration:

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:
a. Pressure Result
1) 5 Gal. /Hr. per S.F. and Static No Leakage >.
2) Pressure of 20.0 Psf for 15 minutes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge conditions,
side-seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and
accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal roof panel assembly indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, based on input from installers of the items involved.
B. Manufacturer shall provide the Owner project with a written statement that they will provide a site
inspection every 2 days that confirms that the project is being constructed as specified, by an experienced,
full time employee of the company.
C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer

1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.
D. Independent product test reports.
E. Source Quality Control: Manufacturer shall have a quality control program such as ISO 9001
F. Field quality-control reports.
G. Warranties: 30 year non prorated watertight warranty.
SPRINGVILLE CITY ARCHITECTURAL METAL ROOF PANELS

A. Maintenance data.
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal roof panels identical to those of assemblies
tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate
markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal
roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Contractor Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and
prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Panel material: 24 gauge, Galvalume steel, type AZ-55, smooth as per ASTM A792-96Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural
quality.
2. Flashing and flat stock material: Fabricate in profiles indicated on drawings of same material,
thickness, and finish as roof system, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70
percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat, applied by
manufacturer's approved applicator.
b. Coating system shall provide nominal 1.0 mil dry film thickness, consisting of primer and
color.
4. Color: Custom color selected by architect to match all jobsite metal products
B. Panel Sealants:
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant
tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer.
3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick minimum, consisting of slip-
resisting, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with
release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C); ASTM D 1970.
2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C); ASTM D 1970.
3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc., Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT.
b. Grace Construction Products; a unit of Grace, W. R. & Co.; Ultra.
c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.
d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield.

e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.
A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and
other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads
matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM,
PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur
components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.4 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping side edges of
adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps.
Include accessories required for weathertight installation.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. The Garland Company AEP-Span
b. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
c. Kalzip
d. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
2. Profile: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Major-Rib Spacing: 14-1/2 inches o.c.
4. Panel Height: 1-3/4 inches.
2.5 METAL SOFFIT PANELS
A. General: Provide factory-formed perforated metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and
interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using
concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for
weathertight installation.
B. Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile and material of metal roof panels.
1. Finish: Match finish and color of metal roof panels
2. Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint.
3. Manufacturers: Provide one watertight warranty for metal panels and soffit
4. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet
a. Color: Match finish and color of metal roof panels
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a
complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips,
flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal
roof panels unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels.
2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-
cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or
premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary
to ensure weathertight construction.
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating, minimum 22
gauge thick. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished
appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings,
ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels.
C. Gutters: Formed from same material roof panels. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces,
outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long
sections, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish

gutter supports spaced a maximum of 36 inches (900 mm) o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters.
Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at outlets. Finish gutters to match metal roof panels roof
fascia and rake trim.
D. Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate in 10-foot- (3-m-) long sections,
complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Finish downspouts to match gutters.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.
C. Fabricate metal roof panel side laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a
tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will seal weathertight and minimize noise
from movements within panel assembly.
D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics
of item indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature
restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated on Drawings,
wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm)
staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm).[
Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
B. Felt Underlayment: Apply at locations indicated on Drawings, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with
lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).
C. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels.
D. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Section 076200 "Sheet
Metal Flashing and Trim."
3.2 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each
standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.
1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.
2. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging
factory-applied sealant.
B. Metal Soffit Panels: Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support
framing.
1. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where metal soffit panels meet walls and at perimeter
of all openings.
3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for
thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge
closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

2. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and
seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
3. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof
panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in
a clean condition during construction.

SECTION 07 42 43 - COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes metal-faced composite wall panels.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal-faced composite wall panels; details of
edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures,
and accessories; and special details. Distinguish among factory-, shop-, and field-assembled work.
A. Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and
coordinated with each other.
B. Product test reports.
C. Samples of special warranties.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
finish or replace metal-faced composite wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied
finishes within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer,
with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.
1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
2. Exposed Anodized Finishes:
a. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
3. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or
polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film
thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
SPRINGVILLE CITY COMPOSITE WALL PANELS

B. Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet,
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120) hot-dip galvanized or ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) hot-dip
galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated.
B. Subgirts: Manufacturer's standard C- or Z-shaped sections 0.064-inch (1.63-mm) nominal thickness.
C. Zee Clips: 0.079-inch (2.01-mm) nominal thickness.
D. Base or Sill Angles or Channels: 0.079-inch (2.01-mm) nominal thickness.
E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels:

1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements.
2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22 mm).
F. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: Minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flange.

1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements.
2. Depth: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
3. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with nominal thickness of 0.040
inch (1.02 mm).
4. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-) diameter
wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.22-mm-) diameter wire.
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other
suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching
color of metal-faced composite wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide
EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
2.4 METAL-FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
A. General: Provide factory-formed and -assembled, metal-faced composite wall panels fabricated from two
metal facings bonded, using no glues or adhesives, to solid, extruded thermoplastic core; formed into
profile for installation method indicated. Include attachment system components and accessories required
for weathertight system.
a. Alcan Composites USA Inc.; Alucobond.
b. Alcoa Inc.; Reynobond PE.
c. CENTRIA Architectural Systems; Formabond Wall System.
d. Citadel Architectural Products, Inc., Envelope 2000 (RS).
e. Protean Construction Products, Inc.; ACM 100.
B. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.020-inch- (0.50-mm-) thick, anodized aluminum
sheet facings.
1. Panel Thickness: 0.157 inch (4 mm).
2. Core: Standard.
3. Exterior Finish: Clear anodized.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Attachment System Components: Formed from material compatible with panel facing.
1. Include manufacturer's standard perimeter extrusions with integral weather stripping, panel
stiffeners, panel clips and anchor channels.

2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal-faced composite wall panel
assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets,
fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal-faced composite wall panels
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018-inch- (0.46-mm-) minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized)
steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and
trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are
not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps,
soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal-faced
composite wall panels.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal-faced composite wall panels and accessories at the factory to
greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill
indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles
and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Fabricate metal-faced composite wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of
panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.
C. Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Factory form panels in a continuous process with no glues or
adhesives between dissimilar materials. Trim and square edges of sheets with no displacement of face
sheets or protrusion of core material.
1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp and
buckle.
2. Fabricate panels with sharply cut edges, with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core
material.
3. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners, as required to comply with deflection limits, attached to back
of panels with structural silicone sealant or bond tape.
4. Dimensional Tolerances:
a. Panel Bow: 0.8 percent maximum of panel length or width.
b. Squareness: 0.25 inch (5 mm) maximum.
D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of
item indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel
support members and anchorage according to ASTM C 754 and metal-faced composite wall panel
3.2 METAL-FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Attachment System Installation, General: Install attachment system required to support metal-faced
composite wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including subgirts, perimeter
extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels.
1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material joinery, and
panel-system joint seals.
2. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed by composite
panels are installed.
B. Rainscreen-Principle Installation: Provide manufacturer's standard pressure-equalized, rainscreen-

principle system with vertical channel that provides support and complete secondary drainage system,
draining at base of wall. Notch vertical channel to receive support pins. Install vertical channels supported

by channel brackets or adjuster angles and at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by
manufacturer. Attach wall panels by engaging horizontal support pins into notches in vertical channels
and into flanges of wall panels. Leave horizontal and vertical joints with open reveal.
1. Install wall panels to allow individual panels to "free float" and be installed and removed without
disturbing adjacent panels.
2. Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
1. Install components required for a complete metal-faced composite wall panel assembly including
trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar
items.
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will
be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal-faced composite wall panel units within installed tolerance of
1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and
within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal-faced composite wall panels
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion
of metal-faced composite wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel
manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. After metal-faced composite wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of
obstructions, dirt, and sealant.

SECTION 07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Mechanically fastened TPO membrane roofing system.
A. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing
identical products by a qualified testing agency.
B. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system that is listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Products
Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products.
C. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial solar reflectance not less than 0.70 and emissivity
not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.
B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Sheet roofing, of color specified.
A. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with
requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.
B. Research/evaluation reports.
C. Field quality-control reports.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing
system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation and fasteners for membrane roofing
system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.
C. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated, as
determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. Materials shall
be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
D. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
SPRINGVILLE CITY THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING
A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim reinforced,
uniform, flexible fabric backed TPO sheet.
a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
b. Custom Seal Roofing.
c. Firestone Building Products Company.
d. GAF Materials Corporation.
e. GenFlex Roofing Systems.
f. Johns Manville.
g. Stevens Roofing Systems; Division of JPS Elastomerics.
h. Versico Incorporated.
2. Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal.
2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for
intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
e. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives: 250 g/L.
f. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L.
g. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
h. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
i. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
j. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
3. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the
testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing, Insert
thickness thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.
C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.
D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.
E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,

approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors.
F. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet,

approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick (25 mm wide by 1.3 mm thick), prepunched.

G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance
provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to
membrane roofing system manufacturer.
H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,
preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and
other accessories.
2.3 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch (13 mm)
thick.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance
provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to roof deck.
2.4 ROOF INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer
on both major surfaces.
B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches
(1:48) unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for
sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance
provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover boards to substrate, and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
B. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended cold-applied adhesive formulated to attach

roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer.
C. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch (13 mm)
thick, factory primed.
D. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric, water permeable and
resistant to UV degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing system manufacturer for
application.
2.6 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Roofing Asphalt: [ASTM D 312, Type III or Type IV] [ASTM D 6152, SEBS modified].
B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
2.7 WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway rolls,

approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBSTRATE BOARD
A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end
joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.

1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter,
and field of roof according to membrane roofing system manufacturers' written instructions.
3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or
left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof
insulation.
C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is
2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered
from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.
E. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical
fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.
1. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
F. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered
between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.
Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck.
1. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
G. Install slip sheet over cover board and immediately beneath membrane roofing.
3.3 MECHANICALLY FASTENED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Mechanically fasten membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to roofing system
B. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions
required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
C. Mechanically fasten or adhere membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of
roofing.
D. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
E. In-Seam Attachment: Secure one edge of TPO sheet using fastening plates or metal battens centered
within membrane seam and mechanically fasten TPO sheet to roof deck.
F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of membrane
roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam
installation.
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of
sheet membrane.
2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas.
3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.
3.4 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to
membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially
dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end
laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings[ and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars].
3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere
walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's
B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing
installation on completion.
C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that
they do not comply with specified requirements.

SECTION 076100 – STRUCTURAL METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Standing-seam metal roof panels on site roll formed.
2. Metal soffit panels.
roofing.
A. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140.
B. Thermal Expansion and Contraction

1. Completed metal roofing and flashing system shall be capable of withstanding expansion and
contraction of components caused by changes in temperature without buckling; producing excess
stress on: structure, anchors or fasteners; or reducing performance ability
2. The design temperature differential shall be not less than [insert design temperature differential
(200º F)].
3. Interface between panel and clip shall provide for unlimited thermal movement in each direction
along the longitudinal direction
C. Uniform Wind Load Capacity: (per roof section)

1. Installed roof system shall withstand negative (uplift) design wind loading pressures complying with
the following criteria. Anchor clips shall be installed exactly as spacing given in ASCE 7-05
calculations stamped by a licensed engineer in the state of Utah
D. Uniform Positive Load Capacity
1 The installed roof system shall be capable of resisting the following positive uniform roof loads:
Roof Live Load of 20 psf.; Roof Snow Load of 30 psf
2 Installed roof system shall carry positive uniform design loads with a maximum system deflection of
L/180 as measured at the rib (web) of the panel
3 Capacity to resist positive loads shall be determined by empirical calculations in accordance with
AISI. Calculation shall be sealed by a registered professional engineer
E. ASTM 1680E: Static Pressure Air Infiltration (roof panels)

1. Pressure Leakage Rate
a. 1.57 PSF 0.0007 cfm/sq.ft
b. 6.24 PSF 0.0002 cfm/sq.ft
c. 20.0 PSF 0.0011 cfm/sq.ft
F. ASTM 1646: Static Pressure Water Infiltration (roof panels)
1 Pressure Results
a. 5 GAL / HR per S.F. and Static No Leakage
b. Pressure of 20 PSF for 15 Minutes
G. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing
according to ASTM E 1592:
1. The ultimate test failure load shall be reduced by the safety factor specified in article 1.2 to
determine the allowable working load for the panel system.
SPRINGVILLE CITY STRUCTURAL METAL ROOF PANELS

2. The proposed system has been tested to insure that the allowable working load of the panel
system meets or exceeds the specified negative wind uplift pressures listed in ASCE 7-05 article
1.11 of this specification for all roof zones
3. The test results are applicable for the thickness, width, and profile specified. Results are not
applicable for systems that are thinner or wider than the system which was tested. If the tested
material was not the specialty material specified herein (for instance, the tested material was
galvalume steel), then the test results shall be reduce by the ratio of the yield strength (Fy) of the
specified material to the tested material.
4. The results must clearly show that the allowable clip spacing meets or exceeds the requirements
specified in section 3.3.C for all roof areas. Clip spacing shall not be reduced for any roof zone from
that which is
H. Water Penetration: No water penetration, other then condensation, when exposed to dynamic rain and 70
mph wind velocities not less then 5 minute durations, when tested in accordance with AAMA 501.1.
I. Water Penetration in Low Slope Application: No water penetration or panel movement when subject to 6”
head water for 6 hours when tested in accordance with ASTM 2140 and when subject to 6” head of water
for 7 days when tested in accordance of with TAS 114 appendix G.
J. The installed roof assembly shall show it can resist the calculated roof pressure of 1.2 D in accordance
with test results TAS 125.
B. A letter from the manufacturer indicating the materials furnished for this project are the same as
represented in tests and supporting data.
C. Independent laboratory testing report for design load and seam integrity
D. ASTM E1646 and E1680: Test results must clearly demonstrate compliance with the performance
requirements specified in article 1.11. Results are not applicable for systems that are thinner, wider, lower
grade, or different material/profile than the system which was tested. The differential test pressures must
be identical to those specified in article 1.2
E. AAMA 501.1: Test report shall show passed ratings for panel type as specified.
F. TAS 114 appendix G: Test report shall show passed ratings for panel type as specified.
G. TAS 125: Test report shall show rating no less that that as specified in article 1.2
H. ASTM E2140: Test report shall show passed ratings for panel type as specified
I. ASTM E1592: Test results must clearly demonstrate compliance with the following requirements:
1. The ultimate test failure load shall be reduced by the safety factor specified in article 1.2 to
determine the allowable working load for the panel system.
2. The proposed system has been tested to insure that the allowable working load of the panel
system meets or exceeds the specified negative wind uplift pressures listed in article 1.2 of this
specification for all roof zones.
3. The test results are applicable for the thickness, width, and profile specified. Results are not
applicable for systems that are thinner or wider than the system which was tested. If the tested
material was not the specialty material specified herein (for instance, the tested material was
galvalume steel), then the test results shall be reduce by the ratio of the yield strength (Fy) of the
specified material to the tested material.
4. The results must clearly show that the allowable clip spacing meets or exceeds the requirements
specified in for all roof areas. Clip spacing shall not be reduced for any roof zone from that which is
specified.
J. Design Loads: Submit copy of manufacturer's minimum design load calculations according to ASCE 7-05,
Method 2 for Components and Cladding. In no case shall the design loads be taken to be less than those
detailed in Design and Performance Criteria article.

K. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge conditions,
side-seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and
accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work.
L. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
M. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal roof panel assembly indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
B. Warranty: 30 year non prorated watertight
B. The following manufacturer criteria must be submitted. Systems will not be considered for approval unless
each of these items has been submitted for review at least 10 business days prior to bid opening
1. Submit each item listed in article 1.3
C. Source Quality Control: Manufacturer shall have in place a documented, standardized quality control
program such as ISO-9001 approval..
D. Manufacturer shall provide the project Architect with a written statement that they will provide a site
inspection every 2 days that confirms that the project is being constructed as specified, by an experienced,
full time employee of the company
E. Mechanically Curved Panels: Panels shall be mechanically curved to the exact radius of each curved roof
area. Panels may be mechanically curved in the factory or on site. Mechanical curving equipment shall be
operated by a full time experienced technician.
1. Flat panels conformed to the roof shape are not acceptable and will be rejected.
F. Site Formed Panels: Panels in excess of shippable length shall be formed on-site. Site formed panels shall
meet each of the following requirements:
1. Panels shall be formed on heavy duty factory type roll formers. Roll formers shall gradually form the
panel profile utilizing no fewer than twelve (12) forming stations to improve quality and minimize oil
canning.
2. All tooling shall be polished and tempered to a minimum hardness of Rockwell C - 52. Tooling shall
be maintained clean and in good working condition. Tooling repairs or modifications made by
means of welding, sawing, grinding, or the like are unacceptable, as they may contribute to poor
quality, aesthetics, and performance of the end product.
3. Panels shall be of identical profile and characteristics as factory formed panels and specimens
used as the basis of performance tests.
4. Sealant shall be factory applied in a separate factory formed snap on cap. Site/field applied seam
sealant is unacceptable. Seam caps may be shipped in forty-five (45) feet or less length and lap
spliced over full length panels in accordance with manufacturer's system details.
5. Site roll forming equipment shall be operated by a trained full time experienced technician. The
installer must provide additional personnel to handle raw materials and finished product as
necessary.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal
roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Contractor Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.

finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
1. Finish Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and
1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation;
structural quality.
2. Flashing and flat stock material: Fabricate in profiles indicated on drawings of same material,
thickness, and finish as roof system, unless indicated otherwise.
a. Two coat coil applied, baked-on full-strength (70% resin) fluorocarbon coating system
(polyvinylidene fluoride, PVF2), applied by manufacturer's approved applicator.3-Coat
Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621.
b. Coating system shall provide nominal 1.0 mil dry film thickness, consisting of primer and
color coat.
3. Unexposed surfaces for coated panels shall be baked-on polyester coating with .20 - .30 dry film
thickness (TDF.
Characteristics:
1. Panel/Cap configuration must have a total of four (4) layers of steel surrounding anchor clip
for prevention of water infiltration and increased system strength designed to limit potential
for panel blow-off
2. Profile of panel shall have mesa's every two (2) inches on center continuous throughout
panel which are a minimum of one and one-half (1-1/2) inches wide
3. Exposed fasteners, screws and/or roof mastic are unacceptable and will be rejected.
4. Provide panels in continuous lengths from eave to eave with no overlaps
5. Seam must be two and three-eighths (2-3/8) inches minimum height for added upward
pressures and aesthetic appeal. Seam shall have continuous anchor reveals to allow anchor
clips to resist positive and negative loading and allow unlimited expansion and contraction of
panels due to thermal changes. Integral (not mechanically sealed) seams are unacceptable
6. Concealed Standard Anchor Clips: Clips must be sixteen (16) gauge Galvalume steel, ONE
(1) piece clip with projecting legs for additional panel alignment and provision for unlimited
thermal movement in each direction along the longitudinal dimension
I) Two (2) piece clips are unacceptable
ii) Sealant applied in panel cap must be isolated from clip to insure that no sealant
damage occurs from the movement of the panel during expansion and contraction.
iii) Clip must maintain a clearance of a minimum of three-eighths (3/8) inches between
panel and substrate for proper ventilation to help prevent condensation on underside
of panel and eliminate the contact of panel fastener head to panel.
7. Replace ability: Panels shall be of a symmetrical design with snap on, mechanically seamed
cap configuration such that individual panels may be removable for replacement without
removing adjacent panels
8. Seam cap: Snap-on cap shall be a minimum of 1" wide "T" shaped of continuous length up
to forty-five (45) feet according to job conditions and field seamed by means of
manufacturer's standard seaming machine
i. Cap shall be designed to receive two (2) beads of continuous hot applied gasketing
sealant, which will be applied independent of anchor clip, to allow unlimited thermal
movement of panel without damage to cap sealant
ii. Sealant shall be a SIS (Styrene-Isoprene-Styrene) block copolymer type
thermoplastic rubber adhesive, non-fatigue water barrier
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
A. Install three-fourths (3/4) inch high by twenty-four (22) gauge, minimum galvanized steel furring hat
sections to roof deck. Install hat sections perpendicular to panel seams, and space as required to
accommodate the panel anchor clip spacing given
B. The steel framing system shall be installed per ASCE 7-05 wind up lift calculations.

C. The entire roof area shall then be measured and laid out to determine the designed or practical use of the
furnished panels. The framing system shall be installed to the roof surface so that the framing system may
be fastened through the existing roof and into the roof deck or structured supports with the entire perimeter
of all steel panels covering the fastening flange of the metal framing system
D. The adjoining ends of framing sections shall be overlapped. All overlapped adjoining ends shall be
fastened to the substrate together. Ends that adjoin or abut the sides of frames shall be lap cut so that
there are no gaps between adjoining sections
A. Concealed fasteners: Corrosion resistant steel fasteners (zinc plated, stainless steel or equal) designed to
meet structural loading requirements. Provide #14 as the minimum fastener size
B. Closures: Factory precut closed cell foam meeting ASTM D1056 or ASTM D3575, enclosed in metal
channel matching panels when used at hip, ridge, rake, and jamb
2.4 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
2.5 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
A. General: Provide standing seam panels incorporating mechanically interlocked, concealed anchor clips
allowing unlimited thermal movement, and of configuration which will prevent entrance or passage of water
B. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Part 1 and Part 2,
a. The Garland Company
b. Kalzip
c. Approved Equivalent
2. Profile: Vertical-rib, seamed
3. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, ga., Galvalume steel, type AZ-55, smooth as per
ASTM A792-96.
a. Color: As selected by architect
4. Clips: One piece 16 gauge with 3/8” clearance to eliminate contact of panel fastener to head.
which accommodate unlimited amount of thermal expansion and contraction.
5. Joint Type: Mechanically sealed T style seam.
6. Panel Height: 2-3/8 inches.
2.6 METAL SOFFIT PANELS
A. General: Provide factory-formed perforated metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and
interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using
concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for
weathertight installation.
B. Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile and material of metal roof panels.
1. Finish: Match finish and color of metal roof panels
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements
3. Profile: as indicated on Drawings.
4. Material: Same material, finish, and color as metal roof panels.
a. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet
b. Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a
complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips,
flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal
roof panels unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels.
2. Closure Strips: Closures: Factory precut closed cell foam meeting ASTM D1056 or ASTM D3575,
enclosed in metal channel matching panels when used at hip, ridge, rake, and jamb

B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating, minimum [22
guage thick. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished
appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings,
ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels.
C. Gutters: Formed from same material roof panels. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces,
outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long
sections, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish
gutter supports spaced a maximum of 36 inches (900 mm) o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters.
Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at outlets. **Finish see design detail**gutters to be hidden
in fascia
D. Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate in 10-foot- (3-m-) long sections,
complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Finish downspouts to match gutters.
E. Roof Curbs: Fabricated from same material as roof panels, minimum 0.048 inch 24 gauge thick; with
bottom of skirt profiled to match roof panel profiles, and welded top box and integral full-length cricket.
Fabricate curb subframing of minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, angle-, C-, or Z-shaped steel sheet.
Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads, of size and height indicated. Finish roof curbs
to match metal roof panels.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Standing-Seam Roofing: Form standing-seam panels with finished seam height of 2-3/8 inches
B. Shop fabricate metal roofing and flashing components to the maximum extent possible, forming metal
work with clear, sharp, straight, and uniform bends and rises. Hem exposed edges of flashings.
C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.
D. Form flashing components from full single width sheet in minimum ten (10) foot lengths. Provide shop
fabricated, mitered corners, joined using closed end pop rivets and joint sealant
E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics
of item indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subpurlins, eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous roof panel
support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at
calculated location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.
1. Metal panels to be continuous without breaks or laps
2. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.
3. A stainless steel pop rivet shall be secured through the anchor reveal of the panel leg and extend
into the arms of the panel clip located at the ridge of the system. Provide at each arm of the clip
along the ridge. The panel is then anchored at both sides of the clip
4. Installed system shall be true to line and plane and free of dents, and physical defects. In light
gauge panels with wide flat surfaces, some oil canning may be present. Oil canning does not affect
the finish or structural integrity of the panel and is therefore not cause for rejection
5. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized seamer tool so clip,
metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged.
6. Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch is not permitted
B. Metal Soffit Panels: Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support
framing.

1. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where metal soffit panels meet walls and at perimeter
of all openings.
1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge
2. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and
seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
3. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof
panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in
a clean condition during construction.

SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing.
2. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
3. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations,
expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.
1. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including
pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, edge
conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining work.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified.
A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.
B. Copper Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to
dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish
or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes
within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and
1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation;
structural quality.
2. Surface: Manufacturer's standard clear acrylic coating on both sides.
3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
SPRINGVILLE CITY SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70
percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
4. Color: To match metal roofing.
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick, consisting of slip-
resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with
release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C).
2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C).
C. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m.) minimum, rosin sized.
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators,
sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation
and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and
other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary
sheet metal.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-
applied coating.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being
fastened.
c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal
gutter width.
2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.
C. Solder:
1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead
or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.
D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with
release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm)
wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and
use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene
plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.4 REGLETS
A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate
reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory-mitered and -welded
corners and junctions.
1. Material: Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.
2. Finish: With manufacturer's standard color coating.

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other
characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true
to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed
on faces exposed to view.
B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within
joints.
D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from
compatible, noncorrosive metal.
E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant
unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary
for strength.
2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other
accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections. Furnish flat-stock
gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by
SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint
covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.
B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal
hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.
1. Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.
2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Roof-Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but
not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, joint cover plates.
Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.
B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long,
sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support
edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. Fabricate from the
following materials:
C. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

D. Counterflashing and Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

F. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.

2.8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4
inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end
dams. Fabricate from the following materials:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet with adhesive for anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to
shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).
B. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply in shingle
fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).
C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Comply with
temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for
installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not
less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not
less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not
rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal
flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams
with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify
shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners.
Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks.
5. Install sealant tape where indicated.
6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as
recommended by SMACNA.
1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with
bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious
construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install
a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.
C. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32
mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws and metal decking not less than
recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
D. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.
E. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets
to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface
would show in completed Work.
1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel and aluminum sheet.
2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill
joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for stainless
steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering.
Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization.
F. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.
3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to
SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with
installation of roof drainage system.
B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with sealant.
Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets spaced
not more than 36 inches (900 mm) apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to
downspouts.
1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet (15.24 m)
apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners
designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately
60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between.
3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line,
and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and
weather resistant.
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge
flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch (75-mm) centers.
C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated.
1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 24-inch
(600-mm) <Insert spacing> centers.
2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24-inch
(600-mm) centers.
D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared
for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-
steel draw band and tighten.
E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert

counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100
mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with sealant.
F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing

and other items penetrating roof. Seal with [elastomeric] [butyl] sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that
penetrate roof.
3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to
SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of
wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."
C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."

D. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to
extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

SECTION 07 72 53 – SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM MECHANICALLY FASTENED
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Work described in this section includes a metal standing seam roof-mounted snow
retention system complete with clamps, cross members, and snow and ice clips.
roofing.
1.2 REFRENCES
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):.
1. ASCE 7-05 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. FMG Listing: Provide metal
oof panels and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4471 as part of a panel
roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible
construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings.
A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing details of all components to be utilized in their prescribed, pre-
manufactured, three-dimensional form..
B. Shop drawings must be completed by the snow retention device supplier's engineering department.
1. Manufacturers' product catalogues or descriptive data, standard specifications and details.

2. Technical data to substantiate compliance with these specifications.
C. Samples: Submit sample of S-5! Clamp and 24" section of ColorGard cross member including matching
sheet metal color strip, splice connector, and other hardware. Samples: For each type of exposed finish
required.
D. Specimen Warranty: Submit a non-executed copy of the manufacturer's warranty complying with the terms
specified in Warranty article.
E. Erect mockups of special assemblies mounted on panel specimens if requested.
A. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from an independent testing laboratory to document
compliance with specified performance criteria. Furnish evidence of product testing performed specifically
on the panel seam and gauge being utilized on the project. Clearly indicate tensile load-to-failure of clamp
in a direction parallel to the seam.
B. Design Load Calculations: Submit copy of manufacturer's minimum design load calculations according to
ASCE 7-05, Method 2 for Components and Cladding. Refer to Design and Performance Criteria article
field quality-control reports.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM

ELECTRIC OPERATIONS CENTER SECTION 07 72 53- 1
B. Manufacturer shall have in place a documented, standardized method for maintaining quality control such
as ISO-9001 approval.
C. Manufacturer shall have direct authority and control over all fabrication of steel components as well as the
raw materials used in their fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A. Roof Attachment Clamps: Provide aluminum standing seam roof clamp. Carbon steel or plastic parts are
not acceptable. No fastener penetrations of the roof membrane will be permitted. No systems that rely on
adhesives for attachment will be permitted. Clamp to attach to the standing seam will have two stainless
steel set screws (3/8" minimum diameter) having rounded point. One clamp shall be installed per standing
seam for each row of S-5! "ColorGard".
B. Cross member: S-5! "ColorGard" extrusion with receptacle in face to provide for insert of color strip. Color
strip is to be the same pre-finished material and originate from the same supplier as the roof panels. Cross
member is to be continuous and include splice connectors to join adjacent sections, ensuring alignment
and structural continuity. Cross member is attached to clamps using 3/8" diameter stainless steel bolts.
C. Snow/ Ice Clips: Mandatory on panel seam heights of 2" or greater. Furnish only if shown on plans for
panel seam heights below 2" S-5! "Snow Clips" are to be aluminum or stainless steel, with rubber "foot".
Clip to attach to cross member and rest on panel flat, between panel seams, to retard movement of
snow/ice beneath cross member. Use one clip per panel for seam spacing of 18" or less; two clips per
panel for seam spacing over 18".
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Clamps and Versa Bracket: Manufactured from certified 6061 T6 extruded aluminum, in strict conformity
with The Aluminum Association, Incorporated "Aluminum Standards and Data" and ASTM standard B-221.
Cast parts are not permitted.
B. Cross member: Manufactured from certified 6061 T6 aluminum, in strict conformity with The Aluminum
Association, Incorporated "Aluminum Standards and Data" and ASTM standard B-221. Minimum breaking
strength of 175 pounds per linear inch. Cross member must be furnished with splice pieces to align
adjacent sections and maintain continuity.
C. Color Strip
1. Steel: Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated, ASTM A792, Coating Designation AZ-50, in thickness of .0217
or .0336 by min. 36 in. by coil, chemically treated, commercial lock-forming quality.
2. Steel Finishes: Fluorocarbon, epoxy primer baked both sides, as approved by finish coat
manufacturer:
PROPERTY TEST METHOD FLUOROCARBON*

Pencil ASTM D3363 HB-H
Hardness NCCA II-2
Bend ASTM D-4145 O-T

NCCA II-19
Cross-Hatch ASTM D3359 no loss of

Adhesion adhesion
Gloss ASTM D523 25+/-5%

(60° angle)
Reverse ASTM D2794 no cracking or

Impact loss of
adhesion

Nominal ASTM D1005
Thickness
Primer 0.2 mils

Topcoat 0.8 mils
TOTAL 1.0 mils

* Subject to minimum quantity requirements
D. Fasteners and Other Hardware: Each Clamp is to be secured to the panel seam with a minimum of two set
screws, having nominal diameter of 0.375". Set screws are to have a round nose point to prevent damage
to the panel finish. Cup point set screws are not acceptable. Set screws and other clamp hardware is to be
either 300 series stainless steel (18-8 alloy) having no iron content, or aluminum. Attachment bolt for
clamp is to be 0.375" diameter with.
2.3 PREPERATION
A. Clean Surface: Verify that panel seam area is reasonably clean and free of visible dirt and foreign matter
at the clamp locations prior to installing clamps.
B. Seaming Complete: Verify that any required machine seaming is complete prior to installation.
C. Panel attachment: Verify that panels are adequately attached and supported to the building structure to
resist any loads imposed on the S-5! Clamp.
D. Free Drainage: Verify that completed assembly installation will not in any way impede proper drainage of
roof panels.
E. Discrepancies: Report any discrepancies to the above to the Project Architect before proceeding with the
work.
2.4 INSTALLATION
A. Layout: Carefully lay out desired assembly locations true-to-line prior to installing clamps or Versa
brackets. Clamps shall avoid panel attachment clips if the clip is a single piece design.
B. Clamp Installation: Assemble set screws to clamp and clamp to seam following all manufacturers printed
instructions. Both set screws are to be at the same side of clamp. When application relies upon tested
load-to-failure values, manufacturer's minimum recommended set screw tension shall be randomly verified
using calibrated torque wrench per manufacturer's instructions.
C. System Installation: Install snow retention assemblies straight and true-to-line. Secure all color strip
material to ColorGard per manufacturer's instructions. Join adjacent sections with splice pieces provided.
Do not cantilever cross member more than 6" past the last clamp in an assembly
D. Cleaning: Clean roof of any residual debris resulting from installation.
E. Fall Protection: Provide necessary fall and other hazard protection in accordance with OSHA regulations
when installing snow retention assemblies.
2.5 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Replace damaged work than cannot be restored by normal cleaning methods.
B. Remove and properly dispose of waste products generated during roofing procedures. Comply with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.6 FINAL INSPECTIONMISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. At completion of installation and associated work, meet with Contractor, Architect, installer, installer of
associated work, Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative and other representatives directly
concerned with performance of roofing system.
B. Inspect work and flashing of roof penetrations, walls, curbs and other equipment. List all items requiring
correction or completion and furnish copy of list to each party in attendance.
C. Repair or replace deteriorated or defective work found at time above inspection as required to a produce
an installation which is free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according
to warranty requirements.
D. Following the final inspection, provide written notice of acceptance of the installation from the system
manufacturer.

SECTION 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
2. Penetrations in smoke barriers.
B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's
illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications
marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an
engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.
A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance
with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991,
"Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified
Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by UL a qualified testing agency acceptable to
2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration
Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems bearing marking of qualified testing and inspection
agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
2. Grace Construction Products.
3. Hilti, Inc.
4. Johns Manville.
5. Nelson Firestop Products.
6. NUCO Inc.
7. Passive Fire Protection Partners.
8. RectorSeal Corporation.
9. Specified Technologies Inc.
10. 3M Fire Protection Products.
11. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
12. USG Corporation.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to
requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance
rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another,
with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on
testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing
at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
2. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated
except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479.
1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening at 0.30-
inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of
less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill
materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration
firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening
configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published
drawings for products and applications indicated.
C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their
application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve
fire ratings indicated.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials
and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.
D. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items
as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating
items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth,
uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to
surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone
seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type
labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed.
Include the following information on labels:
1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of
Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
4. Date of installation.
6. Installer's name.
A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair
or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are
issued and installations comply with requirements.

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to
this Section:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
3. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Division 01 Section “Summary” for “Buy American” requirements of iron, steel, and manufactured
goods imposed by the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (ARRA) which is funding
this project.
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals
without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will contact or
affect joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing according to manufacturer's standard test
method to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain
rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this
Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2
articles.
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Interior Sealants: Joint sealants containing mercury, butyl rubber, neoprene, SBR or nitrile are not
allowed.
C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
SPRINGVILLE CITY JOINT SEALANTS

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied
chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type,
grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to

porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not
stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: S-GP.

1. Available Products:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
b. GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
c. Tremco; Spectrem 1 (Basic).
d. GE Silicones; SilPruf SCS2000.
e. Pecora Corporation; 864.
f. Pecora Corporation; 890.
g. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-641.
h. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Omniseal.
i. Tremco; Spectrem 3.
j. Dow Corning Corporation; 791.
k. Dow Corning Corporation; 795.
l. GE Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000.
m. GE Silicones; UltraPruf II SCS2900.
n. Pecora Corporation; 865.
o. Pecora Corporation; 895.
p. Pecora Corporation; 898.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 50.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248.
D. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant S-S:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.
b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.
c. Tremco; Tremsil 200.
d. Pecora Corporation; Sanitary Silicone 898.
e. Rhodorsil; Rhone Poulenc 3B.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
E. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant U-MC:

a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II.
b. Tremco; Dymeric 511.
c. Tremco; Vulkem 922.
d. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 2c NS TG.
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 50.
4. Uses Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
F. Multicomponent Nonsag Immersible Urethane Sealant U-TB:

a. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 R Type II (Gun Grade).
b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred.
c. Tremco; Vulkem 227.
d. Tremco; Vulkem 322 DS.
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.

4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) NT (nontraffic) and I (immersible), Class 25.
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acrylic Latex Sealant AL: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type O P, Grade NF.
B. Available Products:
1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600.
2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
3. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200.
4. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac.
5. Tremco; Tremflex 834.
2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints L-A1: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable,
nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints L-A2: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed
joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
a. Pecora Corporation; BA-98.
b. Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size
and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with
ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to
minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to
provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant
performance.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for
preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint
where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and
sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint
substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of
sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent
to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants.
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant.
a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable
of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after
cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based
on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-
sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow
spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces
that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required
to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as
applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
B. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint
sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace
them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and
backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are
installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins,
tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor
sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing
protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal continuity at ends, turns, and
intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires
acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written
instructions.

I. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints
occur.
3.3 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Items Not to be Receive Sealant:

1. Joints at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Use firestopping specified in Section 078413.
B. Joint Sealant Schedule for Interior Locations:

1. Wall and Ceiling Joints Subject to Movement: Designation U-MC.
2. Wall and Ceiling Joints Not Subject to Movement: Designation AL.
3. Joints at Dissimilar Materials, Not Subject to Movement: Designation AL.
4. Joints at Dissimilar Materials, Subject to Movement: Designation U-MC.
5. Interior Side of Exterior Openings: U-MC.
6. Floor Joints: Designation U-TB.
7. Wall and Ceiling Joints Between Frames and Their Rough Opening: Designation AL.
8. Wall and Ceiling Joints Between Frames and Adjoining Surfaces: Designation AL.
9. Interior Sanitary Joints: Joints Between Plumbing Fixtures and Adjoining Floor, Wall, and Ceiling
Surfaces; Joints Between Back Splashes and Wall Substrates and Between Backsplashes and
Countertops: Designation S-S.
10. Exposed joints, perimeter and penetrations in sound-rated assemblies: Designation L-A1.
11. Concealed joints, perimeter and penetrations in sound-rated assemblies: Designation
L-A2.
C. Joint Sealant Schedule for Exterior Locations:

1. Wall Joints:
a. Bordered on Both Sides by Porous Building Material (Concrete, Stone, Masonry, Exterior
Insulation and Finish Systems): Designation S-GP.
b. Bordered on Both Sides by Non-Porous Building Material (Coated and Uncoated Metals,
Anodized Aluminum, and Glass): Designation S-GP.
c. Bordered on One Side by Porous Building Material (Concrete, Stone, Masonry) and Other
Side by Non-Porous Building Material (Coated and Uncoated Metals, Anodized Aluminum,
and Glass): Designation S-GP.
2. Perimeter of Penetrations through Walls: Designation S-GP.
3. Control Joints and Perimeter of Penetrations in Ceilings, Soffits, and Overhead Surfaces:
Designation S-GP.
4. Wall and Ceiling Joints Between Frames and Their Rough Opening: Designation S-GP.
5. Wall and Ceiling Joints Between Frames and Adjoining Surfaces: Designation S-GP.
6. Joints and Perimeter of Penetrations In Horizontal Pedestrian and Vehicle Traffic Surfaces:
Designation U-TB.
7. Joints in Section 076200: Designation S-GP

SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes hollow-metal work.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803
or SDI A250.8.
B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for
hardware, and other details.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details
and openings as those on Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
3. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames.
4. Megamet Industries, Inc.
5. Mesker Door Inc.
6. North American Door Corp.
7. Republic Doors and Frames.
8. Rocky Mountain Metals, Inc.
9. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2..

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.
2. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).
c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm).
d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.
e. Core: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Frames:
a. Materials: Uncoated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm).
SPRINGVILLE CITY HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

b. Construction: Full profile welded.
4. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2..

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.
2. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).
c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), with
minimum A40 (ZF120) coating.
d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.
e. Core: Polystyrene.
3. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with
minimum A40 (ZF120) coating.
b. Construction: Full profile welded.
4. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than
0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide
by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.
2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0
mm) thick.
3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-)
diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with
throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), and as
follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less
than 2-inch (51-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed
applications.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill
phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials.
F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).

2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to
required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble
units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot
be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Hollow-Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to
escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80
for fire-performance rating or where indicated.
C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations,
provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
1. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from
same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless
3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.
4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor;
however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match coursing, and as
follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610
mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.
b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610
mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.
c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame.
d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top
and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c.
6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware;
include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door
Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-
metal work for hardware.
2.8 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11
or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors
are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth
and undamaged.
a. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
b. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly
set and secured.
d. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to
comply with installation tolerances.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure
with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion
anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.
4. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber insulation.
5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion
anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
6. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to
7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and
plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim
as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:
a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8
mm).
b. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch (15.8 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
c. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32
inch (0.8 mm).
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection.
Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including
hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat
and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting
Sections.

SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other
pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
C. Samples: For factory-finished doors.
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards Illustrated."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
2. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company.
3. Marlite.
4. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company.
5. Vancouver Door Company.
6. VT Industries Inc.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain
urea formaldehyde.
B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:

1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
2. Extra Heavy Duty: public toilets.
C. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N).
b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf (1780 N).
2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces.
3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced).
4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
SPRINGVILLE CITY FLUSH WOOD DOORS

5. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.
6. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
7. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced
quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including
fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on
bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors indicated to
receive opaque finish.
C. Use only paints and coatings that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from
Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
D. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: AWI conversion varnish or catalyzed polyurethane system.
3. Staining: Match existing.
4. Effect: Match existing.
5. Sheen: Match existing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced
quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles and
rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware.
Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8
inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise
indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door
to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.
SPRINGVILLE CITY FLUSH WOOD DOORS

SECTION 08 31 13 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Access doors and frames for walls.
C. Samples: For each door face material.
D. Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS
1. Acudor Products, Inc.
2. Babcock-Davis.
3. Elmdor/Stoneman Manufacturing Co.; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co.
4. Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC.
5. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group.
6. Karp Associates, Inc.
7. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
8. Milcor Inc.
9. Nystrom, Inc.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single
manufacturer.
C. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:

1. Locations: Interior walls.
2. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's standard-width
exposed flange, proportional to door size.
3. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), 16 gage.
a. Finish: Factory prime.
4. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
5. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.
6. Hardware: Latch.
2.3 MATERIALS
B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet
substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60
(Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
D. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.
SPRINGVILLE CITY ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or
ASTM F 2329.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with
smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment
devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated.
D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.
1. For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in
appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and
are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:

1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal
primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
SPRINGVILLE CITY ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 08 36 13 - SECTIONAL DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes electrically operated sectional doors.
B. Related Section:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.
A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due
to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring
temporary installation of reinforcing components.
B. Delegated Design: Design sectional doors, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
C. Structural Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting inward and
outward.
D. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to ASTM E 283 or
DASMA 105.
1. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq. ft. (0.406 L/s per sq. m) at 15 and 25 mph (24.1 and
40.2 km/h).
E. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Provide sectional doors with glazed panels that pass
large-missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and ASTM E 1996
DASMA 115.
F. Seismic Performance: Sectional doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sectional doors indicated to comply with performance requirements and
design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For sectional doors, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
B. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SECTIONAL DOORS

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise
indicated.
1.7 WARRANTY
components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty
period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS
A. Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Steel sandwich construction a minimum of 2-inches (50-mm) thick.
Fabricate from manufacturer's standard zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, steel sheet.
1. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-
groove weathertight seal, with a reinforcing flange return.
2. For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-break construction, separating the
exterior and interior faces of door.
B. Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles formed from
galvanized-steel sheet welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed from galvanized-steel
sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not more than 48 inches (1219 mm)
apart.
C. Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom-section profile and
allowing installation of astragal.
D. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and
for wind loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed to depth and bolted
or welded in place.
E. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.
F. Thermal Insulation: Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard insulation, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to
ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections that incorporate the following interior
facing material, with no exposed insulation:
1. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet.
2.2 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES
A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door
size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown on Drawings. Provide complete
track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides
for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches (51 mm) apart for door-drop
safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs
when door unit is closed.

B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel track reinforcement and support members. Secure,
reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without
sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors.
C. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible

vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated.
D. Windows: Manufacturer's standard window units of type and size indicated and in arrangement shown.
Provide removable stops of same material as door-section frames.
2.3 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or

other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.
B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to
manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and
rails.
C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying
projections to suit slope of track. Provide 3-inch- (76-mm-) diameter roller tires for 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide
track and 2-inch- (51-mm-) diameter roller tires for 2-inch- (51-mm-) wide track.
D. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized-steel lifting handles on
each side of door.
2.4 LOCKING DEVICES
A. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power
supply when door is locked.
2.5 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM
A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs mounted on

torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles
indicated.
B. Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion
shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with
manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft.
C. Cables: Galvanized-steel lifting cables.
D. Cable Safety Device: Include, on each side-edge of door, a device designed to automatically stop door if
either lifting cable breaks.
E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to
level the shaft and prevent sag.
F. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.
2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door
manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-
prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control
stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation.
1. Comply with NFPA 70.
2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6; with
NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of
cycles per hour indicated for each door.
C. Door-Operator Type: Unit of type indicated, consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts, sprockets,
chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification.
D. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements specified in Section 110513 "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment" unless
1. Electrical Characteristics:
a. Phase: Polyphase.
b. Volts: 208 V.
c. Hertz: 60.
2. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure
indicated.
3. Motor Size: Large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any
position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. (203 mm/s) and not more than 12 in./sec. (305 mm/s),
without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.
4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's
standard unless otherwise indicated.
E. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor
capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and reverses
downward door travel.
1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door
opening without contact between door and obstruction. Provide self-monitoring capability designed
to interface with door-operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor
device.
F. Remote-Control Access Devices:

1. Radio-Control Transmitters: Manufacturer’s standard or compatible, programmable, momentary-
contact, three-position, three-door, wireless transmitter, 318 Mhz controller.
a. Slide switch to select doors to operate.
b. Push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
c. 9 V alkaline battery.
d. Visor clip.
e. Provide sixteen radio-control transmitters.
2. Master Control, Wired Controller for Multiple Doors: Manufacturer’s standard programmable,
momentary-contact, three-position, twelve-door, wall-mounted, wired controller.
a. Multiple switches to select between doors to operate.
b. Master switch to control all doors at the same time.
c. Push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
d. Interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose
NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.
e. 24 V wiring to each door-operator in the room.
f. Install in Vehicle Bays 101.
3. Single-Door, Wired Controller: Manufacturer’s standard programmable, three-position, twelve-
door, wall-mounted, wired controller.
a. Push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
b. Interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose
NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.
c. 24 V wiring to door-operator in the room.
d. Install in Loading 107.
G. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual
operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 35 lbf
(155 N).
H. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for
automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while
disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor
level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is
engaged.

I. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and
without affecting emergency manual operation.
2.7 DOOR ASSEMBLY
A. Steel Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Wayne Dalton
Thermospan 200 or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Clopay Building Products; a Griffon company.
b. Martin Door Manufacturing.
c. Overhead Door Corporation.
d. Raynor.
e. Wayne-Dalton Corp.
f. Windsor Republic Doors.
B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 20,000.
C. R-Value: 17.5 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (3.082 K x sq. m/W).
D. Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, formed into sections 2 inches (51 mm) thick.
1. Exterior-Face Surface: Flat.
2. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
E. Track Configuration: Standard-lift track, field verify conditions.
F. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door.
G. Windows: Size and placement as indicated, with square corners, installed with insulated glazing of clear
float glass.
H. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly.

1. Locking Device Assembly: Single-jamb side locking bars, operable from inside with thumbturn.
I. Electric Door Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 60 cycles per hour.
2. Operator Type: Trolley.
3. Motor Exposure: Interior, clean, and dry.
4. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up type.
5. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor; self-monitoring type.
J. Door Finish:
1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color and gloss as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
2. Finish of Interior Facing Material: Finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts,
hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.
B. Tracks: Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of
track and door-operating equipment. Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780.
C. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or
distortion. Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter.

3.2 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,

operate, and maintain sectional doors.

SECTION 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Exterior and interior storefront framing.
2. Storefront framing for windows.
3. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door frame units.
A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance
requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication,
installation, or other defects in construction:
1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift
and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
3. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural
movements to glazing.
d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.
e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
f. Failure of operating units.
B. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass
plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount
that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever
is smaller.
D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as

follows:
1. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems,
including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent
deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
2. Test Durations: 10 seconds.
E. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and
framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to
ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water
penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum
static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24
lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in
the system to the exterior.
SPRINGVILLE CITY ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

D. Other Action Submittals:

1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing
fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
installation of units required for this Project.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based
on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated
for this Project.
D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems'
aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions,
arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one
another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to
verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service
performance.
E. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation
Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
F. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer.
1.7 WARRANTY
components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Arcadia, Inc.
2. EFCO Corporation.
3. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
4. United States Aluminum.
5. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required

and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Thermally broken.
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining,

nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding

fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and
structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
D. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing

compatible with adjacent materials Dead-soft, 0.018-inch- (0.457-mm-) thick stainless steel,
ASTM A 240/A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer.
E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint
type.
2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile
and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-)
thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with
reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie
rods.
2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width.
a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255 mm)
above floor or ground plane.

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.
a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
C. Horizontal-Sliding Window Hardware:

1. Sill Cap/Track: Designed to comply with performance requirements indicated and to drain to the
exterior.
2. Locks and Latches: Operated from the inside only.
3. Roller Assemblies: Low-friction design.
4. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless
2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except
containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating
within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain
required glazing edge clearances.
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent
possible.
C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
D. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for
installing entrance door hardware.
E. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
F. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent
possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.
G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm] [AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010
mm] or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact
surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as
recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact
surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and
moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or
rack.
F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.
2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware
according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners
to greatest extent possible.
A. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
B. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

SECTION 08 63 00 - METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes skylights with metal framing.
B. Shop Drawings: For metal-framed skylights. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-framed skylights indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
B. Field quality-control reports.
D. ICC Report for Sandwich Panel Construction listing showing compliance with the IBC. Report shall show
proof of compliance with thermally broken grid system; evidence submitted of adhesives and includes
current components used in the manufacture of panels for this project
A. Manufacturer must be listed by a recognized building code authority, including the ICC which requires
quality control inspections by an approved agency for sandwich panel construction.
1. Quality control inspections and testing conducted at least once each year, shall include
manufacturing facilities, sandwich panel components and production sandwich panels for
conformance with "Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panels" as regulated by the Uniform Building
Code or equivalent. Panels used on this project shall meet the requirements of IBC.
2. Materials and products shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly employed
in the manufacture of specified materials for a period of at least ten (10) consecutive years; and
which can show evidence of these materials being satisfactorily used on at least six (6) projects of
similar size, scope and type within such a period. At least three (3) of the projects shall have been
in successful use for ten (10) years or longer.
3. Plastic, acrylic or Polycarbonate glazing system is not acceptable.
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
installation of metal-framed skylights required for this Project.
C. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1401, "Guide for Structural Sealant
Glazing," for joint design and quality-control procedures.
1.5 DAYLIGHT ANALYSIS REQUIREMENTS
A. A daylight analysis shall be provided by this section that is stamped by a licensed engineer experienced in
this field. Analysis shall state the levels in foot candles and report daylight levels at three times during the
day and four quarters of the year in a matrix format.
SPRINGVILLE CITY METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS

1. Daylight results shall match within +(-) 2% the daylight results required. Daylight analysis shall be
stamped by an engineer qualified for this analysis.
2. Daylight analysis must be on the panels as to be supplied on this project including the face sheets
to be used and specified herein with all coatings and protections in place at time of analysis.
1.6 WARRANTY
components of metal-framed skylights that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Failure of materials shall include, but not be limited to: delamination affecting structural strength,
noticeable reinforcing fiber exposure, and color change greater than 8 units.
components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal
weathering.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kalwall Self-Supporting Ridge
Skylight System or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
2. Naturalite Skylight Systems; Vistawall Group.
A. General: Metal-framed skylights shall withstand the effects of the following without failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:
1. Structural loads.
2. Thermal movements.
3. Movements of supporting structure.
4. Dimensional tolerances of support system and other adjacent construction.
5. Failure includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural
movements to glazing.
d. Glazing-to-glazing contact.
e. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.
f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
g. Sealant failure.
B. Delegated Design: Design metal-framed skylights, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
C. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads:
a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph (40 m/s).
2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass
plane not exceeding L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount
that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19.1 mm), whichever is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever
is smaller.

E. Lateral Bracing of Framing Members: Compression flanges of flexural members are laterally braced by
cross members with minimum depth equal to 50 percent of flexural member that is braced. Glazing does
not provide lateral support.
F. Structural-Test Performance: Provide metal-framed skylights tested according to ASTM E 330, as follows:
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence
deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies,
including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent
deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
G. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Provide metal-framed skylights that pass missile-

impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in
ASTM E 1996 for zone in which building is constructed.].
H. Air Infiltration: Provide metal-framed skylights with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and
framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to
ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
I. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide metal-framed skylights that do not evidence water
penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum
static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24
lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
J. Thermal Movements: Provide metal-framed skylights that allow for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculations
on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
K. Condensation Resistance: Provide metal-framed skylights with fixed glazing and framing areas having
condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45 when tested according to AAMA 1503.
L. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed without failing adhesively
or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant
shall occur before adhesive failure.
M. Energy Performance: Provide metal-framed skylights with performance properties specified, as indicated
in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below and certified and labeled
according to NFRC:
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-Factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of not
more than 0.80 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (4.54 W/sq. m x K) as determined according to NFRC 100.
2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain
coefficient of no greater than 0.6 as determined according to NFRC 200.
2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
B. Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain glazing.
1. Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners.
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining,

nonferrous shims for aligning skylight components.
D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding

fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. At pressure caps, use ASTM A 193/A 193M stainless-steel screws.

2. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and
structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
3. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
4. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads.
E. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying
with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), galvanized steel.
G. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing

compatible with adjacent materials.
H. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components not less than 0.040 inch
(1.016 mm) thick.
I. Framing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard.
J. Framing Sealants: As recommended in writing by manufacturer.
K. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic.
2.4 TRANSLUCENT FACING
A. Translucent faces shall be manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins by insulated panel
system fabricator especially for architectural use. Thermoplastics (e.g. Polycarbonate, acrylic) faces are
not acceptable.
B. Flammability - The interior face sheet shall be U.L. listed and have a flamespread rating no greater than 50
and smoke developed to greater than 250 when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84. Burn extent by
ASTM D-635 shall be no greater than 1". Faces shall not deform, deflect or drip when subjected to fire or
flame; or become detached when subjected to 300 degrees F for 25 minutes.
C. Spacers, Setting Blocks, and Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard.
E. Glazing Sealants: As recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with system
components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural
sealant, and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in metal-framed skylights
indicated.
a. Color: Black.
2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O;
neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with structural sealant and other components with
which it comes in contact; and recommended in writing by structural- and weatherseal-sealant and
metal-framed skylight manufacturers for this use.
a. VOC Content: [250] <Insert value> g/L or less.
b. Color: Matching structural sealant.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum components before finishing.
B. Fabricate aluminum components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring
within framing members, and moisture migrating within skylight to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain
required glazing edge clearances.

C. Fabricate aluminum sill closures with weep holes and for installation as continuous component.
D. Reinforce aluminum components as required to receive fastener threads.
E. Factory-Glazed, Metal-Framed Skylights:

1. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop
Drawings.
2.6 ADHESIVES
A. The laminate adhesive shall be heat and pressure resin type engineered for structural sandwich panel use
with minimum 25 years field use. Adhesive shall pass testing requirements specified by the ICC
"Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel Adhesive".
B. Minimum strength shall be 750 PSI by ASTM C-297 after two (2) exposures to six (6) cycles each of the
aging conditions prescribed by ASTM D-1037.
C. Shear strength by ASTM D-1002 minimum after exposure to five (5) separate aging conditions:
2.7 PANEL CONSTRUCTION
A. Panel shall have a thickness of 2-/34" with a "U" factor of .23, thermally broken, light transmission of 20%
and solar heat gain coefficient of .23. Complete system shall be NFRC certified at .28.
B. Skylight panels shall be a true sandwich panel of flat fiberglass sheets bonded to a grid core of
mechanically interlocking aluminum I-beams. Panels shall be resin laminated under a controlled process of
heat and pressure and deflect no more than 1.9” at 30 psf in 10’ by ASTM E-72.
C. Grid pattern shall be nominal 8" x 20" and symmetrical about the horizontal centerline of each panel, for
flat panel.
D. The adhesive bonding line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the I-beam and have a neat, sharp
edge.
E. Sylight panels and aluminum perimeter frame shall be pre-assembled where practical and sealed at the
factory. Panels should be shipped to the job site in rugged shipping units and shall be ready for erection.
F. Panel system shall provide blast protection meeting Performance Level 2 per the GSA “ISC Security
Design Criteria for New Federal Office Buildings and Major Modernization Projects” dated 5/28/2001
2.8 BATTENS AND PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEM
A. Closure system shall be extruded 6063-T6 and 6063-T5 aluminum screw clamp-tite closure system.
Curved closure system may be roll formed.
B. Aluminum closures to be supplied with 300 series stainless steel screws (excluding final fasteners to the
building) and shall be factory sealed to the panels. Aluminum battens and cap plates shall be field
installed.
C. All exposed aluminum to be architectural corrosion resistant finish which meets the performance
requirements of AAMA 2604/5, color to be selected from manufacturer's standards.
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
A. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401

recommendations including, but not limited to, material qualification procedures, sealant testing, and
fabrication reviews and checks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints between aluminum components to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar materials, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with protective coating or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended
in writing by manufacturer for this purpose.
C. Install continuous aluminum sill closure with weatherproof expansion joints and locked and sealed corners.
Locate weep holes at rafters.
D. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and
moisture migrating within skylight to exterior.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and elevations.
F. Erection Tolerances: Install metal-framed skylights to comply with the following maximum tolerances:
1. Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) where surfaces abut in line, edge
to edge, at corners, or where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned surfaces by less
than 3 inches (76 mm); otherwise, limit offset to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
2. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in
3.7 m) but no greater than 1/2 inch (13 mm) over total length.
1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, skylights shall be tested
according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.
B. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Commercial door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors.
b. Fire-rated swinging doors.
c. Other doors to the extent indicated.
2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections.
B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames"
2. Division 08 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts"
C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating, purchasing,
delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section.
1. Thresholds, weather stripping, and cylinders for locks specified in other Sections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type, in specified finish, full size. Tag with
full description for coordination with the door hardware sets. Submit Samples before, or concurrent with,
submission of the final door hardware sets, if requested.
1. Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through
submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated
into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for locks, latches, and closers as requested.
E. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final
hardware and keying schedule.
F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
G. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant,
detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the
final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand,
function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the
Contract Documents.
2. Content: Include the following information:
a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and frame.
b. Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item.
c. Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and
manufacturer.
d. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
SPRINGVILLE CITY DOOR HARDWARE

e. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and
in door and frame schedule.
f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
g. Mounting locations for door hardware.
h. Door and frame sizes and materials.
i. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems.
1) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that occur in the
following situations: authorized person wants to enter; authorized person wants to
exit; unauthorized person wants to enter; unauthorized person wants to exit.
j. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame.
3. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible date, particularly
where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in
Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work
affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the door
hardware sets.
H. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing
Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to
unique door designations.
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer.

1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified
Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with
Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.
2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity.
3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
4. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop
Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in
assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as an

Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door
hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless
1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless
otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.
D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on
testing according to NFPA 252 and UBC Standard 7-2.
1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established
at 40 inches (1016 mm) or less above the sill.
E. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section
"Project Management and Coordination." In addition to Owner, Construction Manager, Contractor, and
Architect, conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant and
Owner's Security Consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after
reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for
future expansion.
2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram.
3. Requirements for key control system.
4. Address for delivery of keys.

G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01
Section "Project Management and Coordination."
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets, and include
basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.
C. Deliver keys to Owner’s Representative by registered mail or overnight package service.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts
into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory
prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate
provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
C. Coordinate with aluminum entrance door supplier for door hardware installation.
D. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with
connections to power supplies, fire alarm system and detection devices, access control system, security
system, and building control system.
1.7 WARRANTY
components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and
use.
2. Warranty Period: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows:
a. Electromagnetic Locks: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Exit Devices: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.
c. Manual Closers: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance
instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of
door hardware.
B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six (6) months' full maintenance by
skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or
replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper
door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and
installation of original products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Products:
a. Finish: Shall be US26D, unless otherwise noted.
b. Manufacture Standard:
1) Butts: Hager, McKinney, Stanley, Ives*

2) Locksets: Schlage*
3) Keypad Locks and Exit Trim: Schlage Electronics*
4) Closers: LCN*
5) Exit Devices: Von Duprin*
6) Trim: BBW, Rockwood, Hager, Ives*
7) Weatherstrip: Pemko, Hager, National Guard*
8) Continuous Hinges: HagerRoton, Markar, Ives*
B. Substitution requests will be made in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE
A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish
hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by
using hardware designation numbers of the following:
1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are
listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the
Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the
other manufacturers that complies with requirements.
2. ANSI/BHMA designations used elsewhere in this Section or in schedules to describe hardware
items or to define quality or function are derived from the following standards. Provide products
complying with these standards and requirements specified elsewhere in this Section.
a. Butts and Hinges: ANSI A156.1.
b. Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.2.
c. Exit Devices: ANSI A156.3.
d. Door Controls - Closers: ANSI A156.4. 180 degree swing only!
e. Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products: ANSI/BHMA A156.5.
f. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI A156.6.
g. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI A156.7.
h. Door Controls - Overhead Holders: ANSI A156.8.
i. Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSI A156.13.
j. Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI A156.15.
k. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI A156.16.
l. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: ANSI A156.17.
m. Materials and Finishes: ANSI A156.18.
2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's
standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially
recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series
standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated.
Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified.
B. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for
machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal
screws, except as specifically indicated.
C. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as
otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if
exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including
"prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.
D. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent
no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only
means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a
means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.
2.4 HINGES, GENERAL
A. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.
2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.

B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood
doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.
C. Hinge Weight: As indicated in hardware sets.
D. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel with stainless-steel pin.
2. Interior Hinges: Steel with steel pin.
3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel with steel pin.
E. Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings:

1. Safety Stud: Designed for stud in one leaf to engage hole in opposing leaf.
2. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge
pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging doors.
3. Corners: Square.
F. Fasteners: Comply with the following:

1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.
2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames.
3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors.
2.5 CONTINUOUS HINGES
A. Hinges shall be a geared continuous hinge utilizing a single gear section for the door leaf and a separate
gear section for the frame side of the door. The door leaf and jamb leaf shall fully mortised where
scheduled, and full surface where scheduled.. Geared hinges are to be certified to ANSI 156.25, Grade 2
and UL 10C tested and approved for 90 minutes.
2.6 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip
extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8-inch (16-mm) minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL
requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.
C. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with
minimum 12-inch- (300-mm-) long rod for doors up to 84 inches (2100 mm) in height. Provide longer rods
as necessary for doors exceeding 84 inches (2100 mm) in height.
D. Cylindrical Locks - ANSI A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1 Strength and Operational requirements. Meets
A117.1 Accessibility Codes. Latch bolts shall be steel with minimum ½” throw, deadlocking on keyed and
exterior functions. ¾” throw anti-friction latchbolt on pairs of fire doors. Locksets to be tested to exceed
3,000,000 cycles. Lock case shall be steel. Lock shall incorporate one piece spring cage and spindle.
Provide 5/8" minimum throw of latch and deadbolt used on pairs of doors. Provide Seven Year Warranty.
2.7 ACCESS CONTROL LOCKSET
A. Trim shall meet or exceed ANSI Standard A156.25 and A156.2, Grade 1 strength and operational
requirements. UL294*, UL10C, Fcc Part 15, ADA, RoHS.
B. Levers to be pressure cast zinc, plated to match BHMA finish symbols.
C. 125 kHz proximity with 0.75” read range with backlit keypad, 12 button, 3 x 4 matrix.
D. 5,000 users and audits with less than 1 second credential verification time.
E. Tri-colored LED’s and audible indicators that are field configurable.
F. Powered by 8AA batteries.
G. Exterior operating temperature range -31 degrees to 151 degrees. Interior operating temperature range
32 degrees to 120 degrees.

H. Standard features to include: Lock/unlock status. Request to Exit switch, Mechanical Key Overide,
Battery Status. Optional features to include: Deadbolt position, Request to Enter, Interior Cover Tamper
Guard.
I. Programming by handheld device HHD. 32-bit processor, OS; Windows Mobile 5.0. Memory 128 MB
RAM/256 MB ROM. Rechargeable 3.7 v, 1230 mAH, Li-ion battery. IP54 Compliant for drop. USB
interface.
2.8 KEYING REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain final instructions in
writing.
B. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide a Schlage master, grandmaster or
great-grandmaster integrated with Owner's existing system. If key pinning charts are required, owner to
furnish charts to hardware supplier.
C. Furnish temporary keyed cores for the construction period, and remove these when directed. The
construction cores remain property of the supplier and shall be returned to the supplier when they are
removed. Contractor shall install the permanent cores in the presence of the owner’s representative.
D. Permanent Keys: Secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner’s Representative
1. For estimate: 2 keys per change combination, 5 master keys per group, 5 grand-master keys, 3
control keys.
2.9 PUSH/PULL UNITS
A. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation, thru-bolted.
2.10 CLOSERS
A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices are
indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural Transportations
Barriers Compliance Board’s “Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings
and Facilities (ADAAG).”
1. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a. Interior, Non-fire-rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.
b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more
than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 15lbf to open door to minimum required width.
C. Cylinder: Shall be of high strength cast iron construction. All door exterior closers shall be tested to
ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. A written
certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles for all exterior door closers
must be provided. Cylinder shall have been manufactured and in the marketplace for a minimum of 10
years
D. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations for size of
door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide
factory sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
E. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4 Grade 1. Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-
public side of door, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and cast iron body. Double
heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome silicon steel spring.
2. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code.
3. Independent lab-tested 10,000,000 cycles.
4. Thru-bolts at wood doors unless doors are provided with closer blocking. Non-sized, non-handed,
and adjustable. Place closer inside building, stairs, and rooms.
5. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular header, door and
wall conditions and neighboring hardware.
6. Opening pressure: Exterior doors 8.5 lb., interior doors 5 lb., labeled fire doors 15 lb.

7. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck, fourth valve for
delayed action where scheduled.
8. Extra-duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units.
9. Exterior doors do not require seasonal adjustments in temperatures from 120 degrees F to -30
degrees F, furnish data on request.
10. Non-flaming fluid will not fuel door or floor covering fires.
11. Pressure relief values are not allowed.
2.11 DOOR OPERATORS / ADA SPECIAL CLOSERS

A. Where low kinetic energy, as defined by ANSI Standard A156.19, Surface Door Operators shall be
electrically powered closers complying with the 1990 ADA requirements for opening force and time to
close standards. Full closing force controlled by the hydraulic sweep and latch valves shall be provided
when the power or assist cycle ends.
B. Door Operators shall be rack and pinion action with one-piece forged steel pistons. Pinion shaft diameter
shall be a minimum of 11/16”.
C. Separate adjusting valves shall be provided for closing speed, latching speed and back-check.
D. Adjusting valves shall be made of a metal material, regulating the fluid through a “V-SLOT” valve,
concealed, adjustable only with special wrench, and shall be seated with “O” type rings.
E. Door Operators and supporting equipment shall carry a manufacturers two (2) year warranty.
F. Door Operator shall have built in the following features:
1. Opening Speed adjustment.
2. Opening Force adjustment (15 lb. Maximum).
3. Time Delay.
4. On-board Diagnostics.
5. On-board power supply.
6. Factory default memory.
7. On/off switch.
8. Hold open switch.
9. On-board capabilities to be either wired for simultaneous or sequential operation at vestibules.
10. Out-put triggers for electric strikes or electric latch retraction.
2.12 EXIT DEVICES/PANIC HARDWARE
A. General features: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices are
indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural Transportations
Barriers Compliance Board’s “Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings
and Facilities (ADAAG).”
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and
that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.
C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not require more than
15lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool of special knowledge for operation.
D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to AHJ for panic
protection, based on testing according to UL 305.
1. Independent lab-tested 10,000,000 cycles.
2. Push-through touch pad design. No exposed touch bar fasteners, no exposed cavities when
operated. Return stroke fluid dampeners and rubber bottoming dampeners, plus anti-rattle
devices.
3. No exposed screws to show through glass doors.
4. Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions, no extra parts
required to effect change of function.
E. Specific features:
1. Non-Fire Rated Devices: As scheduled in hardware sets.
2. Lever Trim: Vandal resistant, forged brass or bronze escutcheon min .130” thickness, match
lockset lever design.
3. Fire-Labeled Devices: UL label indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”. Vertical rod devices less bottom
rod (LBR) unless otherwise scheduled.
4. Electrically Operated Devices: Single manufacturer source for electric latch retraction devices,
electrically controlled trim, power transfers, power supplies, monitoring switches and controls.
5. Furnish all exit devices with deadlocking latchbolts.

6. End caps shall be sloped and of heavy-duty metal alloy construction and provide horizontal
adjustment to provide flush alignment with device cover plate. When device end cap is installed, no
raised edges will protrude. End cap shall be cast metal or forged aluminum and have a minimum
thickness of (.250"). Plastic or metal stamping will not be acceptable.
7. Provide all shim kits and filler plates to allow flush mounting of exit devices on all types of doors used
in this project.
8. Removable Mullions: Removable with single turn of building key. Securely reinstalled without
need for key.
2.13 TRIM AND STOPS
A. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates, shall be .050 gauge with 32D finish. Kick plates to be 10” high,
mop plates to be 5” high. All plates shall be two (2) inches less full width of door.
B. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls, and miscellaneous door trim shall be shown in the hardware schedule.
C. Doorstops shall be furnished for all doors to prevent damage to doors or hardware from striking adjacent
walls or fixtures. Wall stops are preferred. Floor stops are used only where noted in hardware schedule.
Where conditions prohibit the use wall type stops, furnish overhead stops either surface mounted or
concealed as noted in hardware sets.
2.14 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS
A. General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on
interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and
elsewhere as indicated.
2.15 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile as
shown or scheduled.
2.16 ELECTRICAL HARDWARE
A. Furnish wiring diagrams to electrical contractor for use in installing electrical hardware products.
B. Electrical contractor to run all wiring and make all final connections for electrified hardware. Hardware
supplier shall be responsible to furnish all wiring diagrams to operate electrified hardware. Access control
material and electrified hardware to interface at junction boxes.
2.17 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and locksets (or push-pull
units if no latch or lock sets).
B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's
sample.
C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other
qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced
standards for the applicable units of hardware.
D. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in
ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes
shown by certain manufacturers for their products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions
affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before
electrified door hardware installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series.

1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI A250.6.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Pre-installation conference shall be conducted prior to installation of hardware at Project site. Meet with
the, Owner, Contractor, installer, and manufacturers representatives. A separate pre-installation
conference shall be conducted prior to the installation of electronic security hardware with the electrical
contractor Review catalogs, brochures, templates, installation instructions, and the approved hardware
schedule. Survey installation procedures and workmanship, with special emphasis on unusual conditions,
as to ensure correct technique of installation, and coordination with other work. Notify participants at least
ten, 10 working days before conference.
B. Hardware Installers must have a minimum of five (5) years experience in installation of hardware. Provide
verification of installer’s qualification to Consultant for approval. All installers to attend review meetings
with the hardware distributor.
C. Install hardware using only manufacturer supplied and approved fasteners in strict adherence with
manufacturers published installation instructions.
D. Install head seal prior to installation of “PA”-parallel arm mounted door closers and push side mounted
door stops/holders. Trim, cut and notch thresholds and saddles neatly to minimally fit the profile of the door
frame. Install thresholds and saddles in a bed of caulking completely sealing the underside from water and
air penetration.
E. Counter sink through bolt of door pull under push plate during installation.
F. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated, as follows, unless otherwise indicated
or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for
Custom Steel Doors and Frames."
3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush
Doors."
G. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and
fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in
another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing
work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been
completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as
necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners
and anchors according to industry standards.

H. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with
requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended.
Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to
comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so
that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3
inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's
Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each
item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door
hardware.
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

HW SET: 01
1 EA CYLINDER CYLINDER AS REQUIRED BY DOOR MFG SCH

1 REMAINING HARDWARE BY DOOR MFG
HW SET: 02
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98EO 626 VON
1 EA ELECTRONIC EXIT AD-200-993R-70-KP-RHO-PD 626 SCE
TRIM
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 SCUSH TB 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE
1 SET SEALS 700SA CL NGP
1 EA DOOR SWEEP C627A CL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD 425HD AL NGP
1 EA HANDHELD DEVICE HHD KIT SCE
ENTRANCE BY KEYPAD EXIT DEVICE TRIM. USER ENTERS PINCODE, LEVER TRIM RELEASES,
USER OPENS DOOR FOR ENTRANCE. EXITING ALWAYS ALLOWED.
HW SET: 03

1 EA ELECTRONIC LOCK AD-200-CY-70-KP-RHO-PD 626 SCE
1 EA LOCK GUARD LG7 630 IVE
ENTRANCE BY KEYPAD LOCK. USER ENTERS PINCODE, LEVER RELEASES, USER OPENS DOOR
FOR ENTRANCE. EXITING ALWAYS ALLOWED.
HW SET: 04

1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD RHO 626 SCH
1 EA LOCK GUARD LG7 630 IVE
HW SET: 05
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA PRIVACY SET ND40S RHO 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 REG TB 689 LCN
1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE
1 SET SEALS 2525B BRN NGP
HW SET: 06

2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 626 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP1 626 IVE
1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK ND53PD RHO 626 SCH
1 SET ASTRAGAL 9605A 84" CL NGP
1 SET SEALS 160S AL NGP
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 601A CL NGP
HW SET: 07
8 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE

2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 626 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP1 626 IVE
2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

HW SET: 08
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

HW SET: 09

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 EDA TB / 4041 REG TB 689 LCN
HW SET: 10

1 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 (TOP) 626 IVE
HW SET: 11
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 8" X 16" 630 IVE
1 EA PULL PLATE 8305-0 4" X 16" 630 IVE
HW SET: 12
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 8" X 16" 630 IVE
1 EA PULL PLATE 8305-0 4" X 16" 630 IVE
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 EDA TB 689 LCN
HW SET: 13
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA PASSAGE SET ND10S RHO 626 SCH

HW SET: 14
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA PASSAGE SET ND10S RHO 626 SCH
HW SET: 15

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 EDA TB / 4041 REG TB 689 LCN
HW SET: 16
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

HW SET: 17

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD98NL X 990NL 626 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH
1 EA THUMBTURN 985T 626 FAL
CYLINDER
HW SET: 18
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA PRIVACY SET ND40S RHO 626 SCH
1 EA DBL WARDROBE 582 626 IVE
HOOK

HW SET: 19

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 SCUSH TB WITH HOLD OPEN 689 LCN
1 SET SEALS (4 SIDES) 700SA CL NGP
HW SET: AL-01
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 112HD 628 IVE

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD98EO 626 VON
TRIM
CYLINDER
1 EA AUTO-EQUALIZER 4642 REG FC 689 LCN
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100S-ADJ 630 GLY
1 EA ACTUATOR, JAMB 8310-818 LCN
MOUNT
1 EA ACTUATOR, WALL 8310-853 LCN
MOUNT
1 EA BOLLARD POST 8310-866 LCN
1 THRESHOLD AND PERIMETER SEAL BY DOOR B/O
MFG
DURING SCHEDULED BUSINESS HOURS EXIT DEVICES TO BE DOGGED MECHANICALLY BY

THUMBTURN FOR AUTO OPERATOR TO FUNCTION. AFTER BUSINESS HOURS, ENTRANCE BY
KEYPAD EXIT DEVICE TRIM. USER ENTERS PINCODE, LEVER RELEASES, USER OPENS DOOR.
AUTO OPERATOR MAY BE TURNED OFF/ON AT HEADER. OPERATOR TO FUNCTION IN CONCERT
WITH INTERIOR OPERATOR. COORDINATE LOCATION OF ACTUATORS AND BOLLARD POST
WITH ARCHITECT.
HW SET: AL-02

1 EA PULL/PUSHBAR 9103EZ-0 630 IVE
1 EA AUTO-EQUALIZER 4642 REG FC 689 LCN
1 EA ACTUATOR, JAMB 8310-818 LCN
MOUNT
1 PERIMETER SEAL BY DOOR MFG B/O
OPERATOR TO FUNCTION IN CONCERT WITH EXTERIOR OPERATOR. COORDINATE LOCATION

OF ACTUATOR WITH ARCHITECT.
HW SET: AL-03

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD98EO 626 VON
TRIM
CYLINDER
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 EDA X 18PA 689 LCN

1 THRESHOLD AND PERIMETER SEAL BY DOOR B/O
MFG
ENTRANCE BY KEYPAD EXIT DEVICE TRIM. USER ENTERS PINCODE, LEVER TRIM RELEASES,
USER OPENS DOOR FOR ENTRANCE. EXITING ALWAYS ALLOWED.

SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other
Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1. Windows.
2. Doors.
3. Interior borrowed lites.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.
B. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and
cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking,
and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
C. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the
cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the
obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
D. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation,
delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by
referenced laminated-glass standard.
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the
following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain
watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm
glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness
designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed
or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to
the following requirements:
a. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind
speed indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade,
according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures":
Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade
indicated on Drawings.
1) Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph (144 km/h)
2) Importance Factor: I.
3) Exposure Category: A.
b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not
more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.
1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.
c. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.
d. Thickness of Tinted and Heat-Absorbing Glass: Provide the same thickness for each tint
color indicated throughout Project.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following
maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and
SPRINGVILLE CITY GLAZING

glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar
heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based
on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated.
2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.
3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and
for each lite 6.0 mm thick and a nominal 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide interspace.
4. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program for the
following methodologies:
a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).
b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200.
c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Samples: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square, for each type of glass product indicated, other than monolithic clear
float glass.
C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
D. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer.
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant

manufacturers, for testing according to ASTM C 1087, samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant,
gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing
sealants:
B. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door and Window Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80
and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.
C. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and
organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for
glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA Laminated Division's "Laminated Glass Design Guide" and GANA's
"Glazing Manual."
2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR-A7,
"Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating
Glass Units."
E. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one

component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the Insulating Glass Certification Council.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to
Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate as
defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty
period indicated below.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner
and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate as
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner
and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate as
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Exterior Glazing:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide PPG Industries, Inc.;
Solarban 60, Low ‘E’ Starphire or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. AFG Industries Inc.
b. Pilkington Building Products North America.
2. U-Value: 0.29 / 0.28
3. Shading Coefficient: 0.35
B. Interior Clear Glazing:

1. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind,
and condition indicated.
2. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to
bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to
resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with
glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
4. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
5. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass).
6. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened)
float glass where safety glass is indicated.
C. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired flat glass), Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q-6; and of
form and mesh pattern specified.
D. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by
a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements
specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-Glass Units" Article.
1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist
thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass
design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating-glass units
are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces
of glass lites at unit's edge.
3. Sealing System: Dual seal.
4. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction complying with
the following requirements:
a. Spacer Material: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish.
b. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.

2.3 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with
standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal:
1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864.
2. EPDM, ASTM C 864.
3. Silicone, ASTM C 1115.
4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115.
5. Any material indicated above.
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material

indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal:
1. Neoprene.
2. EPDM.
3. Silicone.
4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber.
5. Any material indicated above.
2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other
materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing
channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing
sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test assemblies to
obtain fire-protection rating.
2.5 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of
100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod
as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls
with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated
below:
1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both
surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the
following types:
1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid
sealant.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard,
requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a
proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required
by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to
control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.
G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire-
resistance rating.
2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GLAZING
A. General: Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced
glazing publications.
1. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum
edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust
as required by Project conditions during installation.
2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
4. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
5. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
6. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).
7. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in
glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements
in referenced glazing publications.
B. Tape Glazing: Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are
flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in
one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.
1. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
2. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal
joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
3. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
4. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start
gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
5. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
C. Gasket Glazing (Dry): Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to
fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
1. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with
joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
2. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket
by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of
removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass.
Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

D. Sealant Glazing (Wet): Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing,
between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from
extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers
and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for
optimum sealant performance.
1. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of
sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
2. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and
clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into
contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural
causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
1. Configuration: Asymmetrical.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire,
or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter.
C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch (1.34
mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.
1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
D. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other
properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing
installation.
2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply
to framing installation.
3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to
framing installation.
4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing
installation.
3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings
required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
SPRINGVILLE CITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure
to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum
that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal
forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
interfere with locations of hangers, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the
form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend
through forms.
5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in
3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel
members that will receive finishes.
SPRINGVILLE CITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Tile backing panels.
3. Texture finishes.
B. Samples:
1. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same
backing indicated for Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent
testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those
tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an
independent testing agency.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
1. American Gypsum.
2. CertainTeed Corp.
3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
4. Lafarge North America Inc.
5. National Gypsum Company.
6. PABCO Gypsum.
7. Temple-Inland.
8. USG Corporation.
B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard
edges.
a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990.
b. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard.
c. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.
d. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board.
e. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
SPRINGVILLE CITY GYPSUM BOARD

B. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges.
a. American Gypsum.
b. CertainTeed Corp.
c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
d. Temple-Inland.
e. USG Corporation.
2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
B. Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.
2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other
compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
A. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to
continuous substrate.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).
D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according to ASTM E 90.
a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.
c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919.
d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
2.7 TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
B. Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application.

a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Easi-Tex Spray Texture.
b. National Gypsum Company; Perfect Spray EM Texture.
c. USG Corporation; BEADEX FasTex Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture.
2. Texture: Spatter knock-down.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except
floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with
edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces
with acoustical sealant.
D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels.
Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
2. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by
Architect for visual effect.
E. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to
receive tape.
G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
H. Texture Finish Application: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving
texture finishes. Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of
starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.
I. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from floors
and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.
J. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Ceramic tile.
2. Stone thresholds.
3. Crack isolation membrane.
4. Metal edge strips.
B. Samples:
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
2. Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color
and finish required.
3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths.
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for
each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.
2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE PRODUCTS
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,
compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
B. FloorScore Compliance: Tile for floors shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.
C. Tile Type CT (Floor Tile): Factory-mounted unglazed ceramic tile.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Daltile Vitrestone
Select, Group 2, or comparable product by one of the following:
a. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
b. Crossville, Inc.
c. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
d. Interceramic.
2. Module Size: 12-inch x 12-inch (305 mm x 305 mm).
3. Thickness: 5/16-inch (8 mm).
4. Face: Plain with cushion edges.
5. Surface: Smooth, without abrasive admixture.
6. Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings..
7. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
SPRINGVILLE CITY TILING

ELECTRIC SERVICE CENTER 09 30 00 - 1
D. Tile Type CTW-1 and CT-B (Field): Factory-mounted unglazed ceramic tile.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Daltile Matte Group I,
b. Crossville, Inc.
d. Interceramic.
2. Module Size: 8-inch x 8-inch (203 m x 203 mm).
E. Tile Type CTW-2 (Accent): Factory-mounted unglazed ceramic tile.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Daltile Semi-Gloss or
Matte Group I, 8” x 8” (203 mm x 203 mm) or comparable product by one of the following:
b. Crossville, Inc.
d. Interceramic.
2. Module Size: As indicated on drawings.
F. Tile Type CTW: Glazed wall tile and ceramic mosaic tile.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
b. Crossville, Inc.
d. Interceramic.
2. Module Size: As indicated on drawings.
3. Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
2.2 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor
finishes.
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above
adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to
1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less above adjacent floor surface.
B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or
ASTM C 241 and with honed finish.
1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining.
2.3 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and
is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.
B. Urethane Crack Isolation Membrane and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part, liquid-applied urethane.
a. Bostik, Inc.;Hydroment Ultra-Set Advanced.

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02.
B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1.

1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.

1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
D. Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Comply with requirements in ANSI A118.4. Provide product
that is approved by manufacturer for application thickness of 5/8 inch (16 mm).
E. EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.11.
2.5 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10.
B. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.
C. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.
D. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.
2.6 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the
following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and
that do not stain stone.
B. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A,
and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for
sealing interior stone tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of
high humidity and extreme temperatures.
C. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A,
and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation

provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, nickel silver exposed-edge material.
C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or
appearance of grout.
a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer.
b. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Grout & Tile Sealer.
c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978.
d. Custom Building Products; Grout and Tile Sealer.
e. Jamo Inc.; Matte Finish Sealer.
f. MAPEI Corporation; KER 003, Silicone Spray Sealer for Cementitious Tile Grout.
g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer.
h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer.
i. TEC, a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; TA-257 Silicone Grout Sealer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with
tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil,
or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations
indicated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set
mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material
manufacturer.
B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that
complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before
installing.
D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from
staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective
coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile
installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of
Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and
apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation
standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:
a. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger.
b. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering
without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and
corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible
surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints.
Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers
overlap tile.
D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields
in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that
are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.
F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
2. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm).
3. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction,
and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and
tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants."
I. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise
indicated.
1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes,
set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set).
J. Metal Edge Strips: Install [at locations indicated] [where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood,
or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile] [where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood,
or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated].
K. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess
sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
L. Install cementitious backer units and fiber-cement underlayment and treat joints according to
ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland
cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.
M. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce
waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
N. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to
produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
3.4 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Tile Installation F112: Cement mortar bed (thickset) bonded to concrete; TCA F112.
a. Thick-Set Mortar for Cured-Bed Method: Dry-set or Latex- portland cement mortar.
b. Grout: ANSI A118.6 or A118.7.
B. Interior Wall Installations, Wood Studs:

1. Tile Installation over wood studs W244: Thinset on cementitious backer board; TCA W244.
a. Bond Coat/Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set or Latex- portland cement mortar.
b. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.
C. Interior Wall Installations, CMU:

1. Tile Installation over concrete masonry units W114: Over clean, sound and dimensionally stable
masonry; TCA W211.
a. Scratch-coat.
b. Mortar bed: ANSI A108.1A.
c. Bond Coat: Dry-set or Latex- portland cement mortar.
d. Grout: ANSI A118.6 or ANSI A118.7.

SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify
products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung,"
unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Basis-of-Design Product:: ACT-1: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide: USG Fissured, No.
560 or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. CertainTeed Corp.
c. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
d. Tectum Inc.
B. Color: White.
C. Edge/Joint Detail: square edge.
D. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15 mm).
E. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm.
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. CertainTeed Corp.
3. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
SPRINGVILLE CITY ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

B. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from
cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation; with prefinished 9/16-inch- (15-mm-)
wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.

2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.
5. Cap Finish: Painted white.
C. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated,
manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design
requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges
of suspension-system runners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements
indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite
edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown
on reflected ceiling plans.
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
SPRINGVILLE CITY ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Resilient base.
2. Resilient stair accessories.
3. Resilient molding accessories.
B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than
12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient
products.
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT BASE <Insert drawing designation>
A. Resilient Base: RB
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
c. Flexco, Inc.
d. Johnsonite.
e. Roppe Corporation, USA.
B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).
2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous).
3. Style:
a. Cove (base with toe) in areas with concrete or resilient flooring.
b. Straight (flat or toeless) in areas with carpet tile.
C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).
E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F. Outside Corners: Preformed.
G. Inside Corners: Preformed.
H. Finish: Satin or Matte.
I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
SPRINGVILLE CITY RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

2.2 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES RUB
A. Resilient Stair Treads:

a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
b. Flexco, Inc.
c. Johnsonite.
d. Roppe Corporation, USA.
e. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.
B. Resilient Stair Treads Standard: ASTM F 2169.

1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).
2. Surface Design:
a. Class 2, Pattern: Raised-disc design.
3. Manufacturing Method: Group 2, tread with contrasting color for the visually impaired.
C. Nosing Style: Round.
D. Nosing Height: 2 inches (51 mm).
E. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6 mm) and tapered to back edge.
F. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece or, for treads exceeding maximum lengths
manufactured, in equal-length units.
G. Risers: Smooth, flat, coved-toe, 7 inches (178 mm) high by length matching treads; produced by same
manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads.
1. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
H. Stringers: Of same thickness as risers, height and length after cutting to fit risers and treads and to cover
stair stringers; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for
installation with treads.
I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.3 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Resilient Molding Accessory:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
b. Flexco, Inc.
c. Johnsonite.
d. R.C.A. Rubber Company (The).
e. Roppe Corporation, USA.
B. Description: [Cap for cove carpet] [Cap for cove resilient floor covering] [Carpet bar for tackless
installations] [Carpet edge for glue-down applications] [Nosing for carpet] [Nosing for resilient floor
covering] [Reducer strip for resilient floor covering] [Joiner for tile and carpet] [Transition strips] <Insert
description>.
C. Material: Rubber.
D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended
hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate
conditions indicated.
C. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer to fill
nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect
exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
E. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair tread
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient

products.
B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do
not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only
after substrates pass testing.
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after
substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36
kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and
remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48
hours in advance of installation.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.
3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent
pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact
with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Stair Accessories:
1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece.
3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint between units.
C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout
length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would
otherwise be exposed.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.
B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before
applying liquid floor polish.
1. Apply two coat(s).
C. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.

SECTION 09 65 16 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Rubber sheet floor covering, without backing.
B. Samples: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-mm) sections of
each different color and pattern of floor covering required.
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor
coverings.
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer.
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient sheet flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.
2.2 RUBBER SHEET FLOOR COVERING RSF
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Flexi-Flor Sheet Rubber
Flooring by R.C.A. Rubber Company (The); or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Estrie Products International, American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd.;.
2. Flexco;.
3. Johnsonite;.
4. Mondo Rubber International, Inc.;.
5. Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.;.
6. PRF USA Inc.
B. Unbacked Rubber Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1859.

1. Type: Type I (homogeneous rubber sheet).
2. Thickness: 1/8”-inch (3 mm).
SPRINGVILLE CITY RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

C. Hardness: Manufacturer's standard hardness, measured using Shore, Type A durometer per
ASTM D 2240.
D. Wearing Surface: Molded pattern.

1. Molded-Pattern Figure: Raised discs.
E. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer.
F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended
hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering and substrate
conditions indicated.
C. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:
1. Cove Strip: 1-inch (25-mm) radius provided or approved by manufacturer.
2. Cap Strip: Tapered vinyl cap provided or approved by manufacturer.
3. Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by manufacturer.
D. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor coverings.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do
not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with
installation only after substrates pass testing.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only
after substrates pass testing.
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after
substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36
kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and
remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48
hours in advance of installation.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation.
3.2 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings.
B. Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.

C. Lay out floor coverings as follows:
1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.
2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches
(152 mm) away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates.
3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.
4. Avoid cross seams.
D. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating
on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.
G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a
completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive
spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
H. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 4 inches (100 mm) up vertical surfaces. Support floor
coverings at horizontal and vertical junction by cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip.
1. Install metal corners at inside and outside corners.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor covering.
B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor covering before applying
liquid floor polish.
1. Apply two coat(s).
C. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.

SECTION 09 68 13 - TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes modular, carpet tile.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are
required in carpet tiles.
2. Type of subfloor.
3. Type of installation.
4. Pattern of installation.
5. Pattern type, location, and direction.
6. Pile direction.
B. Sample warranty.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified

Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.
B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested
for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
A. Comply with CRI 104.
A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Carpet Tiles: 5 percent, but not less than 100 sq. ft.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile
installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
SPRINGVILLE CITY TILE CARPETING

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of
substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs,
dimensional stability, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET TILE CPT
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Shaw Contract Group,
Broadloom, Turn-Key Collection, Innovation Pattern, or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Interface Flor.
2. Lees Carpet.
3. Mohawk Flooring.
B. Color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer’s standard selection.
C. Face Weight: 26 oz.
D. Pattern: ¼ turn installation.
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation

provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and

subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet
tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. Preparation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile
installation.
E. Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's
written installation instructions.
F. Installation Method: [As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer] [Glue down; install every tile
with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive] [Partial glue down; install periodic tiles with
releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive] [Free lay; install carpet tiles without adhesive].
G. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

H. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including
cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by
carpet tile manufacturer.
I. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges,
alcoves, and similar openings.
J. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating
on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
K. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
L. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended
by carpet tile manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
M. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations."

SECTION 09 72 00 - WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Sisal wall covering.
B. Samples: Full width by 36-inch- (914-mm-) long section of wall covering from same print run or dye lot to
be used for the Work. Mark top and face of fabric.
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, for wall covering.
A. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for
storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Wall-Covering Materials: For each type, full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed.
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with

identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84:
a. Flame-Spread Index: Class A.
2. Fire-Growth Contribution: Textile wall coverings complying with acceptance criteria of
UBC Standard 8-2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WALL COVERINGS
A. General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from same print run or dye lot.
2.2 TEXTILE WALL COVERING WC
A. Sisal Wall Covering:

1. 100 percent fire-treated sisal yarn.
2. 11/64 inch pile height, 48 oz/sq yd minimum. Sisal to be installed full height on walls shall be
furnished in 9, 12, or 13 foot wide goods.
3. Reversible weave type, without backing.
4. Match color of existing wall covering.
5. Wall Covering Adhesive: Category Four Approved Products.
a. CIC 257 Adhesive by Fibreworks.
b. Sisal Adhesive No. 1-422 by Design Materials.
c. #90 by Chapco for Ronarco.
SPRINGVILLE CITY WALL COVERINGS

B. Seam Cement:
1. Type Two Acceptable Products:
2. Roberts 4015 Seam Cement by Roberts Consolidated Industries.
3. Equal as recommended by Wall Covering Manufacturer with approval of Architect before
installation. See Section 01 6200.
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Chapco, Chicago, IL www.chapco-adhesive.com.
2. Design Materials Inc, Kansas City, KS www.dmikc.com.
3. Fibreworks, Louisville, KY www.fibreworks.com.
4. Roberts Consolidated Industries, Div QEP, Henderson, NV www.robertsconsolidated.com.
5. Ronarco / US, Nipomo, CA www.sisal.ws.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate
application; as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.
B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, complying with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting"
Section "" and recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended substrate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil, grease, mold,
mildew, and incompatible primers.
B. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound
coatings, cracks, and defects.
1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units
when tested with an electronic moisture meter.
2. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply metal as recommended in writing by primer/sealer
manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.
3. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and
wall-covering manufacturer.
4. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.
C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar
items.
D. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less
than 24 hours before installation.
E. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners.
F. Install strips in same order as cut from roll.
G. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage.
H. Run 'ribs' in weaving horizontally (panel style) when installing wall covering full height. If sisal installed
only as wainscotting, 'ribs' may be installed vertically. Install wall covering so it extends to within 1/8 inch
of floor slab.
I. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.
J. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any
overlay or spacing between strips.
K. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.

L. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar
items.

SECTION 09 91 13 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates, including.
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
3. Steel.
4. Galvanized metal.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
B. Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
C. Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for
each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify
preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality
standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint
system specified in Part 3.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional
colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
SPRINGVILLE CITY EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide product] [provide one of the products]
[available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products] listed in
other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI
Approved Products List."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer,
based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of
topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .

1. 20 percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.
5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and
primers.
D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to
substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as
required to produce paint systems indicated.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."
B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller
tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other
trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces.
3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4), MPI #15.
d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11.
e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #119.
B. CMU Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4), MPI #15.
d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11.
C. Steel Substrates:
1. Alkyd System:
a. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" where
substrate is specified.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #8.
D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Alkyd System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer
for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #94.

SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates, including.
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
3. Steel.
4. Galvanized metal.
5. Wood.
6. Gypsum board.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
C. Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for
each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify
preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality
standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint
system specified in Part 3.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional
colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
SPRINGVILLE CITY INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in Interior Paint
Schedule at the end of this section for the paint category indicated.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of
topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior
paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint
base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.
4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

1. 10 percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and
primers.
D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to
substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be
painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied
protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items
that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as
required to produce paint systems indicated.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."
B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller
tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other
trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces.
3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.
B. CMU Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.
C. Steel Substrates:
1. Latex over Alkyd Primer System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44.
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.
D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Latex over Waterborne Primer System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.
E. Wood Substrates: Including wood trim, exposed joists and exposed beams.
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39.

F. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43.
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #54].

SECTION 09 93 00 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood finishes on substrates, including:
1. Interior Substrates:
a. Dressed lumber (finish carpentry).
1.2 DEFINITIONS
ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
C. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
D. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
B. Samples: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish indicated.
C. Product List: For each product indicated, include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each
product category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted.
1. Stains and Transparent Finishes: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and
color applied.
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each finish system indicated and each color selected to verify preliminary
selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards
for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of
finish system and substrate.
2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on mockups.
a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional
stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
SPRINGVILLE CITY STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide product] [provide one of the products]
[available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products] listed in
other Part 2 articles for the category indicated.
1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and
2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of
topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.
C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
2. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
3. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior stains and finishes shall comply with the testing and product requirements
of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
E. Stain Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range <Insert requirements>.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Exterior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an electronic
moisture meter.
C. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an electronic
moisture meter.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and
primers.
E. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. If removal is
impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and finishing.
1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items
that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each
particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean
water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose
wood fibers by brushing.
2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as
recommended by stain manufacturer.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."
B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs,
ropiness, or other surface imperfections.
A. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning,
repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished
wood surfaces.
3.5 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Wood substrates, nontraffic surfaces, including wood trim architectural woodwork doors exposed beams.
1. Water-Based Varnish over Stain System:
a. Stain Coat: Stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood, MPI #90.
b. First Intermediate Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, satin (Gloss Level 4), MPI #128.
d. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #129.
2. Water-Based Varnish System:
a. Prime Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.
b. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, satin (Gloss Level 4), MPI #128.
c. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #129.

SECTION 10 11 00 - VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Markerboards.
2. Tackboards.
3. Cork wall surface material.
A. Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work.
1. Show locations of panel joints.
2. Include sections of typical trim members.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, for surface-burning characteristics of fabrics.
A. Maintenance Data: For visual display surfaces to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
installation of motor-operated, sliding visual display units required for this Project.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by

a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Natural Cork Sheet: Seamless, single-layer, compressed fine-grain cork sheet; bulletin board quality; face
sanded for natural finish.
B. Plastic-Impregnated Cork Sheet: Seamless, homogeneous, self-sealing sheet consisting of granulated

cork, linseed oil, resin binders, and dry pigments that are mixed and calendared onto fabric backing; with
washable vinyl finish and integral color throughout.
C. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, tempered.
D. Fiberboard: ASTM C 208.
E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.
SPRINGVILLE CITY VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

2.2 MARKERBOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboards: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of

three-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material, and 0.021-inch- (0.53-mm-) thick,
porcelain-enamel face sheet with high-gloss finish.
a. ADP Lemco, Inc.
b. Best-Rite Manufacturing.
c. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
d. Egan Visual Inc.
e. Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.
f. Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.
g. PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.
h. Tri-Best Visual Display Products.
2. Hardboard Core: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick; with 0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet
backing.
3. Particleboard Core: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick; with backing.
4. Manufacturer's Standard Core: Minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, with manufacturer's standard
moisture-barrier backing.
5. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, moisture-resistant thermoplastic type.
2.3 TACKBOARD ASSEMBLIES
1. ADP Lemco, Inc.
2. Best-Rite Manufacturing.
3. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
4. Egan Visual Inc.
5. Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.
6. Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.
7. PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.
8. Tri-Best Visual Display Products.
B. Natural-Cork Tack Surface: 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, natural cork sheet factory laminated to 3/8-inch- (9.5-
mm-) thick fiberboard backing.
2.4 MARKERBOARD AND TACKBOARD ACCESSORIES
A. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-) thick, extruded
aluminum; slim size and standard shape.
1. Factory-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard.
B. Factory-Applied Wood Trim: Red oak, not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick; standard size and shape.
C. Field-Applied Wood Trim: Comply with requirements specified in Section 062000 "Finish Carpentry"
D. Tray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous.

1. Solid Type: Extruded aluminum with ribbed section and smoothly curved exposed ends.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet and backing sheet to
core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, waterproof adhesive.
1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual display
boards at manufacturer's factory before shipment.
B. Factory-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate factory-assembled units with trim and accessories
indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.
1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with
minimum number of joints.
2. Provide manufacturer's standard vertical-joint spline or H-trim system between abutting sections of
markerboards.

C. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints to a minimum.
Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure.
1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual display units
at manufacturer's factory before shipment.
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks,
defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display surfaces
and wall surfaces.
B. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. Keep
perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets,
anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.
C. Field-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate field-assembled units with grounds, trim, and
accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.
D. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one cleaning label to
visual display surface in each room. Cover and protect visual display surfaces.

SECTION 10 14 19 - DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Cast dimensional characters.
B. Shop Drawings: For dimensional letter signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.
2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and
accessories.
3. Show text and layout for each sign at least.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS
A. Cast Characters: Characters with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles,
and as follows:
a. ACE Sign Systems, Inc.
b. APCO Graphics, Inc.
c. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
d. Gemini Incorporated.
e. Matthews International Corporation.
f. Metal Arts Foundary.
g. Metallic Arts.
h. Southwell Company (The).
2. Character Material: Cast aluminum.
3. Character Height: 8 ½”.
4. Finishes:
a. Integral Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage,
noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:
1. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel or hot-dip galvanized devices unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side.
Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.
2. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous.
SPRINGVILLE CITY DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE

3. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing
work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed
fasteners that match sign finish.
4. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and other
defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to
remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before finishing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free
of distortion and other defects in appearance.
2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would
impair installation.
3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
B. Mounting Methods:
1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign.
Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.
a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced
adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes.
Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.
b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and
nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.
2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign.
Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.
a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced
adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until spacers are
pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes. Temporarily
support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.
b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with spacers
pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud ends projecting
through opposite side of surface, and tighten.
3. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply
linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support
weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive
extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in
position, and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully
sets.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.
SPRINGVILLE CITY DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE

SECTION 10 14 23 - PANEL SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Room-identification signs.
B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.
2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and
accessories.
3. Show text, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for
each sign at least half size.
A. Sample warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANEL SIGNS, GENERAL
A. Provide room identification sign at each door to restrooms

1. Total of 6 signs.
2. Provide raised characters, Braille and graphics in compliance with accessibility requirements
2.2 SIGNS
1. Ace Sign Systems, Inc.
2. Allen Markings International.
3. APCO Graphics, Inc.
4. ASE, Inc.
5. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
6. Best Sign Systems Inc.
7. Diskey Sign Company.
8. Fossil Industries, Inc.
9. InPro Corporation.
10. Vista System.
11. Vomar Products, Inc.
B. Room-Identification Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having
uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:
1. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.
a. Edge Condition: Bullnosed.
b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Rounded.
2. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard method for substrates indicated with adhesive or two-face tape.
3. Size: 5” x 8”.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PANEL SIGNAGE

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage,
noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:
B. Adhesives: As recommended by sign manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less for
adhesives used inside the weatherproofing system and applied on-site when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch (1.14 mm) thick, with
adhesive on both sides.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Subsurface-Applied Graphics: Apply graphics to back face of clear face-sheet material to produce
precisely formed image. Image shall be free of rough edges.
B. Subsurface-Engraved Graphics: Reverse engrave back face of clear face-sheet material. Fill resulting
copy with manufacturer's standard enamel. Apply opaque manufacturer's standard background color
coating over enamel-filled copy.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free
of distortion and other defects in appearance.
2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard.
3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would
impair installation.
B. Mounting Methods:
1. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply
linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support
weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive
extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in
position, and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully
sets.
2. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris.
Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign
without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in
position, and push to engage tape adhesive.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PANEL SIGNAGE

SECTION 10 21 13 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Phenolic-core toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.
B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
C. Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation
Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments
designated as accessible.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected for
smoothness.
1. Electrolytically Zinc Coated: ASTM A 879/A 879M, 01Z (03G).
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized: ASTM A 653/A 653M, either hot-dip galvanized or galvannealed.
B. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.
2.2 PHENOLIC-CORE UNITS
1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.
2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
3. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.
4. Flush Metal Partition Corp.
5. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
6. Global Steel Products Corp.
7. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation.
8. Metpar Corp.
9. Partition Systems Incorporated of South Carolina.
10. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing company.
SPRINGVILLE CITY TOILET COMPARTMENTS

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced.
C. Urinal-Screen Style: Post to ceiling.
D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid phenolic-core panel material with melamine facing on both
sides fused to substrate during panel manufacture (not separately laminated), and with eased and
polished edges. Provide minimum 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch-
(13-mm-) thick panels.
E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Fabricated from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 3 inches (76 mm)
high, finished to match hardware.
F. Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of material matching the thickness and
construction of pilasters; with shoe and sleeve (cap) matching that on the pilaster.
G. Brackets (Fittings):
1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.
H. Phenolic-Panel Finish: Facing sheet of one color and pattern in each room.
1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, with manufacturer's
standard dark-color core.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and
accessories.
1. Material: Stainless steel.
2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open
at any angle up to 90 degrees.
3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency
access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with
regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible.
4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent
in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors.
6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory
requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as
accessible.
B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile
and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-
plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads.
Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip
galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling

mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal
supports and leveling mechanism.
B. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with

leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of posts. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at posts to conceal
anchorage.
C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide, in-swinging doors
for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-
inch- (813-mm-) wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and
plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
B. Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch (13 mm) between pilasters and panels; 1 inch (25 mm) between panels
and walls.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written
instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30
degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully
closed position.

SECTION 10 28 00 – TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Public-use washroom accessories.
2. Underlavatory guards.
3. Custodial accessories.
B. Owner-Furnished Accessories: Owner will provide the following accessories:

1. Paper towel dispensers.
2. Soap dispensers.
3. Toilet paper holders.
B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory
required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.
2. Identify products using designations indicated.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors
that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings
1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
2. American Specialties, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.
5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
B. Grab Bar: GB-18, GB36, GB-42

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-5806
2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.
a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish.
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
SPRINGVILLE CITY TOILET ACCESSORIES

C. Mirror Unit: MIRR-1 & MIRR-2
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B165

2. Frame: Stainless-steel channel.
3. Size: 24” x 36”.
4. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below.
a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a
special tool to remove.
5. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Robe Hook: RH
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-211.
2. Description: Single-prong unit.
3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
2.2 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.
2. Truebro by IPS Corporation.
B. Underlavatory Guard:
1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct
contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings.
2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
2.3 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings
1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
2. American Specialties, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.
5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
B. Mop and Broom Holder <Insert drawing designation>:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-223
2. Description: Unit with holders.
3. Length: 36 inches (914 mm).
4. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.
a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel.
b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to

substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored
in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to
ASTM F 446.
SPRINGVILLE CITY TOILET ACCESSORIES

SECTION 10 44 13 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work.
A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated
are accommodated.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated, and as follows:
1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, [3] [6] mm thick.
E. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick.
2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsen's Manufacturing Company, B
2409-6R:
a. Fire End & Croker Corporation;.
b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group;.
c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company;.
d. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc.;.
e. Potter Roemer LLC;.
B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.
SPRINGVILLE CITY FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim
indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface
with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient
depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation.
1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch (32- to 38-mm) backbend depth.
2. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) backbend depth.
E. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no trim. Provide
where walls are of insufficient depth for semirecessed cabinet installation.
F. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.
G. Door Material: Steel sheet.
H. Door Style: Fully glazed, frameless, backless, acrylic panel.
I. Door Glazing: Tempered break glass.
J. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim
style, and door material and style indicated.
K. Accessories:
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire
protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with
plated or baked-enamel finish.
2. Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and mounting clip,
secured to cabinet.
3. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door
handle.
4. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing,
and location.
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."
L. Finishes:
1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following:
a. Exterior of cabinet door, and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another
finish.
b. Interior of cabinet and door.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware
to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints and grind smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be
installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
B. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated
C. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
D. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.
E. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices
operate properly.

F. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair
by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

SECTION 10 44 16 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
A. Operation and maintenance data.
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire
Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire
extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket
indicated.
a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.
b. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.
c. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
d. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
e. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
f. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B.
2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall
or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red
baked-enamel finish.
a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.
b. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.
SPRINGVILLE CITY FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

c. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
d. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
e. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and
location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter
decals applied to mounting surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.
C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.
SPRINGVILLE CITY FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

SECTION 10 51 13 - METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Standard metal lockers.
2. Locker benches.
B. Shop Drawings: For metal lockers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
C. Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
A. Regulatory Requirements: Where metal lockers[ and benches] are indicated to comply with accessibility
requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's
"Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1.6 WARRANTY
components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed
applications.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
C. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, cold rolled.
D. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-locking nuts or lock
washers for nuts on moving parts.
E. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate.
1. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls
for corrosion resistance.
SPRINGVILLE CITY METAL LOCKERS

2. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
2.2 STANDARD METAL LOCKERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Penco Products, Vanguard
lockers or comparable product by one of the following:
1. ASI Storage Solutions Inc.;
2. DeBourgh Mfg. Co.; Worley Lockers.
3. General Storage Systems Ltd.; Decor Tri-Lok.
4. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.
5. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC; Standard Lockers.
6. Republic Storage Systems Company.
B. Locker Arrangement: Single tier as indicated on Drawings.
C. Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.
D. Body and Shelves: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from
unperforated 0.024-inch (0.61-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.
E. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped
and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main frames.
Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical main frames.
F. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into
channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal edges.
1. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for doors more
than 15 inches (381 mm) wide; welded to inner face of doors.
2. Stiffeners: Manufacturer's standard full-height stiffener fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm)
nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors.
3. Sound-Dampening Panels: Manufacturer's standard, designed to stiffen doors and reduce sound
levels when doors are closed, of die-formed metal with full perimeter flange and sound-dampening
material; welded to inner face of doors.
4. Door Style: Louvered vents at top and bottom.
G. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-installed rivets per
hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed; fabricated to swing 180
degrees.
1. Knuckle Hinges: Steel, full loop, five or seven knuckles, tight pin; minimum 2 inches (51 mm) high.
Provide no fewer than three hinges for each door more than 42 inches (1067 mm) high.
H. Projecting Door Handle and Latch: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with padlocks; positive
automatic latching, chromium plated; pry and vandal resistant.
1. Latch Hooks: Equip doors 48 inches (1219 mm) and higher with three latch hooks; fabricated from
0.105-inch (2.66-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded or riveted to full-height door strikes;
with resilient silencer on each latch hook.
2. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard, rattle-free latching mechanism and moving
components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact, and incorporating a prelocking device that
allows locker door to be locked while door is open and then closed without unlocking or damaging
lock or latching mechanism.
I. Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Single-Tier Units: 2 shelves, one double-prong ceiling hook, and tree single-prong wall hooks.
J. Accessories:
1. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024-inch (0.61-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.
K. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.

1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 LOCKER BENCHES
A. Provide bench units with overall assembly height of 17-1/2 inches (445 mm).
B. Bench Tops: Manufacturer's standard one-piece units, with rounded corners and edges.
1. Size: Minimum 11-1/2 inches wide by 1-1/4 inches thick (292 mm wide by 32 mm thick).
2. Laminated clear hardwood with one coat of clear sealer on all surfaces and one coat of clear
lacquer on top and sides.
C. Fixed Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener holes for attaching bench top
and anchoring to floor, complete with fasteners and anchors, and as follows:
1. Tubular Steel: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter steel tubing threaded on both ends, with standard
pipe flange at top and bell-shaped cast-iron base; with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish;
anchored with exposed fasteners.
a. Color: Match metal lockers.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp and with metal faces flat and free of dents or
distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs.
1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete installation.
B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back; and
common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame members of each metal
locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.
C. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.
D. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped [aluminum] [plastic]

plates, with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch (9 mm) high.
1. Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends.
E. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for perimeter
fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.
1. Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends.
2.5 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning, pretreating, and phosphatizing, apply manufacturer's
standard thermosetting baked-enamel finish. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for
application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
B. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply manufacturer's
standard, baked-polymer, thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin manufacturer's written
instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36
inches (910 mm) o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing plates,
channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion.
2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers.
B. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to
form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.
1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners.

2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners.
3. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on Drawings.
a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two aluminum rivets.
4. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated on Drawings.
5. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends of
nonrecessed metal lockers.
C. Fixed Locker Benches: Provide no fewer than two pedestals for each bench, uniformly spaced not more
than 48 inches (1219 mm) apart. Securely fasten tops of pedestals to undersides of bench tops, and
anchor bases to floor.

SECTION 10 70 50 – EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Horizontal, fixed, extruded-aluminum sun control assemblies as indicated.

1. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for supporting structure.
A. Structural Performance: Provide exterior sun control assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of
loads and stresses from dead loads, live loads, snow loads, snow drift loads, wind loads, and normal
thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of assembly or components including
blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by blade rattle or flutter; or permanent
damage to fasteners and anchors.
1. Dead Load: As required by applicable building code.
2. Live Load: As required by applicable building code.
3. Snow Load: As required by applicable building code.
4. Snow Drift Load: As required by applicable building code.
5. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of (Insert Design Criteria) lb./sq. ft. (Insert Design
Criteria Pa), acting inward or outward.
6. Thermal Movements: Provide assemblies that allow for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling,
opening of joints, overstressing of components, and other detrimental effects:
a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical and descriptive data on sun control components and assemblies.
B. Shop Drawings: For exterior sun control assemblies and accessories. Include plans; elevations; sections;
and details showing profiles, angles, and spacing of blades, frames and supports. Show unit dimensions
related to supporting and adjoining structures and construction. Indicate anchorage details and locations.
C. Structural Calculations: Submit a comprehensive analysis of design loads, including dead loads, live
loads, snow loads, snow drift loads, wind loads and thermal movement. Design calculations shall identify
the moment and shear forces transferred to the structure or supports through the installation connections.
D. Structural Calculations shall be stamped and signed by a professional engineer registered in jurisdiction
where Project is located.
1. Weld Calculations: Manufacturer shall submit calculations demonstrating that fillet welds produced
with the Pulsed Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW/MIG) process will withstand a minimum of 526
pounds of force in shear.
E. Weld Strength Calculations shall be stamped and signed by a professional engineer specializing in the
application of welding technology.
F. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts showing the full range of colors available for
units with factory-applied color finishes.
SPRINGVILLE CITY EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES

G. Samples for Verification: Of each type of metal finish required, prepared on Samples of same thickness
and material indicated for final Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include
Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
H. Qualification Data: For firms and person specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
I. QUALITY ASSURANCE
J. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in

jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of kind
indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of sun controls that are
similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
1. Welding Standards: As follows:
a. Comply with AWSD1.2, “Structural Welding Code --Aluminum.”
b. Comply with AWSD1.3, “Structural Welding Code -- Sheet Steel.”
c. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if, has undergone recertification. SMACNA Standard: Comply with
SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” recommendations for fabrication,
construction details, and installation procedures.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual supporting and adjoining construction by field measurements before
fabrication; and indicate recorded measurements on final Shop Drawings. Coordinate construction to
ensure that sun control assemblies fit properly to supporting and adjoining construction and coordinate
schedule with progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of sun control assemblies without field
measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that sun control assemblies correspond to
established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Product: The design of extruded aluminum sunshades is based on Construction
Specialties, Inc. model #100-3. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a product as indicated
on drawings by one of the following:
1. The AIROLITE Company.
2. Industrial Louvers, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
B. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming,
or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy 319.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) zinc coating, mill phosphatized.
E. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series stainless steel, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.
1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
2. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for loading and installation indicated. Use
nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as
needed for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.

G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 but containing no asbestos
fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
A. Assemble sun control assemblies in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
installation.
B. Sun control assemblies shall be assembled entirely by welding. Components shall be joined with a
minimum of two fillet welds each one-inch (25.4 mm) long produced with the Pulsed Gas Metal Arc
Welding (GMAW/MIG) process with minimum 0.125” (3.18 mm) throat.
C. Maintain equal sun control blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames to produce
uniform appearance.
D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
E. Join frame members to one another and to fixed sun control blades with fillet welds concealed from view,
unless size of sun control assembly makes concealed, bolted connections between frame members
necessary.
2.4 HORIZONTAL, FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM SUN CONTROLS
A. Horizontal, fixed, extruded-aluminum sun control assemblies complying with the following:
1. Blade: As indicated.
2. Outrigger: As indicated
3. Fascia: As indicated.
2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations
B. Finish sun controls after assembly.
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for
designating aluminum finishes.
B. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited
chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as
specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating
and resin manufacturers’ written instructions.
1. Fluoropolymer Three-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer’s standard three-coat, thermocured
system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear
fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent
polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2
a. Color and Gloss: Match CUMC Phase I project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate Setting Drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such
items to Project site.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place sun control assemblies level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where
required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence
remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make
required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy
coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of sun control devices that are not protected by temporary covering to
remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning.
B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to
finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
C. Protect sun control assemblies from damage during construction. Use temporary protective coverings
where needed and approved by the sun control manufacturer. Remove protective covering at the time of
D. Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and
is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.

SECTION 11 11 26 – VEHICLE WASH EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes design, furnishing, and installation of equipment, tanks, piping, electrical panels,
wiring and controls for a vehicle wash system consisting of the following:
1. Layout and design of all wash equipment, storage tanks, electrical equipment, piping, wiring and
controls.
2. Fabrication of required wash assemblies.
3. Installation of wash equipment, piping, wiring and controls outlined herein.
4. Selection of wash, rinse, and neutralizing chemicals required to satisfy performance characteristics
defined herein, and furnishing chemical supply for start-up and testing.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices and features to be compatible with
the following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vehicle wash system indicated to comply with performance requirements
and design criteria, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the qualified
B. Design-Build Documents: Complete package of drawings, specifications, and calculations required for
permitting and construction of vehicle wash systems.
C. Product Data: For each type of product indicated herein, and in the final design documents.
D. Shop Drawings: Provide complete equipment installation drawings including coordination drawings for all
trades affected by the final equipment installation requirements. Vehicle Wash Systems Manufacturer may
elect to provide Design-Build drawings and specifications which change the equipment layouts shown in
the Contract Drawings, within the confines of the existing building enclosure, site limitations, and wash
slab outline and which change the minimum equipment requirements specified while maintaining the intent
described and the performance specified. The flow diagram and equipment arrangements shown on the
Contract Drawings and described in these Specifications shall be considered to be conceptual in nature.
The Contract Drawings may be subject to design changes and/or acceptance by the Vehicle Wash
Systems Manufacturer within the established guidelines of this contract specification. Exact location of all
components shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and coordinated with the Architect and Owner.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include the following:

1. Assembly diagrams
2. Recommended service and adjustment
3. Parts list
4. Operating instructions
5. Name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer, and manufacturer’s authorized local
service representative.
6. Material Certificates;
a. For each type of product indicated.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. The warranty for the Vehicle Wash System shall be for (2) two years commencing upon the date of
substantial completion.
SPRINGVILLE CITY VEHICLE WASH EQUIPMENT

1. Warranty shall cover the repair or replacement of all equipment or material that causes any
operational disturbances due to design fault, defectiveness in manufacture or installation occurring
within the warranty period.
A. The vehicle wash system shall be designed for:

1. Manual washing of vehicles, including:
a. Foam brush with overhead pivoting boom, hose, support brackets, and receptacle.
b. High pressure spray wand with overhead pivoting boom, hose and hand valve.
1) Detergent wash function.
2) Rinse function.
c. Controller / switch to be mounted in stainless steel cabinet (provided by Owner. Connect
controller to all pumps, valves, etc. at pump rack in adjacent building. Dial to switch wash
system between options for foam brush, detergent and rinse.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Buddco Distributing.
2. Royce Industries Cleaning Systems.
3. Vehicle Care Systems
B. Items Provided by Others:

1. Prefabricated structure over wash bay.
2. Wash bay slab and catch basin with grating.
3. Stainless steel box for mounting vehicle wash controls and controls at the wash bay.
4. Conduits between wash bay and equipment building for running of wash lines and control wiring.
5. Water heater.
6. Water softener.
7. Compressed air supply.
8. Ice melt system in slab.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. INSTALLATION, GENERAL
1. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ supplied installation documents.
2. Equipment supplier shall undertake the commissioning of the system and make all required
adjustments to ensure proper operation.
B. DEMONSTRATION AND STARTUP SERVICES

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain vehicle wash system equipment.
2. Training shall be provided to staff regarding operation and routine maintenance of the vehicle wash
system.
SPRINGVILLE CITY VEHICLE WASH EQUIPMENT

SECTION 11 40 00 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes equipment for foodservice facilities.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabricated equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, roughing-in dimensions,
fabrication details, utility service requirements, and attachments to other work.
A. Sample warranties.
A. NSF Standards: Provide equipment that bears NSF Certification Mark or UL Classification Mark certifying
compliance with applicable NSF standards.
B. UL Certification: Provide electric and fuel-burning equipment and components that are evaluated by UL
for fire, electric shock, and casualty hazards according to applicable safety standards, and that are UL
certified for compliance and labeled for intended use.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Install equipment to comply with the following:

1. ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
2. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."
D. Seismic Restraints: Comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment
Fabrication and Installation Guidelines," Appendix A, "Seismic Restraint Details," unless otherwise
indicated.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Refrigeration Compressor Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace compressors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failure includes, but is not limited to, inability to maintain set temperature.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT
2.2 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
A. Ice-Making Machine:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hoshizaki DCM-
270BAH Ice Machine / Dispenser withSD-270 stand or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Cornelius.
SPRINGVILLE CITY FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT

b. Scotsman.
2. Description: Freestanding units.

a. Production: Ice cubes.
b. Capacity: 250 lb. per 24-hour period.
c. Accessories:
1) Storage Bin.
2) Stainless-steel stand and legs.
3) Water filter.
d. Electrical Service: Equip unit for connection to 115 V / 60 / 1.
A. Installation Accessories, General: NSF certified for end-use application indicated.
B. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; silicone. Type S (single component), Grade NS (nonsag),
Class 25, Use NT (nontraffic) related to exposure, and Use M, G, A, or O as applicable to joint substrates
indicated.
1. Public Health and Safety Requirements:
a. Sealant is certified for compliance with NSF standards for end-use application indicated.
b. Washed and cured sealant complies with the FDA's regulations for use in areas that come
in contact with food.
2. Cylindrical Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type C, closed-cell polyethylene, in diameter greater
than joint width.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Stainless-Steel Finishes:
1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
2. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
a. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
B. Powder-Coat Finishes: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply manufacturer's
standard, baked-polymer, thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin manufacturer's written
instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install foodservice equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Connect equipment to utilities.
2. Provide cutouts in equipment, neatly formed, where required to run service lines through equipment
to make final connections.
B. Complete equipment assembly where field assembly is required.

1. Provide closed butt and contact joints that do not require a filler.
2. Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment until smooth and polish to match adjacent finish.
C. Install equipment with access and maintenance clearances that comply with manufacturer's written
installation instructions and with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Install cabinets and similar equipment on bases in a bed of sealant.
E. Install closure-trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant.
F. Install joint sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing unless
otherwise indicated. Produce airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary joints.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. After completing installation of equipment, repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean and adjust equipment as required to produce ready-for-use condition.
C. Protect equipment from damage during remainder of the construction period.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,

operate, and maintain foodservice equipment.

SECTION 11 57 00 – SHOP FURNITURE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Open work benches.
B. Shop Drawings: For work benches, including plans, elevations, sections and details.
C. Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed
applications.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with A60 (ZF180)
zinc-iron, alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum
producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
E. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, cold rolled.
F. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-locking nuts or lock
washers for nuts on moving parts.
2.2 OPEN WORK BENCHES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide open work benches
manufactured by Penco Products, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC
2. Republic Storage Systems Company
3. Tennsco Corp.
B. Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet with gray baked enamel finish.
C. Components include:
1. Height: 34”.
2. Depth: 34”
3. Width: As indicated on drawings.
4. Fixed height legs for overhall surface height of 34”. All welded construction.
5. Steel top: Havy gauge steel top; with no holes on work surface.
6. 12” shelf attached to legs.
7. Body and Shelves: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from
unperforated 0.024-inch (0.61-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SHOP FURNITURE

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install per manufacturer’s instructions. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required.
B. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to
form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SHOP FURNITURE

SECTION 12 24 13 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes manually operated roller shades.

1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and
profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials,
their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic
effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents
contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed
Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Surburban/2 by Mechoshade

Systems, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:
1. DFB Sales.
2. Draper Inc.
3. Hunter Douglas Contract.
4. Nysan Solar Control Inc.; Hunter Douglas Company.
5. OEM Shades Inc.
6. Shade Techniques, LLC.
7. Silent Gliss USA, Inc.
2.2 ROLLER SHADES
A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade
movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.
1. Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard.
SPRINGVILLE CITY ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.
b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.
c. Chain-Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount.
B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required
to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without
deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to
facilitate removal of shadebands for service.
1. Roller Mounting Configuration: Single roller.
2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller.
3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.
C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly,
operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.
D. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three
inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.
E. Shadebands:
1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric.
2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.
a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material <Insert description>.
b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
F. Installation Accessories:
1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating
mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.
a. Shape: L-shaped.
b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband when
shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches (102 mm).
2. Exposed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front fascia, top and back
covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure.
a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and shadeband when
shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches (102 mm).
3. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.
4. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation at bottom of
site-constructed ceiling recess or pocket and for snap-in attachment to wall clip without fasteners.
5. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as shades
are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of aligning
shadebands with channels at tops.
6. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at bottoms of
shades when shades are closed.
7. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS
A. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.

1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer.
2. Type: PVC-coated fiberglass.
3. Weave: Mesh.
4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements
for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.
B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F (23
deg C):
1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which
shade is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2-inch (13-mm) total, plus or minus 1/8 inch
(3.1 mm). Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed
less 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm).

C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible except as
follows:
1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide
battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and
alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
C. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
D. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction
throughout entire operational range.
E. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

SECTION 12 36 23.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes plastic-laminate countertops.
A. Product Data: For each type of product[, including] [panel products] [and] [high-pressure decorative
laminate].
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,
attachment devices, and other components.
C. Samples:
1. Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.
A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for
grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements.
B. Grade: Custom.
C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3,.

a. Formica Corporation.
b. Lamin-Art, Inc.
c. Panolam Industries International, Inc.
d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of
exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following categories:
a. Solid colors, matte finish.
b. Solid colors with core same color as surface, matte finish.
c. Patterns, matte finish.
E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
F. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue or exterior-grade plywood.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS

ELECTRIC OPERATIONS CENTER 12 36 23.13 - 1
G. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
1. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) at front, back, and ends with additional
layers of core material laminated to top.
H. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside of
countertop substrate.
I. Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate.
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard unless
1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
A. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end overhang of 1
inch (25 mm) over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:
1. Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site.
Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at
site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
C. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work,
and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce
accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in
the shop.
1. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items.
2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish.
C. Field Jointing: Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is
not required.
1. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6
inches (150 mm) of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm).
Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping
pressure at joints.
D. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level
and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
E. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into
underside of countertop.
1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other
variation from a straight line.
2. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive.
3. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another
permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 12 36 23.13

SECTION 12 36 61 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS AND WINDOW SILLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Solid-surface-material countertops and backsplashes.
A. Product Data: For countertop materials.
B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of
joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
1. Front: 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laminated bullnose.
2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.
3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash.
B. Countertops: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same
material.
C. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid surface material.
2.2 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL WINDOW SILLS
A. Configuration: Provide sills with the following front style:

1. Front: 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laminated bullnose.
2. Ends: Even with edge of windows except where indicate otherwise on drawings.
B. Sills: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.
2.3 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1.
a. Avonite Surfaces.
b. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.
c. Formica Corporation.
d. LG Chemical, Ltd.
e. Meganite Inc.
f. Samsung Chemical USA, Inc.
g. Swan Corporation (The).
h. Transolid, Inc.
i. Wilsonart International.
2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Align
adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean
entire surface.
B. Fasten sills using adhesive in color to match sill, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

SECTION 12 48 13 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Roll-up rail mats.
2. Recessed frames.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Perimeter floor moldings.
C. Samples: For each floor mat and frame member.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation
Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and
ICC A117.1.
2.2 ROLL-UP RAIL MATS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide
products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Helix Model Z1 by

Construction Specialties or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. American Floor Products Company, Inc.
2. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc.
3. Cactus Mat Mfg. Co.
4. Durable Corporation.
5. J. L. Industries, Inc.
6. Kadee Industries, Inc.
7. Mats Inc.
8. Pawling Corporation; Architectural Products Division.
2.3 FRAMES
A. Recessed Frames: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). Manufacturer's standard extrusion.

1. Color: Mill finish.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are
SPRINGVILLE CITY ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing
elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints.
B. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames that contact cementitious material with manufacturer's
standard protective coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set mat tops at height
recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate tops of mat surfaces with
bottoms of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in
recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic
has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.
SPRINGVILLE CITY ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

SECTION 13 34 20 – FABRICATED STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Structural-steel framing.
2. Metal roof panels.
3. Sheet metal gutters and downspouts
4. Sheet metal fascias
5. Concrete footings and reinforcement
6. Excavation for footings
A. Structural Performance: Parking canopies shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. Comply with
requirements of the International Building Code (IBC) 2006 edition, except where higher standard is
required. Particular attention is directed to Chapter 16, AStructural Design.@
1. Snow Loads: 30 lb. per square foot.
2. Wind Loads: 90 MPH wind. Exposure C.
3. Earthquake loads as required by IBC for the project sites.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of fabricated structures component.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Material test reports.
F. Source quality-control reports.
G. Field quality-control reports.
H. Maintenance data.
I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer with a minimum of 5 years experience in the design
and manufacturing of fabricated structures.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis
by a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the State of Utah.
B. Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who specializes in erecting and installing work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
D. Structural Steel: Comply with AISC 360, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," for design
requirements and allowable stresses.
SPRINGVILLE CITY FABRICATED STRUCTURES

E. Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed
Steel Structural Members" for design requirements and allowable stresses.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Kustom Kanopies
2. Pascal Steel Corp.
3. ProtekPark
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II,. Supplement with the following:
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory
trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as
needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40
percent.
C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or
other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and
parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious
materials ratio below 0.50.
D. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) 5 inches (125 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4. Air Content: 2 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal
maximum aggregate size.
5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

2.5 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
B. Channels, Angles-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.6 STRUCTURAL-STEEL FRAMING
A. Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary-framing system, designed to withstand required loads
and specified requirements.
1. General: Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill
for field-bolted assembly.
B. Columns: Cold-formed hollow structural sections with factory welded brackets and plates.
1. Prepare columns by shot-blasting and electrocoating process per ASTM D 1978 prior to application of
powder-coat finish.
C. Trusses: Fabricated from cold-formed hollow structural sections for top chord, bottom chord and webs.
Trusses shall be factory welded. Purlin clips welded to sides of truss top chord.
1. Trusses to be designed prevent the nesting of birds.
2. Prepare trusses by galvanizing or electrocoating process prior to application of powder-coat finish.
D. Purlins: Fabricated from cold-formed hollow structural sections. “C” or “Z” sections will not be permitted.
Attach purlins with Grade 5 bolts.
1. To minimize the possibility of birds roosting or nesting, locate purlins between truss top chords with
the top of the purlins flush with the top of the top chord and with a maximum of 3/16” clearance
between the ends of the purlins and truss top chords.
2. Apply full-zinc based organic coating to interior surfaces for corrosion protection.
3. Prepare exterior surfaces by galvanizing or electrocoating process prior to application of powder-coat
finish.
E. Bolts: Provide plain-finish bolts for structural-framing components with galvanizing or electrocoating
process prior to application of powder-coat finish.
F. Metal Preparation for Finish: Structural components, including columns, base plates, trusses and purlins
are to be abrasively cleaned after fabrication to a near white metal surface which meets SSPC-SP10 Near-
White Blast Cleaning.
1. The surface profile of the abrasively cleaned is to have a minimum 1.5 mil to 2.5 mil surface profile.
2. Perform the following test on metal surfaces after abrasive cleaning:
a. Backside Contamination Tape Test (TM-1); Detection of Chlorides – Paper Test (TM-3A);
and Copper Sulfate Test (TM-4).
G. Finishing: Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for
steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
2.7 METAL ROOF PANELS
A. Trapezoidal-Rib Metal Roof Panels: Formed with 1 1/4 inch high major rib at 12 inches o.c. and two minor
ribs between major ribs with trapezoidal rib configuration.
1. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet (galvalumed), 26 ga. nominal thickness. Minimum
yield of 80,000 PSI.
a. Exterior Finish: Full coat lf premium siliconized polyester.
b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Joint Type: Mechanically seamed, folded according to manufacturer's standard with field applied
sealant.

3. Panel Width: 36 inches.
4. Panel Height: 1 1/4 inch.
5. Panel Length: Full length from eave to ridge – no splicing.
6. Uplift Rating: UL 90.
B. Fasteners: Self tapping/self drilling type, designed to withstand specified design loads.
1. Fasteners to have a factory applied finish coating in a color to match metal roof panels.
2.8 FASCIAS, GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
A. SHEET METALS
1. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation,
Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural quality.
a. Surface: Manufacturer's standard clear acrylic coating on both sides.
b. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
1) Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
2) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. FABRICATION, GENERAL
1. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal
thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest
extent possible.
2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to
line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on
faces exposed to view.
5. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.
6. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed
within joints.
7. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from
compatible, noncorrosive metal.
8. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric
sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints
where necessary for strength.
C. ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

1. Built-in Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, with riveted and soldered joints, complete with
end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-
(2400-mm) long sections. Fabricate expansion joints and accessories from same metal as gutters
a. Fabricate from Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.
2. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal
hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.
a. Fabricate from Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide accessories as standard with fabricated structures manufacturer and as specified.
Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard
procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural
requirements.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool
marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
B. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly
including copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and
similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.022-inch (0.56-mm) nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or
aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match adjacent metal
panels.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly.
1. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings,
diagrams, and instruction manuals.
2. Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of proper size,
shape, and location. Members shall be free of cracks, tears, and ruptures.
B. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for fabrication and erection
tolerances.
C. Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to size and section, with baseplates, bearing plates,
stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld
framing for bolted field assembly.
D. Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to size and section by roll-forming or break-
forming, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection welded into
place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing.
E. Metal Panels: Fabricate and finish metal panels at the factory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE
A. FORMWORK
1. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral,
static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support
such loads.
2. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation,
and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
B. EMBEDDED ITEMS
1. Specify embedded items and anchorage devices for other work attached to or supported by cast-in-
place concrete. Insert specific requirements for installing embedded items, if any, that are part of
the Work.
2. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is
attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
C. STEEL REINFORCEMENT
1. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
D. CONCRETE PLACEMENT
1. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is
complete and that required inspections have been performed.
2. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
3. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
4. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
5. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
3.2 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING
A. Erect fabricated structures according to manufacturer's written erection instructions and erection drawings.

B. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from fabricated structures
manufacturer's professional engineer.
C. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated, according to AISC specifications
referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.
D. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and
roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish
exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
E. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing
surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary
adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when
structure will be completed and in service.
F. Columns: Erect columns level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Level baseplates to a true even
plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double-nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain
uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation. Moist-cure grout for not less than seven days
after placement.
G. Roof Framing: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Field bolt secondary framing to
clips attached to primary framing.
1. Provide rake purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae.
2. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows.
3. Locate canopy framing as indicated.
H. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC 303.
A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge.
B. Lap-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels directly to purlins.
1. Space fasteners in a true vertical and horizontal alignment and in a patterns and spacing as
recommended by panel manufacturer.
2. Neoprene washers under heads. Apply proper torque to obtain controlled uniform compression for a
positive seal without rupturing neoprene washers.
3. Provide metal-backed sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of
metal roof panels.
4. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal roof panels and between panels.
5. At metal panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with butyl-rubber
sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
3.4 FASCIAS AND ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to
SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with
installation of roof drainage system.
B. Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, or self-drilling or self-
tapping screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet roof panels, along
lower panel edges.
C. Built-in Gutters: Join sections with lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.
Slope to downspouts. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant.
1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet (15.24 m) apart.
Install expansion-joint caps.

D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners
designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately
60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between.
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide
for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly, including trim, copings, ridge
2. Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt
underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will
be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks and
that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet
metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant
performance.
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform special inspections.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:

1. High-Strength, Field-Bolted Connections: Connections shall be inspected during installation
according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
2. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, field-welded connections shall be tested and
inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at inspector's
option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.
Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
D. Product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 0500 GENERAL PROVISIONS

22 0501 PLUMBING SUMMARY
22 0594 TESTING
22 0716 GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS
22 0718 PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 0719 PIPE INSULATION FOR PLUMBING
22 1116 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM
22 1313 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM
22 4200 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Table of Contents - Plumbing Div. 22

SECTION 22 0500 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Provisions of this section apply to all work specified in all sections under Division 22.
B. In addition, work in Division 22 is governed by the provisions of the Bidding Requirements, Contract
Forms, General Conditions and all sections under Division 1, General Requirements.
1.2 Examination of Premises: Visit the site, verify all measurements and job conditions, and pay all costs
necessary to perform the work.
1.3 The Plumbing Contractor shall be licensed and hold a current contracting license that has been valid for a
minimum of two years in the State of Utah as a plumbing contractor.
1.4 The Plumbing Contractor shall have a minimum of five years experience installing commercial plumbing
systems similar to those described in these specifications and provide a list of previous projects, including
name of project and contact person names and phone numbers.
1.5 The Plumbing Contractor shall be able to bond work he is bidding to perform and shall provide a written
statement from the bonding agency proposed to be used for this project as a separate document in addition
to the plumbing bid submitted by the General Contractor. The bonding agency shall be one having a Best's
insurance rating of A or A+. (Verify all bonding with General Contractor)
1.6 Regulations, Permits, Fees, Charges, Inspections: (Verify with General Contractor)
A. Regulations: Comply with all applicable codes, rules and regulations. All materials and work must
comply with local construction, mechanical, plumbing, electrical and fire codes. As a minimum,
comply with the following: 1991 IMC, IPC, NEC, UFC, NFPA codes and all City and State codes.
B. Fees and Permits: Pay all connection, installation, use, development, etc., fees and/or charges.
Obtain and pay for all required permits and licenses. Refer to Division 1.
C. Inspections: All work must be inspected and approved by local authorities. Prior to final approval,
furnish the Architect with certificates of inspections and approvals by the local authorities in
accordance with Division 1.
1.7 Drawings and Specifications:
A. Refer to Division 1 for information on submittals and shop drawings.
B. If a conflict exists between the drawings and specifications, promptly notify the Architect.
1.8 Record Drawings: Provide record drawings for all work under sections in Division 22. See Division 1 for
detailed requirements covering preparation of record drawings.
1.9 Work and Materials: Unless otherwise specified, all materials must be new and of the quality specified. The
workmanship shall be of a quality that is acceptable to the Architect and is equal to the standards of the
trades. Contractor must staff the project with sufficient skilled workmen, including a fully qualified
construction Superintendent, to complete the work in the time allotted. The Superintendent must be qualified
to supervise all of the work in his work category.
1.10 Approvals of Materials and Equipment: Refer to Division 1 for description of material and equipment for prior
approvals and substitutions.
1.11 Maintenance Manual:
SPRINGVILLE CITY GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. Prior to completion of the project, compile a complete equipment and maintenance manual for all
equipment supplied under sections of Division 22, as described in Division 1.
B. Manuals shall be bound in a three-ring binder. A preliminary submittal of the manual shall be made
to the Architect 90 days after receiving approved submittals. Final submittal of the manual shall be
made four weeks prior to substantial completion of the project.
1.12 Shop Drawings:
A. Engineer's Review: The Engineer shall review and take appropriate action on shop drawings,
product data, samples and other submittals required by the contract documents. Such review shall
be only for general conformance with the design concept and general compliance with the
information given in the contract documents. It shall not include review of quantities, dimensions,
weights or gauges, fabrication processes, construction methods, coordination with the work of other
trades or construction safety precautions, all of which are the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
The Engineer's review shall be conducted with reasonable promptness consistent with sound
professional practice. Review of a specific item shall not indicate acceptance of an assembly of
which the item is a component. The Engineer shall not be required to review and shall not be
responsible for any deviations from the contract documents not clearly noted by the Contractor, nor
shall the Engineer be required to review partial submissions or those for which submissions for
correlated items have not been received.
B. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 and all data for all equipment provided under
Division 22 within 30 days after award of contract. Index all submittals and reference to these
specifications. Submit all shop drawings in a single batch at one time. Submit shop drawings for all
equipment provided under Division 22, including the following:
1. Insulation materials and finishes for all types of piping.
2. Access doors.
3. Access panels.
4. Plumbing fixture cuts, trim and fittings, rough-in dimensions and special supports.
5. Plumbing fixtures, equipment and specialties.
6. Domestic water pipe, fittings, valves, hangers and specialties showing manufacturer and
type.
7. Waste and vent piping, fittings, couplings, hangers.
8. Natural gas pipe, fittings, valves, regulators.
9. All other equipment as shown, indicated, specified, required and as directed by Architect.
1.13 Equipment Purchases: Arrange for purchase and delivery of all materials and equipment within 15 days
after approval of submittals.
1.14 Cooperative Work:
A. Correct without charge any work requiring alteration due to lack of proper supervision or failure to
make proper provision in time. Correct without charge any damage to adjacent work caused by the
alteration. See Division 1 for additional requirements.
B. Cooperative Work Includes:

1. General supervision and responsibility for proper location, rough-in and size of work
related to Division 22 but provided under other divisions of these specifications.
2. Installation of sleeves, inserts and anchors bolts for work under sections in Division 22.
3. Electrical work as specified herein. Refer to Division 26 for requirements.
1.15 Identification:
A. Pipe:
1. Mark each individual pipe with Brady, Seton, Brimar, or Set Mark identification markers of
snap-on type after pipe has been painted or insulated where exposed.
2. Install stencils at all major branch takeoffs, risers and at 10-foot intervals on straight runs
and at each entrance or exit from pipe shafts. Markers shall be located for maximum
visibility from expected personnel approach.
3. Identification material sizes shall be as follows:
2" and under 1/2" high letters
Over 2" 1" high letters
Provide a typewritten schedule of all markers used, with identification framed under glass and posted in the
mechanical equipment room.
4. Identify pipe with following:
Service Abbreviation
Fuel Gas G
Domestic Cold Water CW
Domestic Hot Water DHW
Domestic Hot Water Return DHWR
Sanitary Sewer SS
Vent V
Roof Drain RD
Roof Drain Overflow OF
1.16 Substitutions:
A. Where Manufacturer’s names appear, other Manufacturers may be substituted upon obtaining
written approval of Architect at least 10 days prior to opening of bids. The contractor will be
required to complete and sign a “Proposed Substitution Request Form” that will be reviewed by the
Architect, Engineer, and Owner. The submission of the “Proposed Substitution Request
Form” shall be at least 10 days prior to opening of bids.

B. Any prior approval of alternate equipment does not automatically exempt the supplier from meeting
the intent of these specifications. Failure to comply with the operational and functional intent of
these specifications may result in the total removal of the alternate system at the expense of the
contractor.
1.17 Guarantee: Guarantee all material, equipment, and workmanship for all sections under Division 22 in writing
to be free from defects of material and workmanship for one year from date of final acceptance as outlined in
Division 1. Replace without charge any material or equipment proving defective during this period. The
guarantee shall include performance of the equipment under all conditions of load, installing any additional
items of control and/or protective devices as required and the replacing of any refrigerant lost.
1.18 Electrical Work:
A. Electrical wiring, all raceways, wiring, outlet and junction boxes, and labor for installation of the
wiring and equipment shall be included in Electrical Division 26 of the specifications.
B. Before ordering any equipment. Verify the available voltage and phase for all motors with the
Electrical Contractor.
C. Submit a complete list of all motors prior to final closeout of job indicating the locations,
horsepower, voltage, phase and amperage draw of each motor.
D. All field wiring and equipment must conform to the applicable sections of the Electrical
specifications, Division 26.
1.19 Welding Codes and Standards: All welding and other criteria covered by this specification shall be in
accordance with the following code:
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
Section IX ANSI Code for Power Piping: B31.1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Equipment Design and Installation:
A. Uniformity: Unless otherwise specified, provide all equipment of same type or classification by the
same manufacturer.
B. Design: Design all equipment in accordance with ASME, AGA, UL and other applicable technical
standards as follows:
Pressures vessels - ASME Code constructed and stamped
Electric appliances - UL labeled
Fans - AMCA rated and stamped
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Verification of Dimensions:
A. Scaled and figured dimensions are approximate only. Before proceeding with work, carefully check
and verify dimensions at site, and be responsible for properly fitting equipment and materials
together and to the structure in spaces provided.

B. Drawings are essentially diagrammatic and many offsets, bends, special fittings and exact locations
are not indicated. Carefully study drawings and premises in order to determine best methods,
exact locations, routes, building obstructions, and install apparatus and equipment in available
locations. Install apparatus and equipment in manner and in locations to avoid obstructions,
preserve headroom, and keep openings and passageways clear.
3.2 Cutting and Patching: Cut work and patch per Division 1 as necessary to properly install the new work. As
the work progresses, coordinate necessary openings, holes, chases, etc., in their correct location. If the
required openings, holes and chases are not in their correct locations, make the necessary corrections at no
cost to the Owner. Avoid excessive cutting and do not cut structural members without the consent of the
Architect. Patching by General Contractor at Mechanical, Plumbing or Fire Protection Contractor's expense.
Include as a part of the work under this contract all structural framing required by penetrations through the
roof and necessary steel to support ducts and pipes between structural steel unless shown on the structural
drawings.
3.3 Closing-in of Unfinished Work: Cover no work until inspected, tested and approved. Where work is covered
before inspection and test, uncover it, and when inspected, tested and approved, restore all work to original
proper condition.
3.4 Excavation and Backfill:
A. Perform all necessary excavation, shoring and backfilling required for the proper laying of all pipes
and conduits inside the building and premises, and outside as may be necessary. Conform to
Division 2 requirements. Remove all excess excavated materials from the site or dispose of on site
as directed by General Contractor.
B. Excavate all trenches open cut, keep trench banks as nearly vertical as practicable, and sheet and
brace trenches where required for stability and safety. Excavate trenches true to line and make
bottoms not less than 18" wide but no wider than necessary to provide ample work room. Grade
trench bottoms accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe on
undisturbed soil along its entire length. Dig "bell" holes after the trench bottom has been graded.
Machine grade only to the top line of the pipes, doing the balance by hand. Do not cut any trench
near or under footings without first consulting the Architect. Comply with OSHA requirements.
C. Provide backfilling and compaction in accordance with requirement of Division 2 and under the
direction of the Architect and the Owner's testing firm to the required density. Make the first 2 feet
of fill in 6" layers, each thoroughly compacted as directed, and free from rocks, large clods of earth,
leaves, branches, and debris. Compact the rest of the backfill to prevent settlement as directed,
using in the backfill no rocks larger than 4" in diameter, and using no rocks at all in the top 12".
3.5 Accessibility:
A. Install valves, dampers, thermometers, gauges, traps, cleanouts, control devices or other
specialties requiring reading, adjustment, inspection, repairs, removal or replacement conveniently
and accessibly throughout the finished building. Where any of these devices are shown on the
contract drawings to be installed above any inaccessible ceiling, the Mechanical Contractor shall
furnish access doors or panels as required.
B. All access doors or panels in walls and ceilings required for access to control devices, traps, valves
and similar devices are to be furnished and installed as part of the work under this section. Provide
type as specified under Division 8.
C. Refer to drawings and "Finish Schedule" for type of wall and ceiling in each area and for rated
construction.

D. Coordinate work of various sections to locate valves, traps, and dampers with others to avoid
unnecessary duplication of access doors.
3.6 Roof Flashings: Flash and counterflash all piping, conduits and ductwork penetrating roofing membrane with
flashing per roofing manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to architectural drawings for detailing of duct
and pipe penetrations through roof.
3.7 Equipment Rough-in:
A. Rough in all equipment and fixtures as designated on the drawings and in the specifications. The
drawings indicate only the approximate location of rough-ins. The exact rough-in locations must be
determined from large-scale certified drawings. The Contractor shall obtain all certified rough-in
information before progressing with any work for rough-in final connections.
B. Be responsible for providing all outlets and services of proper size at the required locations.
C. Minor changes in the contract drawings shall be anticipated and provided for under this division of
the specifications.
D. Rough-in only (unless otherwise designated on the drawings) shall include the following:
1. Plumbing: Provide all services designated and required, including waste and water. Valve
and cap all stub-outs for water and gas. Cap all waste and vent outlets.
3.8 Owner-Furnished and Other Equipment:
A. Rough-in only for all Owner-furnished equipment (see Division 1) and all equipment furnished under
other sections of the specifications, except as otherwise specified and/or noted on the drawings.
B. Provide all services designated, valve and cap all piping and cap all waste piping and leave in a
clean and orderly manner.
C. Rough-in requirements shall be as outlined in the preceding paragraph titled "Equipment Rough-In."
3.9 Equipment Final Connections:
A. Provide all piping final connections for all equipment under Division 22 as required herein specified
and indicated on the drawings.
B. Plumbing: Provide final plumbing connections complete with shutoff valves, risers, traps, vacuum
breakers and indirect wastes for all equipment furnished and installed under other sections of these
specifications, except as otherwise designated. Included under the Plumbing section of the
specifications are the final connections to the following:
1. Miscellaneous equipment specified to be furnished and installed under other divisions of

the specifications.
3.10 Cleanup:
A. In addition to cleanup specified under Division 1, thoroughly clean all parts of the equipment.
Where exposed parts are to be painted, thoroughly clean off any splattered construction materials
and remove all oil and grease spots. Wipe the surface carefully and scrape out all cracks and
corners.

B. Thoroughly flush and clean out all water circulating systems. Remove, clean and replace all
strainer elements.
C. During the progress of the work, keep the premises clean and free of debris.
3.11 Painting:
A. Except as otherwise specified or indicated in the architectural drawings and/or specifications, paint
all exposed unfinished metal with one coat of rust-inhibiting primer. (Galvanized ductwork and
factory painted equipment shall be considered as having primed surface.)
B. Finished painting is specified under Division 9.
3.12 Connections to Services: Provide all connections to existing sanitary sewer lines, storm sewer, gas lines,
water lines, electrical services furnished under other contracts, except as otherwise specifically designated.
Provide all necessary tees, taps and connections required to properly connect to all mains. Verify all
required City requirements before making any piping connections to sanitary sewer, storm sewer, water or
gas piping and conform to them during installation.
3.13 Objectionable Noise and Vibration: Construct and brace the metal partitions, ducts and sheet metal
housings to prevent vibration or rattling when systems are in operation. Install connections to equipment so
noise and vibration will not reach the conditioned area through ducts, piping, conduit, sheet metal work, or
the building structure.
3.14 Welding:
A. Procedures:
1. All procedures and welders must be qualified in accordance with the requirements of
Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and ANSI code for power piping
B31.1. Procedure qualification test records and acceptance shall be submitted with the
welding procedure prior to the start of fabrication.
2. Architect's inspector or authorized representative will review performance qualification

records of individual welders.
B. Welding Processes: The following welding processes are permitted, provided that the procedure is
qualified in accordance with Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
1. Manual shielded metal-arc.
2. Gas tungsten-arc.
3. Other welding processes may be used providing they are qualified in accordance with
Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Restrictions: Weld bevel preparations shall be provided on all welding fittings and shall be
machined or ground to remove all discoloration if flame or arc cut.
D. Welding Filler Material:
1. A filler material control procedure shall be submitted to Owner for review and acceptance
prior to performing any welding.

2. All shielded metal-arc welding shall be performed using low-hydrogen type electrodes
such as E 7018.
E. Preheat and Interpass Temperature:
1. Preheat for pressure components shall be as specified in Table 132 of ANSI B.1.
2. Preheat and interpass temperature shall be determined by temperature indicating crayons,

contact pyrometers or other equally suitable means.
F. Postweld Heat Treatment: Postweld heat treatment for pressure components shall be as specified
in Table 131 of ANSI B31.1.
END OF SECTION 22 0500

SECTION 22 0501 - SUMMARY OF WORK FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Description of Work
A. This section describes the work required under the Plumbing sections of these specifications.
1.2 General and Supplementary Conditions
A. The General and the Supplementary Conditions of this project apply in every respect to all of the
sections under this division of these specifications.
1.3 Related Work Specified Elsewhere
A. Concrete, Division.
B. Finished Painting, Division.
C. Mechanical, Division 23.
D. Electrical, Division 26.
1.4 Scope
A. For general convenience these specifications are divided into divisions and sections. The work for the
plumbing contract is in general described in Division 22. The work under these sections include
furnishing and installing plumbing systems. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the
installation of the following:
1. Complete sanitary plumbing waste and vent systems with connections to all plumbing fixtures
and equipment to existing sanitary sewer system. (Hospital)
2. Domestic water piping with services to all fixtures and equipment, including connections to
existing water system within 5 feet of building. (Hospital)
3. Complete sanitary plumbing waste and vent systems with connections to all plumbing fixtures
and equipment to new sanitary sewer system. (Clinic) Existing Sewer Line located on the East
Side of the new Clinic Offices will be re-routed to accommodate new office building location
and sewer needs.
4. Domestic water piping with services to all fixtures and equipment, including connections to
new water system within 5 feet of building. (Clinic)
5. Insulation specified herein for domestic hot water supply piping, and other pipe as specified.
6. Natural gas piping system including piping, valves, pressure regulators, including connections
to all equipment and connections to gas distribution system.
7. Adequate supervision of erection, balancing and adjustments and instructions for proper
operation and maintenance.
8. Plumbing fixtures as specified herein and shown on the drawings.
9. Provide gas supplies to heating, air conditioning and special equipment using same. Valve
all stub-outs and plug for final connection to equipment by Air Conditioning Contractor.
Coordinate location at site with Air Conditioning Contractor.
10. Payment for all plumbing permits, inspection and installation fees. (Coordinate with General
Contractor)
11. Sterilization of potable water system.
1.5 Alternate Equipment
A. Specification of all equipment and materials in Division 22 by brand name is intended to establish a
standard of quality. Further, this equipment has been checked as to size and weight requirements, and
space allocations have been made accordingly. The Contractor is responsible to verify prior to bidding
SPRINGVILLE CITY SUMMARY OF WORK FOR PLUMBING

that all specified and alternate items to those specified will be available in time for installation during
timely progress of the work.
B. Submittal of equipment by other acceptable manufacturers must be made in accordance to

"Instructions to Bidders" section ten days prior to opening of bid and shall be complete in every
detail including space requirements, weight, complete performance data, and supplemental data
requested by the Architect. Contractor shall be responsible for assurance that the equipment meets
all requirements detailed in this and other sections and as shown on the drawings.
C. The following is a list of manufacturers whose equipment is acceptable as to manufacture, subject to

conformance with all drawings.
D. Approved Plumbing Equipment Manufacturers: (Note some items may not be required)
Plumbing Fixtures: American Standard, Kohler, Toto, Gerber.
Plumbing Supply Products: Chicago, Crane, American Standard, Eljer, Symmons, Delta, Kohler,
Speakman, Royal, T & S, Moen, Gerber.
Plumbing Supply Stops: Eastman, Crane, Kohler, Eljer, Wolverine, McGuire, Brasscraft, EBC.
P-Traps and Continuous Waste Assemblies: Crane, Kohler, Eljer, McGuire, Brasscraft, Dearborn,
EBC.
Cleanouts: Zurn, Smith, Wade, Josam, Mikro, Mifab.
Stainless Steel Sinks: Elkay, Moen, Titan.
Valves: Milwaukee, Crane, Kennedy, Stockham, Mission, Grinnell, Keystone.
Pipe Hangers and Supports: Grinnell, Elcen, Kin-Line, Unistrut, F & S, B-Line, Michigan, Piping
Technology & Products.
Pipe and Equipment Insulation: Owens-Corning, CertainTeed, Manville, Pittsburgh, Armstrong.
Closed Cell Insulation: Halstead-Nomalco, Armstrong, Rubatex.
Gas Pressure Regulator: Fisher, Equimeter.
Electric Water Coolers: Elkay, Sunroc, Halsey Taylor, Haws Corporation, Westinghouse, Acorn Aqua.
Gas Fired Domestic Hot Water Heaters: Ruud, National, PVI, State, Rheem, A. O. Smith, Lochinvar,
Bradford White.
Circulating Pumps: Bell & Gossett, Taco, Armstrong, Chicago, Pacific, Paco, Weinman, Amtrol, Weil,
Grundfos.
Thermostatic Tempered Water Valves: Symmons, Powers, Leonard, Bradley.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SUMMARY OF WORK FOR PLUMBING

SECTION 22 0594 - TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 This section describes the labor, materials and services required for the testing of all systems.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 Test Procedures
A. Make tests before the rough work is covered. The system may be tested in parts if approved.
B. When the tests show the work in any way defective, remove defective material or equipment from the
premises and retest.
C. Make piping tests on all piping as required by code or provide a 150 psi hydrostatic pressure test for
four hours, unless otherwise noted.
2.2 Testing out
A. Check out and test operate all equipment installed under sections of these specifications, including a
check of all work performed under the Electrical and Mechanical divisions in conjunction with the
equipment installed under all sections of this division.
1. Fill water pipe lines, flush and drain, and then refill with clear water. Repeat this procedure
three times, under the observation of the Architect.
2. When the test or observations show that the work is in any way defective or at a variance with
the specification requirements, immediately make all changes necessary to correct the work
and remedy the defects to the satisfaction of the Architect. Remove any defective material
or equipment from the premises. In the event the Contractor does not remedy all defects and
make all changes demanded by the Architect within a reasonable time, the right is reserved
to have the defects remedied or changes made and to charge the cost of the work against the
account of the Contractor.
3. Furnish all appliances, equipment and labor for the tests and meet all expenses of the tests.
2.3 Final Tests
A. Before acceptance and at a time designated, make a complete test to demonstrate that in general, the
system is placed into proper operation.
SPRINGVILLE CITY TESTING

SECTION 22 0716 - GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN
A. This section describes the workmanship, labor, services and miscellaneous equipment and materials
required for the installation of all piping in Division 22.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Do not close up, furr in, or cover piping before it has been tested and inspected as specified.
B. Cover or plug openings in pipes, drains, fittings and equipment during construction to keep system free
of foreign matter.
C. Conceal all piping unless otherwise indicated or specified.
D. Install piping to maintain headroom, keep access openings clear and offset piping as required to
maintain clearances.
E. Install piping at right angles or parallel to adjacent walls.
F. Keep piping free from sags, traps and unnecessary bends.
G. Do not spring, bend or force pipe into place. Use fittings for all offsets and changes of alignment in
piping.
H. Do not use street elbows, bushings and longscrew nipples.
I. Do not install any pressure piping in floor slabs or in ground under floor slabs, unless otherwise
indicated or specified.
J. Do not locate piping in electrical equipment rooms unless it serves that room. Do not locate it directly
above electrical equipment in any room. Where piping is located in an electrical equipment room which
it serves, provide a 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal drip pan with drain line to floor drain.
K. Where change in pipe size occurs, use appropriate reducing fittings, no bushings.
3.2 UNIONS, FLANGES AND DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS
A. Unions Required: On inlet or outlet of all valves and equipment with connections 2" and smaller and
elsewhere as indicated on the contract documents.
B. Flanges Required: On inlet or outlet of all equipment having connections 2-1/2" and larger. On inlet
or outlet of all valves and fittings having flanged ends or requiring companion flanges. Do not use slip-
on flanges on short radius ells, tees, reducers and fittings that do not have sufficient straight length to
permit proper alignment and construction of a flange joint.
C. Dielectric Couplings: Provide dielectric couplings at all points where copper or brass pipe or equipment
is joined to ferrous pipe and equipment. This requirement does not apply to brass valves in steel lines
or joints between copper and cast iron drainage lines.
SPRINGVILLE CITY GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS

3.3 PIPE SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. Sleeve all pipes passing through masonry or concrete floors and walls.
B. Provide piping passing through masonry, concrete, tile and gypsum wall construction with not lighter
than 22 gauge galvanized steel sleeves with lock seam, except as otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeves through floor construction shall be a minimum of Schedule 40 black steel pipe with 3" weep
ring flange welded to pipe except as otherwise indicated. Flange shall be embedded in concrete.
D. Floor sleeves shall extend a minimum of 2" above the floor.
E. Pipes passing through walls labeled on the architectural drawings as fire-rated shall be sleeved and
sealed with fireproof caulking. Refer to the contract drawings for additional information and details.
F. Sleeves for insulated pipe must be large enough to clear insulation.
G. Where sleeves are placed in exterior walls below grade or in floor of finished areas, pack the space
between the pipe or conduit and the sleeves with oakum and lead. Make the entire penetration
watertight. For other piping seal between pipe and sleeve with Compriban or equal sealer.
H. Where pipe motion due to expansion and contraction will occur, make sleeve of sufficient diameter to
permit free movement of the pipes.
I. Provide chrome-plated or stainless steel escutcheons at all pipe penetrations through walls, ceilings
or floors of all finished areas.
3.4 VALVES
A. General: Locate and arrange valves for complete regulation and/or removal of equipment.
B. Location: Install valves as indicated and at all the following locations:
1. Pressure connections to equipment.

2. Takeoff from vertical risers.
3. New major branch in piping system.
C. Concealment: Unless otherwise indicated, conceal all valves in the finished parts of the building.
D. Grouping: Wherever possible, group valves to provide a neat appearance with all parts accessible.
3.5 PIPE JOINTS
A. Screwed Joints: Cut accurately to measurements established at the building. Ream pipe and remove
all burrs. Cut threads per ANSI B2.1 with clean sharp die to full thickness of die. Apply pipe dope or
teflon tape to male thread prior to jointing. After jointing, leave not more than 3 full threads exposed.
B. Solder Joints: Cut square and remove burrs. Thoroughly clean outside of male end and inside of
female fitting to a bright finish. Coat pipe and fitting with solder flux, applied with brush. Solder joint
as specified and remove excess solder. Remove the internal parts of soldered valves prior to
soldering. Carefully follow equipment manufacturer's directions for soldering on or adjacent to his
equipment.
C. Welded Joints:
1. Electric weld all piping using ASME certified welders (refer to Section 15000 for additional
requirements on welding). Carefully follow equipment manufacturers directions for welding

on or adjacent to his equipment. Use outlets, fittings and joints designed for welded piping.
Use long radius ells at all pump connections and where indicated and butt-welded or socket-
welded fittings at all offsets or bends.
2. Make connections to mains with Schedule 40 welding fittings when the branch is equal to the
size of the main or one size smaller.Use "Weldolet" fittings when the branch is 2 or more sizes
smaller than the main. Use "Threadolet" fittings for branches 2" or smaller.
D. Mechanical Joints: Install with mechanical couplings or compression joints in strict compliance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
E. Solvent Weld Joints: Install solvent welded joints in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
instructions and remove all excess solvent.
3.6 PIPE HANGERS
A. General: Secure all piping in place using approved hangers, supports and anchors designed to support
the weight of the pipe, fluid and insulation. Arrange hangers to prevent transmission of vibration from
the piping to the building structure, with hangers and supports designed to allow for expansion and
contraction.
B. Pipe Support: Support piping at each change of direction, at ends of branches, at base and top of riser
pipes and drops, and wherever necessary to prevent sags, bending or vibration.
C. Insulation Guards: Size hangers on insulated piping to fit outside the covering. Protect insulation from
crushing at hanger locations with sheet metal pipe saddles. Use rigid insulation under saddle.
3.7 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION
A. Install all pipe work and conduit in such a manner that its contraction and expansion will not do any
damage to the pipes, conduit, the connected equipment or the building. Install offsets, swing joints,
expansion joints, pipe clamps and anchors as required to prevent excessive strains in the pipe work.
Install all supports to permit the systems to contract and expand freely without putting any stress or
strain in the respective systems.

SECTION 22 0718 - PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED HEREIN
A. Provide and install piping specialties as specified herein and as shown on the drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE HANGERS
A. Piping 2-1/2" and Smaller: Use adjustable, split ring malleable iron type (Grinnell Fig. 104 or approved)
or adjustable steel clevis type (Grinnell Fig. 260 or approved) with threaded solid steel hanger rods.
B. Grouped Piping: Trapeze type hangers with rollers may be used where 2 or more pipes run parallel
to each other. Submit shop drawings of all trapeze hangers for approval before progressing with any
work.
C. Size all hangers on insulated piping to fit outside covering.
D. Hanger Rod Sizes:
Pipe Size Rod Diameter (Inches)
2" and smaller 3/8

2-1/2" and 3" 1/2
E. Hanger Rod Spacing (Horizontal Piping):
Max. Hanger Spacing

Pipe (Ft. O.C.)
Steel pipe 3/4" and smaller 6

Steel pipe 1" 8
Steel pipe 1-1/4" through 12" 10
Copper tubing 1-1/4" and smaller 6
Copper tubing 1-1/2" and larger 8
Special piping materials As recommended by manufacturer
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Refer to structural drawings and details for acceptable methods and locations of attachment to
structural members.
B. Provide hangers at all offsets, tees, within 12" of all horizontal elbows, and elsewhere as herein
described.
C. Support all piping from walls, structural members, or from the ceiling as specified or as detailed.
D. Support vertical piping as specified or as detailed.
E. Where structural or piping conditions or clearance requires other than the specified means of
supporting the pipes, use means as directed by the Architect.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PIPING SPECIALTIES

F. Wrap piping wherever lines run through joists, studs and framing 12" in length with felt on paper
backing to prevent the pipe from rubbing.
G. Install chrome-plated split escutcheons around all pipes passing through finished walls, floors and
ceilings.
H. Sleeve and seal air and watertight all piping passing through exterior walls, through plenum or fire walls
above ceilings, exam room walls, and elsewhere as designated. All sealers shall be waterproof and
fireproof.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PIPING SPECIALTIES

SECTION 22 0719 - PIPE INSULATION FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Apply insulation after piping has been installed, tested, approved, dry, and in a clean condition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Piping: Insulation end joints to be tightly butted together.
3.2 INSULATION THICKNESS
A. Insulation wall thickness shall conform to the following schedule:
1. Hot Water Supply Lines:
a. Main and horizontal branches - 1" thickness.
b. Drops in walls and partitions - 1/2" thickness.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PIPE INSULATION FOR PLUMBING

SECTION 22 1116 - DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Install all piping above floor unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Use Type "L" hard drawn copper for all
water lines above grade. Use Type "K" hard drawn copper for all water lines indicated below grade but not
below concrete floor slabs. Use wrought copper solder type fittings at all copper pipe connections, tube
drawing is not approved. Use Type "K" soft drawn copper (one piece with no joint below floor) for all water
lines indicated below concrete floor slabs. Make final connections and extend water main to city main,
including water meter.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Piping: (Shall meet the standards set forth in IPC Tables 605.3, 605.4, 605.5.) Discuss options with owner’s
representative.
A. Type "L" hard drawn copper, conforming to ASTM B88, for all water pipe not set in or under
concrete or in the ground.
B. Type "K" hard drawn copper, conforming to ASTM B88, for water pipe set in the ground but not
under concrete floor slabs.
C. Type "K" soft drawn copper, conforming to ASTM B88, for all water pipe set below concrete floor
slab, install no joints below floor slab.
D. Color identify all copper piping with size of pipe, manufacturer's trademark, and conform to the
following schedule:
Type "K" Copper ........ Green
Type "L" Copper ........ Blue
2.2 Fittings:
A. Provide wrought copper solder type fittings conforming to ANSI B16.22 (1963) for all connections to
copper piping.
2.3 Valves:
A. Gate Valves: Stockham B-104, 125# SWP solder joint for all lines up to 3" in diameter; body and
bonnet shall be of ASTM B-62 cast bronze composition, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass
packing gland, Teflon-impregnated packing, and malleable handwheel. Stockham G-612 for valves
larger than 3" in diameter shall be Class 125 iron body, bronze mounted, with body and bonnet
conforming to ASTM A-126, Class B cast iron, flanged ends, with Teflon impregnated packing and
two-piece packing gland assembly.
B. Check Valves: Stockham B-309, 125# SWP, solder joint for all valves up to 2" in diameter with
body and caps conforming to ASTM B-62, cast bronze composition and swing type disc. Stockham
G-931, iron body, bronze mounted with body and caps conforming to ASTM A-126, Class B cast
iron, flanged ends, swing type service for all valves larger than 2" in diameter.
C. Globe Valves: Stockham B-14T, 125# SWP solder joint, body and bonnet of ASTM B-62 bronze
composition, copper-silicon-bronze stem, brass packing gland, Teflon impregnated packing, and
malleable handwheel for all valves up to 2" in diameter. Stockham G-512 for valves larger than 2"
in diameter shall be Class 125, iron body, bronze mounted, with body and bonnet conforming to
ASTM A-126, Class B cast iron, flanged ends, with Teflon impregnated packing, and two-piece
packing gland assembly.
D. Ball Valves: Stockham S-216-BR-RS for valves up to 2" in diameter solder end joints with extended
solder cups shall be 600 psi CWP, cast brass body, replaceable reinforced Teflon seats,
conventional port, blowout-proof stems, and chrome-plated brass ball.
E. Butterfly Valves: Stockham LG-712-BS3-E lever operated valves for 2" through 2-1/2" and
Stockham LG-722-BS3-E gear operated valves for 3" through 12". Valves shall be full lug type
SPRINGVILLE CITY DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM

body, extended necks for insulation, 200 psi CWP, conforming to ASTM A-126, Class B iron, field
replaceable EPDM sleeve and O-rings, with aluminum-bronze disc, 410 stainless steel stem.
2.4 Solder:
A. Lines 1/2" Through 2": Use 95/5 solder with suitable flux, except on ball valves.
B. Lines 2-1/2" and Larger: Use Stay-Brite 8, Aircosil 45, or other silver brazing alloy of equivalent
melting point and physical properties. Use Aircosil flux or equal suitable to brazing alloy.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Extend water piping to all fixtures, outlets and equipment. Provide shutoff valves or fixture stops as required
for proper service.
3.2 Provide capped or plugged and valved outlets where indicated for future equipment connections.
3.3 Hold lines which are specified to be insulated a sufficient distance from other work to permit installation of
insulation.
3.4 Provide necessary allowance in piping systems to handle expansion and contraction. Install ample swings
or offsets in branch connections to avoid undue strains on fittings or short pipe supplies. Provide expansion
loops and pipe anchors as indicated on the drawings.
3.5 Coordinate overhead piping with mechanical ductwork and electrical conduits.
3.6 Sterilization: Sterilize the entire water distribution system thoroughly with a solution containing not less than
50 parts per million of available chlorine. For the chlorinating material use sodium hypochlorite solution,
conforming to Federal Specification 0-8-441, Grade D, and introduce into the system in a manner approved
by the Architect. Allow the sterilizing solution to remain in the system for a period of 8 hours, during which
time all valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times. After sterilization, flush the solution
from the system with clean water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million,
unless otherwise directed. *** NOTE: CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER WITH
CERTIFICATION OF TEST RESULTS. ***
3.7 Test: Fill system with water and pressurize to 125 psi and hold for four (4) hours with no pressure drop.
Test and obtain approval on all underground piping before covering work.
SPRINGVILLE CITY DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM

SECTION 22 1313 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM
PART 1 -PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY (It is anticipated that the waste system will be constructed with PVC Schedule-40
piping that is rated for DWV installations.)
A. Includes But Not Limited To
1. Furnish and install soil, waste, and vent piping systems within building and connect to
existing utility lines.
2. Furnish and install soil, waste, and vent piping systems within building and connect to
existing utility line to the East of the New Clinic. (New Clinic)
3. Provide and install appropriate connectors between existing piping and new piping.
(Hospital)
4. Perform excavation and backfill required by work of this Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society For Testing And Materials
1. ASTM D 2235-96a, ‘Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for ABS Plastic Pipe and
Fittings’
2. ASTM D 2321-00, ‘Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe

for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications’
3. ASTM D 2564-96a, ‘Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl
Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems’
4. ASTM D 3034-00, ‘Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Sewer
Pipe and Fittings’
5. ASTM F 628-00, ‘Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)

Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings with a Cellular Core’
6. ASTM F 656-96a, ‘Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of
Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings’
7. ASTM F 789-95a, ‘Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic
Gravity Flow Sewer Pipe and Fittings’
8. ASTM F 891-00, ‘Standard Specification for Coextruded Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic
Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe Fittings with a Cellular Core’
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS (Shall meet the standards set forth in IPC Tables 702.1, 702.2, 702.3, 702.4.)
A. Anticipated DWV Piping Material is Schedule-40 PVC that is rated for DWV installations.
B. Buried Piping
1. Minimum size of waste piping installed under floor slab on grade shall be 2 inches.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Excavate and backfill as specified
1. Runs shall be as close as possible to those shown on Drawings.
2. Excavate to required depth and grade to obtain fall required. Grade soil and waste lines
within building perimeter 1/4 inch fall in one foot in direction of flow.
3. Bottom of trenches shall be hard. Tamp as required.
4. Remove debris from trench prior to laying of pipe.
5. Do not cut trenches near footings without consulting Architect.
B. Thermoplastic Pipe And Fittings
1. General - Piping and joints shall be clean and installed according to Manufacturer's
recommendations. Break down contaminated joints, clean seats and gaskets and
reinstall.
2. Above Grade - Locate pipe hangers every 4 feet on center maximum and at elbows.
3. Below Grade -
a. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM D 2321.
b. Stabilize unstable trench bottoms.
c. Bed pipe true to line and grade with continuous support from firm base.
1) Bedding depth - 4 to 6 inches.
2) Material and compaction to meet ASTM standard noted above.
d. Excavate bell holes into bedding material so pipe is uniformly supported along its
entire length. Blocking to grade pipe is forbidden.
e. Trench width at top of pipe -
1) Minimum - 18 inches or diameter of pipe plus 12 inches, whichever is

greater.
2) Maximum - Outside diameter of pipe plus 24 inches.
f. Do not use back hoe or power equipment to assemble pipe.
g. Initial backfill shall be 12 inches above top of pipe with material specified in
referenced ASTM standard.
C. Install piping so cleanouts may be installed as follows
1. Where shown on Drawings and near bottom of each stack and riser.
2. At every 135 degrees of accumulative change in direction for horizontal lines.
3. Every 100 feet of horizontal run.
4. Extend piping to accessible surface. Do not install piping so cleanouts must be installed in
carpeted floors. In such locations, configure piping so wall type cleanouts may be used.

D. Each fixture and appliance discharging water into sanitary sewer or building sewer lines shall have
seal trap in connection with complete venting system so gasses pass freely to atmosphere with no
pressure or syphon condition on water seal.
E. Vent entire waste system to atmosphere. Join lines together in fewest practicable number before
projecting above roof. Set back vent lines so they will not pierce roof near edge or valley. Vent line
terminations shall be
1. 6 inches minimum above roof and 12 inches minimum from any vertical surface.
2. Same size as vent pipe.
3. In areas where minimum design temperature is below 0 deg F or where frost or snow
closure may be possible -
a. Vent line terminations shall be same size as vent pipe, except no smaller than 2
inches in diameter.
b. Vents shall terminate 10 inches minimum above roof or higher if required by local
codes.
F. Furnish and install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated structures as required under Sections
07840 and 15051.
A. Site Tests
1. Conduct tests for leaks and defective work. Notify Architect prior to testing.
2. Thermoplastic Pipe System -
a. Before backfilling and compacting of trenches, cap all open ends and pressure
test to 20 psi for 4 hours with no leaks. Correct leaks and defective work.
b. After backfilling and compacting of trenches is complete but before placing floor
slab, re-test as specified above. Uncover pipe and correct leaks and defective
work. Re-backfill and compact and re-test.

SECTION 22 4200 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Use polished chrome-plated, adjustable brass P-traps with wall escutcheons at all exposed locations. Use
polished chrome-plated faucets with removable trim, brass body and brass handles. Fixtures and supply fitting
shall be of one manufacturer. Provide diaphragm type, polished chrome-plated flush valves with integral vacuum
breakers and screwdriver stops. Provide fixture stops or valves ahead of all equipment or fixtures. After fixtures
are set in place and secured to walls, caulk all around between fixtures and wall with either Dow Corning #780
or G.E. Construction Sealant white silicone caulking compound.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Sinks:
A. Multi-Purpose Room Sink Design Standard shall be Elkay Dayton D12522 with Moen 7425 (lever style
handle).
B. Utility Sink for washing equipment Design Standard shall be Aero Model 24x36 bowl Non-NSF single
compartment utility sink with Chicago 510-GC-613AL12E1.
2.2 Lavatory:
A. Counter Mounted: Design Standard shall be American Standard Aqualyn vitreous china basin with grid
drain cover and ADA approved safety covers. Faucet Design Standard shall be Moen 8305.
B. Multi-user: Design Standard shall be Bradley WF2704 with Infrared Activation.
2.3 Water Closet:
A. Fixture: American Standard "Madera," floor mounted, vitreous china, siphon jet action, elongated bowl,
1-1/2" top spud, 2 #19 bolt caps with retainer clips.
B. Flush Valve: Sloan Optima with battery power.
C. Seat: white with open front seat with concealed check hinge and without cover.
2.4 Urinal
A. Fitxture Design Standard shall be American Standard “Trimbrook” with Sloan Optima with battery
power.
2.5 Mop Sink:
A. Fixture: American Standard Florwell, enameled cast iron service sink with coated steel spring rim guard
and American Standard Service Sink Faucet 8344.112 with threaded spout (faucet with bucket hook,
hose end, vacuum breaker and stops).
2.6 Disposal
A. Design Standard: InSinkErator Badger-1.
2.7 Refrigerated Drinking Fountains:
A. Single Level Design Standard shall be Elkay EZS8: self-contained electric water cooler with stainless
steel top and trim with band controls. Unit shall be furnished with 1-1/2" P-trap, 3/8" tubing with stop
to wall.
2.8 Drains
A. General: Provide cast iron body drains with lacquer finish. Where installed in surfaces having
waterproofing membrane, provide drains with non-puncturing, flashing clamp device and anchoring
flange. See Waste and Vent Piping Section , for type of outlet on drain. See plans for type of grate
to be furnished on floor sinks. Drains not receiving a continuous flow of water shall be connected to
a drain line from a trap primer.
B. Floor Drains:
SPRINGVILLE CITY PLUMBING FIXTURES

1. Equipment Rooms and Unfinished Areas (Common Areas with concrete floor): J. R. Smith
2110-B-P with Duco coated cast-iron strainer and shallow type bucket strainer and with trap
primer connection. Floor drain shall be compatible with flooring in area of installation.
2. Toilet Rooms and Finished Areas (Common Areas with concrete floor): J. R. Smith 2005-A-P
round nickel bronze strainer and trap primer connection. Floor drain shall be compatible with
flooring in area of installation.
2.9 Hose Bibs
A. HB-1 Design Standard shall be Woodford Model 67 in exterior locations for freezeproof applications.
B. HB-2 Design Standard shall be Woodford Model 101 with 3/4" supply line in interior locations.
C. HB-3 Design Standard shall have 1" supply line with anti-siphon assembly and 3/4" male hose thread
in interior locations.
D. HB-4 Design Standard shall be Woodford Model 22 with a hose and sprayer.
2.10 Roof Drains: (Verify compatibility with roof material and structure)
A. J. R. Smith DX 1010-A-C-U. Provide extension sleeves, height as required by thickness of tapered

insulation on all insulated roofs. Provide 6" wide, 3-pound sheet lead flashing around all roof drains.
Set drains below insulation level and provide tapered insulation boards around drains. Provide sealing
gasket.
B. Overflow Drain: Extend overflow drain pipe with flashing 2" above low point of roof. Design Standard
shall be J.R. Smith 1771.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PLUMBING FIXTURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL
23 0501 GENERAL PROVISIONS

23 0593 AIR BALANCING
23 0594 TESTING
23 0933 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
23 1000 FUEL GAS SYSTEM (NATURAL GAS)
23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 3114 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK
23 3300 DUCT SPECIALITIES
23 3301 DUCT AND PIPE INSULATION
23 5418 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
Table of Contents - Mechanical Div. 23

SECTION 23 0501 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Scope:
A. Provisions of this section apply to all work specified in all sections under Division 23.
B. In addition, work in Division 23 is governed by the provisions of the Bidding Requirements, Contract
Forms, General Conditions and all sections under Division 1, General Requirements.
1.2 Examination of Premises: Visit the site, verify all measurements and job conditions, and pay all costs
necessary to perform the work.
1.3 The Mechanical Contractor shall be licensed and hold a current contracting licence that has been valid for a
minimum of two years in the State of Utah as a Mechanical Contractor.
1.4 The Mechanical Contractor shall have a minimum of five years' experience installing commercial cooling and
heating systems similar to those described in these specifications and provide a list of previous projects,
including name of project and contact person names and phone numbers as a separate document in
addition to the mechanical bid submitted by the General Contractor.
1.5 The Mechanical Contractor shall be able to bond work he is bidding to perform and shall provide a written
statement from the bonding agency proposed to be used for this project as a separate document in addition
to the mechanical bid submitted by the General Contractor. The bonding agency shall be one having a
Best's insurance rating of A or A+. (Verify bonding with General Contractor)
1.6 Regulations, Permits, Fees, Charges, Inspections: (Verify with General Contractor)
A. Regulations: Comply with all applicable codes, rules and regulations. All materials and work must
comply with local construction, mechanical, plumbing, electrical and fire codes. As a minimum,
comply with the following: 1991 IMC, IPC, NEC, UFC, NFPA codes and all City and State codes.
B. Fees and Permits: Pay all connection, installation, use, development, etc., fees and/or charges.
Obtain and pay for all required permits and licenses. Refer to Division 1.
C. Inspections: All work must be inspected and approved by local authorities. Prior to final approval,
furnish the Architect with certificates of inspections and approvals by the local authorities in
accordance with Division 1.
1.7 Drawings and Specifications:
A. Refer to Division 1 for information on submittals and shop drawings.
B. If a conflict exists between the drawings and specifications, promptly notify the Architect.
1.8 Record Drawings: Provide record drawings for all work under sections in Division 23. See Division 1 for
detailed requirements covering preparation of record drawings.
1.9 Work and Materials: Unless otherwise specified, all materials must be new and of the quality specified. The
workmanship shall be of a quality that is acceptable to the Architect and is equal to the standards of the
trades. Contractor must staff the project with sufficient skilled workmen, including a fully qualified
construction Superintendent, to complete the work in the time allotted. The Superintendent must be qualified
to supervise all of the work in his work category.

1.10 Approvals of Materials and Equipment: Refer to Division 1 for description of material and equipment for prior
approvals and substitutions.
1.11 Maintenance Manual:
A. Prior to completion of the project, compile a complete equipment and maintenance manual for all
equipment supplied under sections of Division 23, as described in Division 1.
B. Manuals shall be bound in a three-ring binder. A preliminary submittal of the manual shall be made
to the Architect 90 days after receiving approved submittals. Final submittal of the manual shall be
made four weeks prior to substantial completion of the project.
1.12 Shop Drawings:
A. Engineer's Review: The Engineer shall review and take appropriate action on shop drawings,
product data, samples and other submittals required by the contract documents. Such review shall
be only for general conformance with the design concept and general compliance with the
information given in the contract documents. It shall not include review of quantities, dimensions,
weights or gauges, fabrication processes, construction methods, coordination with the work of other
trades or construction safety precautions, all of which are the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
The Engineer's review shall be conducted with reasonable promptness consistent with sound
professional practice. Review of a specific item shall not indicate acceptance of an assembly of
which the item is a component. The Engineer shall not be required to review and shall not be
responsible for any deviations from the contract documents not clearly noted by the Contractor, nor
shall the Engineer be required to review partial submissions or those for which submissions for
correlated items have not been received.
B. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 and all data for all equipment provided under
Division 23 within 30 days after award of contract. Index all submittals and reference to these
specifications. Submit all shop drawings in a single batch at one time. Submit shop drawings for all
equipment provided under Division 23, including the following:
1. Intake/exhaust louvers.
2. Insulation materials and finishes for all types of piping and ductwork.
3. Ductwork, dampers, air distribution accessories, supports, grilles, registers, diffusers,

louvers.
4. Heating equipment.
5. Cooling equipment.
6. Fans, including characteristic curves.
7. Temperature control equipment.
8. Balance contractor, licensed.
9. Access doors.
10. Access panels.
11. All other equipment as shown, indicated, specified, required and as directed by Architect.

1.13 Equipment Purchases: Arrange for purchase and delivery of all materials and equipment within 15 days
after approval of submittals.
1.14 Cooperative Work:
A. Correct without charge any work requiring alteration due to lack of proper supervision or failure to
make proper provision in time. Correct without charge any damage to adjacent work caused by the
alteration. See Division 1 for additional requirements.
B. Cooperative Work Includes:
1. General supervision and responsibility for proper location, rough-in and size of work
related to Division 23 but provided under other divisions of these specifications.
2. Installation of sleeves, inserts and anchors bolts for work under sections in Division 23.
3. Electrical work as specified herein. Refer to Division 26 for requirements.
1.15 Substitutions:
A. Where Manufacturer’s names appear, other Manufacturers may be substituted upon obtaining
written approval of Architect at least 10 days prior to opening of bids. The contractor will be
required to complete and sign a “Proposed Substitution Request Form” that will be reviewed by
the Architect, Engineer, and Owner. The submission of the “Proposed Substitution Request
Form” shall be at least 10 days prior to opening of bids.
B. Any prior approval of alternate equipment does not automatically exempt the supplier from meeting
the intent of these specifications. Failure to comply with the operational and functional intent of
these specifications may result in the total removal of the alternate system at the expense of the
contractor.
1.16 Guarantee: Guarantee all material, equipment, and workmanship for all sections under Division 23 in writing
to be free from defects of material and workmanship for one year from date of final acceptance as outlined in
Division 1. Replace without charge any material or equipment proving defective during this period. The
guarantee shall include performance of the equipment under all conditions of load, installing any additional
items of control and/or protective devices as required and the replacing of any refrigerant lost.
1.17 Mechanical Wiring:
A. Provide all temperature control wiring, all interlock wiring, and equipment control wiring for the
equipment that is to be provided under this Division unless specifically shown on electrical
drawings.
B. All wiring shall be not less than No. 14 insulated, color coded wire in electrical metallic tubing.
Installation shall comply with Division 26.
C. The following schedule is intended to summarize the division of work material responsibilities
between the Mechanical Contractor and the Electrical Contractor.
Furn. Set Power Control
Item By By Wiring Wiring
Equipment motors MC MC EC --

Motor starters, contactors
and overload heaters MC* EC EC MC
Fused and unfused disconnect
switches EC EC EC --
Control relays and
transformers MC MC EC MC
Thermostats, time switches** MC MC EC MC
Smoke detectors MC MC EC CC
Motor and solenoid valves,
damper motors, switches MC MC -- MC
Refrigeration equipment controls MC MC EC MC
MC = Mechanical Contractor
EC = Electrical Contractor
CC = Controls Contractor
** Motor-drive units which are controlled from line voltage automatic controls such as line voltage thermostats, float
switches or time switches which conduct full load current of the motor shall be wired for both power and control circuit
under the electrical contract. However, if the control device does not conduct full load current, then the responsibility
shall be that set forth in the above schedule. (Example: A 208 volt, 3-phase, 3-wire motor requires 120 volt control.)
Electrical Contractor shall furnish a 120 volt circuit for control and 208 volt circuit for power and wire the power circuit.
Mechanical Contractor shall wire the control circuit.
D. Under this section provide all shop drawings and wiring diagrams complete with all connection
details.Wiring diagrams must be free from confusing optional methods that do not apply. Wiring
diagrams must be complete with all necessary information and must correctly indicate the
conditions of this specific job.
E. Under this section be responsible for the checking and testing of all controls and interlocks for a
complete and satisfactory operating system.
F. Before ordering motors, equipment, etc., verify the available voltage and phase with the electrical
trades.
1.18 Electrical Work:
A. Electrical wiring, including power wiring and control wiring (except as otherwise specified under
Automatic Temperature Controls), all raceways, wiring, outlet and junction boxes, and labor for
installation of the wiring and equipment shall be included in Electrical Division 26 of the specifi-
cations.
B. Under the Automatic Temperature Control section of these specifications, furnish and install all
wiring, conduit, electric automatic temperature control devices, thermostats, relays, automatic

control switches and pilot lights. See the Automatic Temperature Control Section, for additional
detailed information.
C. All loose starters and control devices for equipment furnished under Division 23 (except as
otherwise specified under Automatic Temperature Control Section) are to be furnished under that
particular section of Division 23 and installed under the electrical division.
D. Contractor shall provide all shop drawings and wiring diagrams complete with all connection details.
Wiring diagrams must be free from confusing optional methods that do not apply. Wiring diagrams
must be complete with all necessary information and must correctly indicate the conditions of this
specific job.
E. Contractor shall be responsible for the checking and testing of all controls and the interlocks for a
complete and satisfactory operating system.
F. Before ordering any motors and equipment. Verify the available voltage and phase for all motors
with the Electrical Contractor.
G. Submit a complete list of all motors prior to final closeout of job indicating the locations,
horsepower, voltage, phase and amperage draw of each motor.
H. All field wiring and equipment must conform to the applicable sections of the Electrical
specifications, Division 26.
1.19 Welding Codes and Standards: All welding and other criteria covered by this specification shall be in
accordance with the following code:
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
Section IX ANSI Code for Power Piping: B31.1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Machinery Drives:
A. Use V-belts designed for 150% of capacity for all belt drives.For multiple belt drives, use matched
sets, so marked at the factory.
B. On drives with not more than two belts, provide adjustable pitch motor sheaves with the midpoint of
the adjustment range equal to that required to achieve the specified fan capacity.
C. On motors with drives with more than two belts, furnish nonadjustable sheaves, providing the
specified fan capacity.
2.2 Machinery Accessories:
A. Lubricating Devices: Provide all oil level gauges, oil pressure gauges, grease cups, grease gun
fittings, as required by the equipment. Extend all lubricating fittings to readily accessible locations.
B. Guards: Provide totally-enclosed OSHA type belt guards for all rotating equipment. Design guards
to be readily removable for access to belt drives.
2.3 Equipment Design and Installation:

A. Uniformity: Unless otherwise specified, provide all equipment of same type or classification by the
same manufacturer.
B. Design: Design all equipment in accordance with ASME, AGA, UL and other applicable technical
standards as follows:
Pressures vessels - ASME Code constructed and stamped
Electric appliances - UL labeled
Fans - AMCA rated and stamped
Cooling equipment - ARI certified
Fire dampers, smoke dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers - UL listed
C. Concrete Inserts:
1. The work under this section includes furnishing and installing all concrete inserts required
for all materials and equipment specified herein or in other sections of Division 23.
2. Provide concrete inserts equal to Unistrut Series 3200 with standard, plain, oiled finish.
Provide exposed Unistrut pipe supports with factory finished enamel paint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Verification of Dimensions:
A. Scaled and figured dimensions are approximate only. Before proceeding with work, carefully check
and verify dimensions at site, and be responsible for properly fitting equipment and materials
together and to the structure in spaces provided.
B. Drawings are essentially diagrammatic and many offsets, bends, special fittings and exact locations
are not indicated. Carefully study drawings and premises in order to determine best methods,
exact locations, routes, building obstructions, and install apparatus and equipment in available
locations. Install apparatus and equipment in manner and in locations to avoid obstructions,
preserve headroom, and keep openings and passageways clear.
3.2 Cutting and Patching: Cut work and patch per Division 1 as necessary to properly install the new work. As
the work progresses, coordinate necessary openings, holes, chases, etc., in their correct location. If the
required openings, holes and chases are not in their correct locations, make the necessary corrections at no
cost to the Owner. Avoid excessive cutting and do not cut structural members without the consent of the
Architect. Patching by General Contractor at Mechanical, Plumbing or Fire Protection Contractor's expense.
Include as a part of the work under this contract all structural framing required by penetrations through the
roof and necessary steel to support ducts and pipes between structural steel unless shown on the structural
drawings.
3.3 Closing-in of Unfinished Work: Cover no work until inspected, tested and approved. Where work is covered
before inspection and test, uncover it, and when inspected, tested and approved, restore all work to original
proper condition.
3.4 Accessibility:
A. Install valves, dampers, traps, control devices or other specialties requiring reading, adjustment,
inspection, repairs, removal or replacement conveniently and accessibly throughout the finished

building. Where any of these devices are shown on the contract drawings to be installed above any
inaccessible ceiling, the Mechanical Contractor shall furnish access doors or panels as required.
B. All access doors or panels in walls and ceilings required for access to control devices, traps, valves
and similar devices are to be furnished and installed as part of the work under this section. Provide
type as specified under Division 8.
C. Provide ducts which pierce a fire separation with fire dampers of same fire rating as the separation.
D. Refer to drawings and "Finish Schedule" for type of wall and ceiling in each area and for rated
construction.
E. Coordinate work of various sections to locate valves, traps, and dampers with others to avoid
unnecessary duplication of access doors.
3.5 Roof Flashings: Flash and counterflash all piping, conduits and ductwork penetrating roofing membrane with
flashing per roofing manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to architectural drawings for detailing of duct
and pipe penetrations through roof.
3.6 Equipment Rough-in:
A. Rough in all equipment and fixtures as designated on the drawings and in the specifications. The
drawings indicate only the approximate location of rough-ins. The exact rough-in locations must be
determined from large-scale certified drawings. The Contractor shall obtain all certified rough-in
information before progressing with any work for rough-in final connections.
B. Be responsible for providing all outlets and services of proper size at the required locations.
C. Minor changes in the contract drawings shall be anticipated and provided for under this division of
the specifications.
D. Rough-in only (unless otherwise designated on the drawings) shall include the following:
1. Mechanical: Provide all services as indicated and required, including all ductwork, piping
and valves. Cap all ductwork stub-outs in a manner suitable for future extension.
3.7 Owner-Furnished and Other Equipment:
A. Rough-in only for all Owner-furnished equipment (see Division 1) and all equipment furnished under
other sections of the specifications, except as otherwise specified and/or noted on the drawings.
B. Rough-in requirements shall be as outlined in the preceding paragraph titled "Equipment Rough-In."
3.8 Equipment Final Connections:
A. Provide all piping and duct final connections for all equipment under Division 23 as required herein
specified and indicated on the drawings.
B. Air Conditioning, Heating, and Ventilating: Provide final connections complete with necessary
valves, drains, unions, flanges and duct connections for equipment furnished and installed under
other sections of the specifications, except as otherwise designated. Included under the HVAC
sections of the specifications are the final connections to the following:
1. Condensate piping from air conditioning equipment.

2. Supply, return, relief, outside air and exhaust duct connections for all equipment including
exhaust fans.
3. Piping connections for all equipment.
3.9 Machinery Drives: After tests have been performed on the air conditioning and air handling systems, make
without cost not more than two changes in the size of the nonadjustable sheaves to obtain the required air
quantities.
3.10 Machinery Accessories:
A. Application: Do not install any equipment in an application not recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Installation: Align, level and adjust all equipment for proper operation. Install so connecting and
disconnecting of piping and accessories can readily be done and so all parts are readily accessible
for inspection, service and repair. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.11 Pipe and Equipment Supports:
A. Roof Mounted Equipment (Steel Supported): Provide curbs and flashings for metal support
structures as shown in the latest SMACNA manual for roof supports.
3.12 Cleanup:
A. In addition to cleanup specified under Division 1, thoroughly clean all parts of the equipment.
Where exposed parts are to be painted, thoroughly clean off any splattered construction materials
and remove all oil and grease spots. Wipe the surface carefully and scrape out all cracks and
corners.
B. Thoroughly flush and clean out all water circulating systems. Remove, clean and replace all
strainer elements.
C. During the progress of the work, keep the premises clean and free of debris.
3.13 Painting:
A. Except as otherwise specified or indicated in the architectural drawings and/or specifications, paint
all exposed unfinished metal with one coat of rust-inhibiting primer. (Galvanized ductwork and
factory painted equipment shall be considered as having primed surface.)
B. Finished painting is specified under Division 9.
3.14 Objectionable Noise and Vibration: Construct and brace the metal partitions, ducts and sheet metal
housings to prevent vibration or rattling when systems are in operation. Install connections to equipment so
noise and vibration will not reach the conditioned area through ducts, piping, conduit, sheet metal work, or
the building structure. Provide power-driven equipment suspended from the structure with spring type
isolation.
3.15 Welding:
A. Procedures:
1. All procedures and welders must be qualified in accordance with the requirements of
Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and ANSI code for power piping

B31.1. Procedure qualification test records and acceptance shall be submitted with the
welding procedure prior to the start of fabrication.
2. Architect's inspector or authorized representative will review performance qualification

records of individual welders.
B. Welding Processes: The following welding processes are permitted, provided that the procedure is
qualified in accordance with Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
1. Manual shielded metal-arc.
2. Gas tungsten-arc.
3. Other welding processes may be used providing they are qualified in accordance with
Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Restrictions: Weld bevel preparations shall be provided on all welding fittings and shall be
machined or ground to remove all discoloration if flame or arc cut.
D. Welding Filler Material:
1. A filler material control procedure shall be submitted to Owner for review and acceptance
prior to performing any welding.
2. All shielded metal-arc welding shall be performed using low-hydrogen type electrodes
such as E 7018.
E. Preheat and Interpass Temperature:
1. Preheat for pressure components shall be as specified in Table 132 of ANSI B.1.
2. Preheat and interpass temperature shall be determined by temperature indicating crayons,

contact pyrometers or other equally suitable means.
F. Postweld Heat Treatment: Postweld heat treatment for pressure components shall be as specified
in Table 131 of ANSI B31.1.

SECTION 23 0593 - AIR SYSTEM BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 The Contractor shall include in his bid the services of a certified independent air balance and testing agency.
The testing agency shall be one which specializes in the balancing and testing of heating, ventilating and air
conditioning systems, to balance, adjust and test air-moving equipment and air distributing or exhausting
systems as herein specified. All work shall be done under direct supervision of a qualified heating and ventilating
certified technician employed by the agency.
1.2 Perform all of the air system balancing specified in this section as part of the contract to be paid for by the
Mechanical Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials: All instruments used by this agency shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working
order. If requested, conduct the tests in the presence of the Architect and/or the Mechanical Engineer
responsible for the project and/or his representative. Do not begin air balance and testing until system has been
completed and is in full working order. Put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment
into full operation and continue the operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing. Submit
within 15 days after receipt of the contract, 7 copies of submittal data for the testing and balancing of the air
conditioning, heating and ventilating systems. The air balance agency shall provide proof of having successfully
completed at least five projects of similar size and scope and shall be a certified member of Associated Air
Balance Council or NEBB. Submit the test and balance contract to the Architect for approval within 90 days after
the Air Conditioning Contractor has received his contract to proceed with the air conditioning installation to allow
the air balance agency to schedule this work in cooperation with other trades involved and comply with the
completion date.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Air Balancing: Upon completion of the air conditioning system, the air balance agency shall perform the following
test, compile the test data, and submit five (5) copies of the complete test data to the Contractor for forwarding
to the Owner, Architect and Engineer for review and approval.
3.2 Testing Procedure: The air balance agency shall perform the following tests, and balance system in accordance
with the following requirements:
A. Test and adjust blower RPM to design requirements to within 10% of design.
B. Test and record motor full load amperes.
C. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts and obtain design CFM at fans when deemed necessary
by Engineer.
D. Test and record system static pressure, suction and discharge.
E. Test and adjust system for design CFM outside air.
F. Test and adjust system for design CFM recirculated air.
G. Test and record entering air temperatures (DB heating and cooling).
H. Test and record entering air temperatures (WB cooling).
I. Test and record leaving air temperatures (DB heating and cooling).
SPRINGVILLE CITY AIR SYSTEM BALANCING

J. Test and record leaving air temperatures (WB cooling).
K. Adjust all main supply and return air ducts to proper design CFM.
L. Adjust all zones to proper design CFM supply and return.
M. Test and adjust each ceiling diffuser, grille and register to within 10% of design requirements.
N. Each grille, diffuser and register shall be identified as to location and area on a set of plans included
with report.
O. Identify and list size, type and manufacture of diffusers, grilles, registers and all tested equipment.Use
manufacturer's ratings on all equipment to make required calculations.
P. Reading and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers shall include required velocity, required CFM, and
test resultant CFM after adjustments.
Q. In cooperation with the control manufacturer's representative, setting adjustments of automatically

operated dampers to operate as specified, indicated and/or noted.
R. Adjust all diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts in all areas.
S. As part of the work of this contract, the Air Conditioning Contractor shall make any changes in the
pulleys, belts and dampers or the addition of dampers required for corrected balance as recommended
by air balance agency, at no additional cost to Owner. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary labor
to assist the testing agency to complete its work.
T. Test and balance agency shall include an extended warranty (in addition to the one year guarantee
period) of 90 days after completion or resetting of any outlet, supply air fan or exhaust fans as listed
in test report. The agency shall provide technicians to assist the Engineer in making any tests he may
require during this period of time.
SPRINGVILLE CITY AIR SYSTEM BALANCING

SECTION 23 0594 - TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 This section describes the labor, materials and services required for the testing of all systems.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 Test Procedures
A. Make tests before the rough work is covered. The system may be tested in parts if approved.
B. When the tests show the work in any way defective, remove defective material or equipment from the
premises and retest.
C. Make piping tests on all piping as required by code.
D. Coil Condensate Drain Piping: Fill to highest point of system for (4) hours.
2.2 Testing out
A. Check out and test operate all equipment installed under heating, ventilating and air conditioning
sections of these specifications, including a check of all work performed under the Electrical and
Mechanical divisions in conjunction with the equipment installed under all sections of this division.
1. Check electrical work to see that the power is properly supplied to all electrical motors and
that all electric controls are properly hooked up in the control circuits. Furnish a list of the
voltage and current readings taken under load of all motors (except fan coil units).
2. Check all work and see that all controls are in good working order and properly adjusted.
After the equipment has been properly adjusted, start up and run all equipment enough to
determine that the controls and equipment are all operating properly and that the installation
is complete. During the test runs, balance the water quantities and water flow as required in
the piping circuits after the cooling and ventilation systems are connected to provide the
proper water quantities to all equipment. Balancing shall be accomplished as described under
Air Systems Balancing, Section 15020.
3. When the test or observations show that the work is in any way defective or at a variance with
the specification requirements, immediately make all changes necessary to correct the work
and remedy the defects to the satisfaction of the Architect. Remove any defective material
or equipment from the premises. In the event the Contractor does not remedy all defects and
make all changes demanded by the Architect within a reasonable time, the right is reserved
to have the defects remedied or changes made and to charge the cost of the work against the
account of the Contractor.
4. Furnish all appliances, equipment and labor for the tests and meet all expenses of the tests.
2.3 Final Tests
A. Before acceptance and at a time designated, make a complete test to demonstrate that the air
quantities are balanced for even temperatures throughout, that all controls are adjusted and that, in
general, the system is placed into proper operation. Furnish a skilled operating engineer for a period
of at least eight hours, at time or times designated by the Owner, to instruct the Owner's representative
in the operation and maintenance of the equipment.


SECTION 23 0933 - AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Scope
A. The work included in this section shall consist of all labor, transportation, materials and equipment
necessary for the installation of a complete system of automatic temperature control for this project in
accordance with the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 General
A. The work in general shall consist of, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. 7 day, 24 hour programmable thermostat with set back and auto changeover.
2. Capable of controlling tow stages of gas heating and two stages of DX cooling.
3. Zoning Systems as indicated.
4. Evaporative Cooler Controls with automatic shut-off as indicated on the Mechanical Plans.
5. Unit and Radiant Tube Heater Thermostats.
1.3 Summary
A. Furnish and install the automatic control system as described diagrammatically on the drawings. The
system shall be completely operational in all respects. The system shall perform all functions as shown
on the control diagrams. Power wiring required by the automatic temperature control system shall be
furnished by the Electrical Contractor. Control conduit required by the automatic control system shall
be furnished by the Electrical Contractor. All required wiring diagrams and schematics shall be
furnished to the Electrical Contractor by the Automatic Temperature Control Contractor. All control
wiring is by this Contractor.
B. Mechanical Contractor shall give alternate pricing for providing and installing tamper resistant
thermostat covers in common areas. Final direction will be given by owner’s representative in written
form.
C. Mechanical Contractor shall provide complete Zoning System as indicated on Mechanical Plans.
Provide and install all required components, zone control panels, transformers, bypass controllers, etc.
for a complete and properly functioning system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Miscellaneous Control Devices
A. Wall Mounted Wall Thermostats: Mount all room thermostats where shown on the plans or as
approved by the Architect and/or Engineer. .
B. Damper Motors: On all damper motors provide flexible, nonmetallic diaphragm operators with sufficient
power to position the dampers accurately in response to the controller. Damper motors on modulating
outside air shall have a pilot positioner.
C. Automatic Dampers: Parallel or opposed blade control dampers as required, equal to Johnson
Proportion/Aire low leakage dampers; 13 gauge galvanized steel formed damper frames for extra
strength with mounting holes for flange and enclosed duct mountings. Dampers over 48" wide shall
be standard modules with interconnecting hardware. Blade bearings of oil-impregnated sintered bronze
with 1/2" zinc-plated steel shafts. All blade linkage hardware or corrosion-resistant finish and readily
accessible for maintenance after installation. Provide synthetic elastomer seals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Work Included in Other Sections of the Specifications
A. All electical wiring (by ETC).
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS

23 0933 - 1
B. Mounting of dampers in ductwork, including the furnishing of required blank-off plates to reconcile
modular damper sizes to duct sizes (by MTC).
Abbreviations:
ATC = Automatic Temperature Controls Trades Contractor
MTC = Mechanical Trades Contractor
ETC = Electrical Trades Contractor
3.2 Temperature Control Raceways - Division 16
A. All temperature control raceways will be provided and installed by Division 16 Contractor. Raceway
system shall be complete and include but not be limited to all required conduit, boxes, connectors etc.
Division 16 Contractor shall coordinate all required locations for all systems.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS

23 0933 - 2
SECTION 23 1000 - FUEL GAS SYSTEM (NATURAL GAS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Use Schedule 40 black steel pipe with extra-heavy, black malleable iron screwed fitting for all gas lines (low
pressure less than 1 pound) for piping 1-1/2" and smaller. For gas lines 2" and larger, use Schedule 40, black
steel pipe with butt welding. Use flanges on piping 2" and larger and unions on piping 1-1/2" and smaller. For
all pipe below grade, exterior of the building, use polyethylene pipe rated for gas distribution.
1.2 Regulations: All materials, equipment and installation must comply with the latest publication of all applicable
codes, rules and regulations, local gas utility company, all of which must be considered a part of these specifi-
cations, including the requirements of the city and state.
International Building Code
International Plumbing Code
National Fire Protection Association Standards
National Electrical Code
Utah State Department of Health
International Mechanical Code
National Fire Protection Association
DOT CFR-49, 190, 191, 192.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Shall meet the standards set forth in IFGC Section 403)
(All gas valves, flanges and fittings shall be marked for identification.)
2.1 Steel Pipe: Schedule 40 black steel conforming to ASTM A53, Grade A or B, seamless welded pipe.
2.2 Fittings:
A. Steel Pipe 1-1/2" and Smaller: Extra-heavy black malleable iron conforming to USAS B16.3, 150 psi
SWP.
B. Steel Pipe 2" and Larger: Black steel seamless welding fittings conforming to USAS B16.9 and ANSI
B16.25, 150 psi SWP.
C. Steel Unions: Black malleable iron, screwed connections, ground iron-to-bronze seat, conforming to
ASTM A47, 250 psi SWP.
D. Steel Flanges: Black forged steel with weld neck flanges conforming to USAS B16.5, 150 psi, SWP.
2.3 Valves:
A. Piping 1-1/2" and Smaller: Resun R-1430 or Rockwell-Nordstrom #142 lubricated plug valve with #555
lubricant for natural gas service with UL or AGA rating.
B. Piping 2" and Larger: Resun R-1431 or Rockwell-Nordstrom #143 lubricated plug valve with #555
lubricant for natural gas service with UL or AGA rating.
C. At Equipment Connection: Milwaukee BB2-100 Butterball, bronze body, threaded ends, 1/2" through
2".
2.4 Gas Service Pressure Regulators: Fisher series S100 or S200 diaphragm actuated pressure regulator suitable
for natural gas service. Orifice to be sized to regulate cubic feet per hour at inlet and outlet pressures as
scheduled on the drawings or as required by system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Install all piping in the building aboveground. Install no gas piping in or under concrete floors or in masonry
walls. Where gas lines are indicated to be sleeved below walks and rise on inside of building, install in
accordance with standard city gas sleeve details.
SPRINGVILLE CITY FUEL GAS SYSTEM (NATURAL GAS)

3.2 Install tracer wire parallel to all plastic pipe within 6" of pipe and terminate aboveground at ends. All tracers on
a single system shall be connected at their points of intersection.
3.3 Supervise the proper installation of pressure regulator by the utility contractor. (New Clinic)
3.4 Extend gas lines from meter and/or pressure regulators to all equipment and connections requiring gas.
Underground piping shall be installed with a minimum of 24" cover with 6" of shading material all around, not to
exceed #4 sieve (sand). Provide a minimum of 8" clearance from all underground structures. Verify burial depth
with local utility company and Corporation Commission.
3.5 Install gas pipe with suitable dirt legs at equipment connections.
3.6 Install accessible valve and union at each equipment connection.
3.7 Install valve and union with capped gas at all equipment stub-outs.
3.8 Coordinate location of valved outlets for mechanical equipment with Mechanical Contractor.
3.9 Install chrome-plated escutcheon plates at all wall penetrations exposed to view.
3.10 Plug each gas outlet, including valves, with threaded plug or cap immediately after installation and retain until
installation is complete.
3.11 Flash all gas piping through roof.
3.12 Install shutoff valve outside at entry into each building.
3.13 Aboveground pipe shall be electrically bonded and grounded as required by NFPA 54, page 3.14.
3.14 Coordinate piping with mechanical ductwork, fire sprinkler pipes, conduits, etc.
3.15 All system regulators shall be flow and lockup tested before light-up per CFR 192.197.
A. Pressure Test:
1. For systems at 2 psig or less, requirements are 60 psig for underground polyethylene or PVC
pipe up to the regulator and system pipe in building. For ease of testing and at the option of
Contractor, by spooling through where the regulator is to be installed, the entire system can
be pressure tested in one continuous test at 60 psig up to the shutoff valves with the equip-
ment disconnected and valve plugged and capped. Hold for four (4) hours with no pressure
drop.
2. Upon completion of the installation and assuring that the system will pass the pressure test
and meet all the requirements of DOT CFR-49.192, call the for final inspection and pressure
test before covering work. Contractor shall furnish Architect with certificates of inspection and
approvals by local gas company.
3.16 Submit maintenance data and parts lists for system materials and products. Include this data, product data,
shop drawings, and record drawings in maintenance manual.
3.17 Welding procedure shall be by a qualified welder per CFR 192.225. Contractor shall furnish Architect with
welder's qualifications and no welding shall be done until authorized. Welds shall be inspected with records
maintained and furnished to Architect.
SPRINGVILLE CITY FUEL GAS SYSTEM (NATURAL GAS)

SECTION 23 3114 - SHEET METAL DUCTWORK (LOW PRESSURE)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Scope: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for the installation of all low pressure
sheet metal duct systems as herein described and as indicated on the drawings. Each system shall be complete
with all accessories, etc., as described herein and in other sections of these specifications.
1.2 Galvanized Sheet Metal: For all ductwork except as otherwise specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Galvanized Ductwork: Galvanized, prime-grade, lock-forming, quality steel (LFQ) having galvanized coating of
1-1/4 ounces total for both sides of 1 square foot of a sheet. Cross-break all sides of ducts.
2.2 Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock groove, hammered flat. Tape all transverse joints of supply, return and
exhaust ducts with open weave fiberglass, canvas and Arabol, or reinforced Hardcast.
2.3 Turning Vanes:
A. Sheet Metal Vanes: Factory fabricated, single thickness, galvanized sheet metal with airfoil contour.
Shop fabricated duct turns must be submitted for approval prior to processing any work on project.
B. Acoustical Turning Vanes: Single thickness galvanized sheet metal or aluminum, nonreflective airfoil
contour type vane with perforated surfaces, a core of sound absorbent material, and nailing channels
for attachment to ducts.
2.4 Flexible Duct: Flexible, preinsulated, vinyl coated fiberglass with corrosion-resistant, steel spiral reinforcing,
designed for low velocity application. All duct, insulation and adhesives shall be fire and smoke resistant in
conformance with NFPA 90A and UL 181 for Class 1 duct. Duct shall be Thermaflex Type MK-D as
manufactured by Flexible Tubing Co. or approved.
2.5 Flexible Connections: 24-ounce glass fabric that is flameproof, airtight, ozone resistant, and a minimum of 3"
wide with 3" of metal on each side of 3" of fabric using a grip lock seam, Duro-Dyne "Durolon" or approved equal.
2.6 Manual Dampers: Minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel, maximum of 8" blade, opposed blade type, with
manual quadrant.
2.7 Manual Quadrants: On all low pressure dampers Ventlock #644 in insulated ducts and #641 in uninsulated
ducts, or approved equal.
2.8 Access Doors:
A. Uninsulated Ducts: Construct access doors of galvanized sheet metal gauges heavier than duct with
rolled edges, hinges, and Ventfabrics, Inc. "Ventlock" #260 latch. Make airtight with felt strips or
neoprene gasketing and provide 1" x 1" x 1/8" galvanized iron frame for installation in ductwork.
B. Insulated Ducts: Double thickness galvanized sheet metal of same gauge as duct (minimum 20 gauge)
with minimum of 1" thick, 2-pound density fiberglass or approved equal insulation in between sheet
metal, rolled edges, hinges and Ventfabrics, Inc. "Ventlock" #260 latch. Make airtight with felt strips
or neoprene gasketing, and provide 1" x 1" x 1/8" galvanized angle iron frame for installation in
ductwork.
2.9 Access Panels and Access Openings in Ductwork: Galvanized, sheet steel, 2 gauges heavier than the duct with
rolled edges, felt strips or neoprene gasketing and attached to duct with sheet metal screws a maximum of 6"
on center.
2.10 Fire Dampers: Furnish and install access panels as hereinbefore described to meet the requirements of the
code. All fire dampers must be constructed in accordance with Underwriters' Laboratories and city code
requirements. Dampers shall be of the type with the open damper out of the airstream for 90% free area.
2.11 Duct Supports:
A. Ducts 47" and Smaller: 14 gauge steel hanger straps 1" wide riveted to seams of ducts, maximum of
6'-0" on center. Alternate support for horizontal ducts must be by (2) 1/4" bolts or 2 or more #14 sheet
metal screws.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SHEET METAL DUCTWORK (LOW PRESSURE)

ELECTRIC OPERATIONS CENTER 23 3114 -1
B. Ducts over 48" in Width: Support from trapeze hanger consisting of vertical steel rods and angle iron
frames.
2.12 Duct Construction: All duct construction must conform to local code or to the SMACNA Duct Construction
Standards Manual, whichever is more stringent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Fabrication: Fabricate all ductwork and install using skilled mechanics in strict conformance with the SMACNA
Manual. Provide supplemental stiffening as required to prevent drumming and provide a structurally sound
assembly.
3.2 Construction: Construct all fittings, elbows, and transitions to provide a minimum of noise and resistance.
Where space permits, use elbows with a minimum radius of 1-1/2 times the width (or depth). Where space con-
ditions necessitate abrupt changes in direction (or as otherwise indicated), use square elbows with double radius
turning vanes. Transitions increasing in the direction of airflow shall not change greater than 1" in 7" and transi-
tions decreasing in the direction of airflow shall not change greater than 1" in 5".
A. Ductmate and Ward duct connectors are allowed when fabricated and installed in strict compliance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 Turning Vanes: Provide single thickness turning vanes in all 90° square elbows and elsewhere as indicated.
Use acoustical turning vanes where indicated.
3.4 Taping: Tape all cross-joints in concealed or insulated sheet metal ductwork with Arabol and canvas or
reinforced Hardcast.
3.5 Weatherproofing: Make all ductwork exposed to weather weathertight, seal all joints with a minimum of 2 coats
of asphalt-based roofing compound painted with aluminum paint.
3.6 Duct Sizes: Indicated sizes are to the inside of acoustical linings. Increase the size of all sheet metal ducts as
required to accommodate acoustical lining.
3.7 Duct Openings: Construct duct openings at grilles or registers so that the plaster will not crack when the
registers are attached.
3.8 Painting: Paint the inside of all supply, return and exhaust ducts and dampers one coat of dead black paint
whenever visible through the openings. Where the duct insulation is visible through the grilles, registers, or
diffusers, the insulation must have a black finish.
3.9 Flexible Connections: Provide flexible connections at the intake and discharge of all air handling and air
conditioning units and elsewhere as indicated.
3.10 Manual Dampers: Provide manual dampers in each supply duct to outlet/inlet and elsewhere as indicated.
Provide locking quadrants with memory stop.
3.11 Measurements: Before fabrication, check all ductwork with the building construction for dimensions, locations,
clearances, etc. Make up duct with any necessary variations to conform to the details of the construction of the
building, to suit the space available, and to fit the equipment furnished. The entire duct system must be
substantially constructed, rigidly erected and free of any duct vibration or noises.
3.12 Flashing: Flash all ducts passing through the roof, floor or through exterior walls.
3.13 Testing and Balancing: See Testing and Air Systems Balancing.
3.14 Air Leakage: The ductwork shall be sealed and tested. Maximum allowable leakage shall be 5% of scheduled
airflow in duct.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SHEET METAL DUCTWORK (LOW PRESSURE)

ELECTRIC OPERATIONS CENTER 23 3114 -2
SECTION 23 3300 - DUCT SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Scope: Grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be furnished and installed where shown. They shall be of the size
and model indicated. Carnes, J&J, Krueger, Metal*Aire, Nailor, Price, Titus, Tuttle & Bailey.
A. Supply Grilles: Design Standard shall be Titus TDC. (flange as appropriate for ceiling type)
B. Return Grilles: Design Standard shall be Titus 355RS. (shall be rated for the indicated air flow values)
1.2 Dampers and Gasketing: Provide all diffusers and all supply, exhaust and return registers with dampers painted
flat black and neoprene gasketing.
1.3 Installation: All grilles, registers and diffusers shall be set flush and true to the wall or ceilings to prevent air
leakage around the edges.
1.4 Extractors: Provide extractors behind all grilles and registers with right angle takeoffs. Provide plaster frames
for outlets in plaster or gypsum board.
1.5 Finish: All units must be factory finished. Provide finish and color as indicated on the drawings or as otherwise
directed by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Louvers
A. Scope:The Mechanical Contractor is to furnish and install all fresh air intake louvers, exhaust air, relief
air and make-up louvers as indicated on the drawings and herein specified.
2.2 Fire Dampers (as needed)
A. Construct all fire dampers, smoke dampers, and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance
with code requirements. Dampers shall be low leakage rated, welded construction, sized with open
damper out of airstream for a minimum of 90% free area. Install in all fire-rated and smoke separations
as shown on the plans. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's and UL requirements.
SPRINGVILLE CITY DUCT SPECIALTIES

SECTION 23 2301 - DUCT, PIPE & EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for the installation of all insulation as herein
described and as indicated on the drawings. The insulation shall be applied by Insulation Contractor in strict
accordance with the best practices of the trade. All insulation material, coverings, adhesives, vapor barriers,
and tapes shall have a flame spread classification not to exceed 25 and a smoke development not to exceed
50 in accordance with NFPA 90A.
1.2 ACOUSTICAL DUCT INSULATION
A. Line all exhaust ducts with minimum 1/2" thick insulation. Line all supply and return air ducts with a
minimum of 1" thick insulation. Line all sheet metal outside air, mixed air, and return air plenums with
1" thick insulation. Dimensions shown are the clear inside dimensions of the duct; sheet metal shall
be increased to accommodate the liner. Where liner is used on inside of ducts the exterior insulation
may be deleted.
1.3 THERMAL DUCT INSULATION - CONCEALED DUCTS & PLENUMS
A. Insulate (wrap) all concealed supply and return air ducts as specified hereafter. Where insulation inside
duct is used, exterior insulation may be deleted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Not less than 2-pound density duct liner coated to a smooth finish with a NFPA 90A approved vinyl or
neoprene coating suitable for velocities up to 4000 fpm to meet the erosion test method described in
UL Publication No. 181. Sound absorption of 1" thickness shall not be less than 0.43 at 250 CPS.
Minimum K of .28 at 75°F mean temperature.
A. Flexible blanket glass fiber insulation with factory applied, flame retardant, all-service vapor barrier
(ASK) jacket, maximum K of 0.30 at 75°F mean temperature, minimum 1-pound density. Insulation
shall be 2" thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Application: Apply insulation to the tops, bottoms and sides of all ducts and plenums, except the floors
of plenums provided with access doors. Use mechanical clips and adhesive to fasten all insulation.
Metal clips shall be Miracle Surface Anchors, Gemco Anchors adhered with three spot welds or spot
welded pins, not over 12" O.C. Adhesive shall be Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Corp. #38
applied in 4" strips on approximately 10" centers. Cut all insulation squarely and evenly to provide a
smooth insulation surface to all seams and joints and point up to form a smooth surface with cement.
Butt ends of insulation exposed to airflow in supply ducts shall be covered and tapered to duct wall with
4-ounce canvas saturated with Foster's or Arabol lagging adhesive.
A. Application: Insulation shall be applied over surfaces which have been wiped clean and dry. Insulation
shall have 2" tab overlap on both longitudinal and transverse seams. Butt edges of all insulation firmly
SPRINGVILLE CITY DUCT, PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION

together. Coat the underside of the exposed circumferential and longitudinal seams with 3M #37 or
#38 or undiluted Foster's adhesive and firmly press on surface of vapor barrier again, making sure all
seams are tightly butted. Staple all joints with outward clinch staples on 6" centers, 1" back from the
edge. Seal all staples with a vapor barrier tape cemented to the insulation.
B. Application for Larger Ducts: In addition to the above procedures, secure the insulation on ducts 30"
or more in width to the bottom of the duct with 3M ECO104 adhesive in 4" strips, 12" O.C. and with
welded pins on 12" centers. Secure weld pins with washers or clips on each pin applied flush to the
face of the insulation without depressing the surface. Cut off pin as close to the washer as possible
and coat the entire exposed pin to the washer assembly with a vapor barrier adhesive.
SPRINGVILLE CITY DUCT, PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION

SECTION 23 5418 - ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Contractor shall furnish and install a combination DX cooling and gas heating unit with the capacities as shown
on the drawing. Each unit shall be complete with compressor, coils, blowers, condensers, gas burners and
all necessary refrigerant piping, insulation, controls, etc., connecting same. All units shall be supplied with
thermostat to control heating and cooling, blower, selection switch and automatic changeover. Unit shall be
supplied with economizer.
B. Capacity
1. Heating, cooling and air handling capacity shall be as noted on the drawings and be ARI and AGA
certified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Unit Casing
1. Unit casing is to be hot-dipped, heavy-gauge galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with baked
enamel over primer. Casing shall be reinforced with steel channels, cross-bracing and angles as
required to give it structural stability. The entire interior of the cabinet shall be lined with 1" thick, 3-
pound per cubic foot density thermal and acoustical duct liner, coated with black neoprene to prevent
erosion of the material. Cement and clip liner to casing. Casing shall be internally sealed to make it
weatherproof.
B. Condensing Section
1. Condensing section shall consist of hermetic compressor(s) with a five (5) year warranty, supported
on vibration isolators, condensing coil, fans, motors, refrigerant, filter dryer, service valves and controls.
Fan to be propeller type, motor drive and arranged for vertical air discharge. Provide two steps of
control for compressors on all units 10 nominal tons and larger.
C. Evaporator Section
1. Evaporator section shall consist of cooling coil, drain pan, heat exchanger, blower, motor and controls,
Cooling coil shall be direct expansion type constructed with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded
to nonferrous tubing.
D. Heat Exchanger
1. Heat exchanger shall have a five-year warranty, be a welded assembly of formed corrosion-resistant
aluminized or stainless steel sections. Forced or induced draft and two-stage burners shall be
provided. Burners shall have silent ignition and extinction and have stainless steel tops. Flues are to
have condensate drains and vents, to be windproof to insure complete discharge of flue products
regardless of wind velocity or direction.
E. Blower
1. Blower shall be double inlet, forward cured, centrifugal type with wheels and drives statically and
dynamically balanced. Blowers in units 4 tons and larger shall be belt-driven. Units smaller than this
may be belt-driven or direct-driven with multiple speed motors. Filters as specified elsewhere to be
mounted in unit or duct with proper hinged access door provided.
F. Controls
1. The refrigerant system shall be protected by fusible plugs, pressure limiting devices, inherent overload
and overheat protection, built-in anti-slug compressor protection, crankcase heater and controls
necessary to operate cooling system at 50°F ambient temperature. Automatic heating controls shall
be low voltage type, single or two-stage heating-cooling thermostat with automatic changeover,
automatic 100% shutoff safety gas valve with regulator, 2 psi to 7" gas pressure reducing valve,
automatic pilot, pilot gas adjustment valve, manual gas shutoff valve. Gas ignition at burner shall be
SPRINGVILLE CITY ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT

automatic through glow coil ignition of pilot with flame sensing device. A pressure switch shall be
provided to prevent burn-out of glow coil. An airflow or pressure differential switch shall permit gas flow
only upon proven airflow. High limit and air temperature control to limit outlet air temperature shall be
provided. The entire unit design shall be AGA Design Certified for outdoor application. All controls to
be grouped for ease of maintenance and accessibility.
G. Flue
1. The flue shall be located 4 feet minimum from any vertical wall and be 3 feet minimum above the fresh
air inlet. Extensions may be added to the flue to meet these requirements provided the AGA and UL
labels are still applicable and the method of extending the flue is approved prior to equipment being
ordered by the Architect.
H. Filters
1. Farr 30/30, 2" throwaway type filters, sized for maximum of 400 fpm velocity. All filters shall be readily
accessible, mounted as indicated on drawings. Use only standard sizes, 16 x 20, 16 x 25, 20 x 20, 20
x 25, and 24 x 24. Filter access panels shall be with rubber gaskets and a minimum of two thumb turns
or sash locks per door.
SPRINGVILLE CITY ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 0500 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

26 0519 POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING
26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
26 0534 CONDUIT
26 0535 SURFACE RACEWAYS
26 0537 BOXES
26 0553 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION
26 0918 REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHING DEVICES
26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
26 2200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 2416 PANELBOARDS
26 2701 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
26 2717 EQUIPMENT WIRING
26 2726 WIRING DEVICES
26 2818 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
26 2913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
27 1005 STRUCTURED CABLING
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 1300 ACCESS CONTROL

28 2300 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
28 3100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
SPRINGVILLE CITY Table of Contents

SECTION 260500 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary for completion of work of this Division as described
in Contract Documents.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions and Division 01 apply to this Section

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. As-Built Drawings
1. Provide complete set with all changes made to original drawings. Provide CADD files as well as
mylar prints. Hand-drawn changes are not acceptable.
B. Product Data
1. Submit for the following:
a. Wiring devices
b. Disconnects
c. Panelboards
d. Motor Starters
e. Lighting fixtures, poles, and associated control equipment
f. Fire alarm & detection equipment
g. Voice & data cabling & termination equipment
h. Access control system equipment
i. Low-voltage transformers
2. Provide the following information for each item of equipment:
a. Catalog sheets
b. Assembly details of dimension drawings
c. Installation instructions
d. Manufacturer's name and catalog number
e. Name of local supplier
f. Name of electrical contractor
C. Operation & Maintenance Manual
1. Provide two copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
a. Binder - Loose-leaf type with hard cover. Title on outside of front cover and on spine.
b. Title Page - List the following information
1) Name of Project
2) Date Project Completed
3) Name and Address of Architect, Electrical Engineer, General Contractor, Electrical
Contractor, and Suppliers.
c. Table of Contents -
1) List equipment in order that it appears in Binder.
d. Dividers -
1) Provide one divider with tab for each type of equipment listed in Table of Contents.
Properly label tabs.
e. Equipment Information - Provide following information for each item of equipment
1) Catalog Sheets.
2) Assembly details or dimension drawings.
3) Installation, operating, and maintenance instructions.
4) manufacturer's name and catalog number
5) Name of local supplier.
f. Furnish such information for following equipment and arrange as listed -
1) Disconnect switches.
2) Wiring devices.
3) Lighting fixtures.
SPRINGVILLE CITY GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

4) Panelboards
5) Safety switches
6) Fire alarm and detection system
7) Communications systems equipment
8) Access control system equipment
9) Low-voltage transformers
1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Furnish UL listed equipment where such label is available. Install in conformance with UL standards
where applicable.
B. Install electrical work in accordance with Drawings and Specifications, edition of NEC in effect at
project location, recommendations of NFPA, state and local electrical and building codes, and special
codes having jurisdiction over specific portions of work. This includes, but is not limited to the latest
adopted version of the following
1. National Electrical Code with applicable local amendments
2. International Fire Code with applicable state or local amendments
3. Life Safety Code, NFPA 101
4. International Building Code
5. In the event of conflict between Drawings, Specifications and such codes, notify Architect in
writing prior to bid. A ruling will then be made by Architect in writing.
6. Obtain permits and certificates of approval from all authorities having jurisdiction over the
installation and pay all fees required for scope of work being done including connection fees,
impact fees, power company installation costs, etc.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Guarantee work to be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of one year from
date of final acceptance of building by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Furnish owner with three written copies of Guarantee-Warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
1. Where Manufacturer's names appear, other Manufacturers may be substituted upon obtaining
written approval of Architect at least 10 days prior to opening of bids
2. Any prior approval of alternate equipment does not automatically exempt the supplier from
meeting the intent of these specifications. Failure to comply with the operational and functional
intent of these specifications may result in the total removal of the alternate system at the
expense of the contractor.
3. If submittals of alternate equipment require more than two reviews by the engineer, a fee of $250 will be charged
to the contractor and payable to the engineer before submittals will be approved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of equipment to be installed and coordinate these
with site dimensions and with other Sections. Coordinate electrical equipment locations with other
trades to maintain required working clearances and prevent encroachment into such working spaces.
B. Confirm and verify electrical power specifications (i.e., voltage, phase, amperage, etc.) and electrical
equipment and material requirements for all HVAC equipment, water heaters, water coolers,
appliances, pumps, and other powered equipment provided by others, before beginning rough-in. All
coordination shall be done with approved shop drawings or submittals.
3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic. Do not scale for exact sizes or locations. Drawings are not
intended to disclose absolute or unconditional knowledge of actual field conditions. Some equipment
may need to be relocated from the locations indicated on the drawings to maintain working spaces
around equipment. Any such coordination and relocation shall be the responsibility of the electrical
contractor.
B. Be prepared to relocate any outlet or device 6 feet in any direction without additional charge to the
owner prior to wall, ceiling, or floor finish materials being installed.
C. Install equipment according to manufacturer's recommendations.
D. In the event of conflict between specifications and drawings, or between various areas on drawings or
specifications, notify Engineer in writing in sufficient time prior to bid to prepare the supplementary
drawings and specification addenda required to resolve the conflict. In the event of a conflict, the most
stringent requirement shall govern.
E. Provide electrical equipment and materials for, and make all connections to equipment furnished by
others, including but not limited to items such as kitchen equipment, building and pole-mounted signs,
fountain pumps, etc. as required for a complete and operable system.

A. Test systems and demonstrate equipment as working and operating properly. Rectify defects at no
additional cost to Owner.
B. All work under this division shall be executed in a thorough workmanlike manner, as determined by
the Engineer, by competent and experienced journeyman electricians.
C. All work shall be installed in strict conformance with all manufacturers' requirements and
recommendations.
3.4 FIRE STOPPING AND SEALING

A. Seal around conduits or other wiring materials passing through fire rated walls in accordance with
Architectural details and/or specifications using U.L. listed fire caulk.
3.5 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER
A. Provide, maintain and remove after construction is completed, temporary lighting adequate for
workman safety and temporary power for all trades including any 3-phase power required.
B. Provide and maintain barricade lighting where required to adequately protect owner against liability for
damage to public or personnel.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut all openings required to install the work of this Division or to repair any defective work. Cost for all
cutting and patching required by the work of this Division shall be included, however, the actual cutting
and patching shall be under the Prime Contractor's direction. Exercise due diligence to avoid cutting
openings larger than required or openings that are in the wrong locations.
B. It is the intent to minimize the amount of exposed conduit on the roof and penetrations through the
roof. Install conduit below roof and up through the inside of the equipment where possible. In the
event roof penetrations must be made, the conduit shall be installed through waterproof sheetmetal
housings or water proof pitch pans as detailed on the drawings.

3.7 IDENTIFICATIONS
A. Provide for each panelboard, terminal cabinet, motor starter, pushbutton, and control switch, etc.,
furnished and/or installed under this Division of the Specifications, with identification as to its
designation or specific function. Identification shall be a laminated, white core, black plastic
nameplate with beveled edges. Lettering shall be machine-engraved, not less than 3/16 in. high, cut
through the black surface to the white core. Secure nameplate to the identified item by the use of
stainless steel self-tapping screws. Impressed plastic shall not be used to satisfy this requirement.
Panel schedules shall be typed.
3.8 INSPECTIONS:
A. All work of this division shall be inspected periodically by the Engineer. The contractor shall notify the
engineer minimum one week prior to the requested inspection date. At a minimum, inspections shall
be performed upon completion of the following phases of construction -
1. Completion of underground conduit rough-in, prior to concrete floor installation.
2. Completion of above-grade conduit rough-in, prior to installation of wall material (gypboard).
3. Substantial completion of entire electrical system.
4. Failure to notify the engineer at the indicated times during construction may result in removal of
concrete, wall board or other materials to allow a complete inspection.
5. At the request of the Engineer, the contractor shall remove panel covers, fixture lenses, ballast
covers, wall plates, wiring devices, and any other items as required to allow a complete
inspection and determination of compliance with the contract documents.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 260519 - POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less.
B. Wiring connectors and connections.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2006.
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.

A. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WIRING REQUIREMENTS
A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway or metal clad cable.
B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.
C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire in raceway or metal clad cable.
D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway or metal clad cable.
E. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.
F. Underground Installations: Use only building wire in raceway.

G. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
H. Use stranded conductors for control circuits.

I. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
J. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits.
K. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.
L. Conductor sizes are based on copper unless indicated as aluminum or "AL".
2.2 BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.

D. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN.
2.3 METAL CLAD CABLE
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC.

B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
SPRINGVILLE CITY POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.
E. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.
F. Armor Material: Steel.
G. Armor Design: Interlocked metal tape.

2.4 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Spring Wire Connectors:
1. Product: Type 512, 3M tapeless steel spring wire connectors
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.
D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install conductors in raceway unless indicated otherwise.
B. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
C. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions.
1. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.
2. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing
and lengths required.
3. Include wire and cable of lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location
shown.
D. Use wiring methods indicated.
E. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet.
F. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.

G. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
H. Protect exposed cable from damage.

I. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support
cables from structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels.
J. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
K. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
L. Where common neutral is run for two or three home run circuits, connect phase conductors to
breakers in panel which are attached to separate phase legs in order that neutral conductors will carry
only unbalanced current.
M. Branch circuit neutral conductors shall be one size larger than the phase conductors unless
specifically noted otherwise.
N. Run conductors of different voltage systems in separate conduits.

O. Conductors size #10 and smaller shall be colored throughout.

P. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible
temperature rise.
Q. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated
conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.
R. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG
and smaller.
S. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 0553. Identify each conductor
with its circuit number or other designation indicated.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Grounding and bonding components.
B. Provide all components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) consisting of:
1. Metal underground water pipe.
2. Metal frame of the building.
3. Concrete-encased electrode.
4. Rod electrodes.
A. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009.
B. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.

A. Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms.

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRODES
A. Rod Electrodes: Copper.
1. Diameter: 3/4 inch.
2. Length: 10 feet.
B. Foundation Electrodes: 1/0 AWG.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Mechanical Connectors: Bronze.
B. Wire: Stranded copper with green insulation.
C. Insulated grounding bushings: Plated malleable iron body with 150 degree centigrade molded plastic
insulating throat, lay-in grounding lug with hardened stainless steel fasteners.
D. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.

E. Grounding Well:
1. Well Pipe: 8 inch by 24 inch long clay tile pipe with belled end.
2. Well Cover: Cast iron with legend "GROUND" embossed on cover.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.

B. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
SPRINGVILLE CITY GROUNDING AND BONDING

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install ground electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve
specified resistance to ground.
B. Pull ground conductors in all non-metallic raceways, flexible conduit, and liquid tight flexible conduit.
Use same size ground as phase conductors up through #10 AWG. Use NEC Table 250-66 for all
others unless noted otherwise on Drawings.
C. Provide grounding well pipe with cover at each rod location. Install well pipe top flush with finished
grade.
D. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing where
indicated. Bond steel together.
E. Provide bonding jumpers across expansion and deflection couplings in conduit runs, across pipe
connections at water meters, and across dielectric couplings in metallic cold water piping systems
F. Provide bonding jumpers from all wiring device grounding terminals to metal backbox.
G. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance.

H. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground.
I. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and
branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.

A. Provide field testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS except Section 4.
END OF SECTION
SPRINGVILLE CITY GROUNDING AND BONDING

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Conduit and equipment supports.
B. Anchors and fasteners.

A. NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical
Contractors Association; 2006.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type
adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit.
B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized or painted.

C. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors, powder-actuated anchors, or preset
inserts.
2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, or welded fasteners.
3. Concrete Surfaces: Use expansion anchors.
4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall
fasteners.
5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts.
6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system
components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
2. Obtain permission from Architect before drilling or cutting structural members.
B. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate
strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.
C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
D. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off
wall.
E. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in
hollow partitions.
END OF SECTION
SPRINGVILLE CITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

SECTION 260534 - CONDUIT
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies.

A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.
B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
E. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005.
B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005.
C. NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical
D. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduit (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2006.
E. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing,
and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007.
F. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2003.
G. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2004.
H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified
and shown.

A. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate
covering.
C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Conduit Size: Comply with NFPA 70.
1. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch unless otherwise specified.
B. Underground Installations:
1. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or thickwall
non-metallic conduit.
SPRINGVILLE CITY CONDUIT

2. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch.
C. Outdoor Locations Above Grade: Use rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit.
D. In Slab Above Grade:
E. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic
tubing.
F. Dry Locations:
1. Concealed: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing.
2. Exposed: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing.
2.2 METAL CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.

2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Interlocked steel construction.

B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.

B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
2.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron compression type.
2.6 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT

A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.

B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
C. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as
required to complete wiring system.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.

B. Install steel conduit as specified in NECA 101.
C. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
E. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers,
and split hangers.

F. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space
on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
G. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 26 0529.
H. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports.
I. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
J. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.

K. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
L. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
M. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
N. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
O. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F.
P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit
dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint
to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
S. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations.
T. Install insulated bushings on each end of conduit 1 1/4 inches in diameter and larger.
U. Bending of PVC shall be by hot box.
V. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make
sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one shot bender to fabricate bends in
metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.
W. Coat buried rigid or IMC conduit with approved asphaltic compound or wrap with two layers of
approved corrosion protection tape.
X. Conduit in concrete slabs shall not exceed 3/4 inch I.P. size and shall be spaced no closer than 8
inches on center except at panel and junction boxes where they are to be spread as widely as
possible; special framing may be required where conduits enter a panel board.
Y. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
Z. When PVC conduit is used, turn up with rigid galvanized elbhws and risers and provide equipment
grounding conductor in accordance with NEC, Article 250
AA. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic.
AB. Provide long-sweep elbows for telephone and power service entrance conduits.
AC. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
AD. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
AE. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 0526.

AF. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 26 0553.
3.3 PROHIBITED PROCEDURES
A. Use of wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry units as base for fastening conduits, tubing,
boxes, cabinets, or other equipment.

B. Torches for bending PVC conduit.
C. Installation of conduit or tubing which has been crushed or deformed.
3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
methods specified in Section 07 8400.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 260535 - SURFACE RACEWAYS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Surface metal raceways.
B. Surface nonmetal raceways.

C. Multi-outlet assemblies.
D. Wireways.

A. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles.

B. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceway: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal
raceway.
B. Surface Nonmetal Raceway: Plastic channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface raceway.
C. Multioutlet Assembly: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, with pre-wired receptacles suitable for use
as multioutlet assembly.
1. Fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings: Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories.
2. Fittings: Furnish manufacturer's standard couplings, elbows, outlet and device boxes and
connectors.
D. Wireway: Raintight type wireway.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install raceways securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
C. Use flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces. Mount plumb and level.
D. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.
E. Close ends of wireway and unused conduit openings.

F. Ground and bond raceway and wireway under provisions of Section 26 0526.
END OF SECTION
SPRINGVILLE CITY SURFACE RACEWAYS

SECTION 260537 - BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
B. Pull and junction boxes.

B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing,
and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007.
C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical
D. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; National Electrical
E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.

B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include
1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.
B. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

C. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide
threaded hubs.
D. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 2726.
2.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Label all circuits and source panels on exterior of each junction box.
B. Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
C. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment
connections, and as required by NFPA 70.
SPRINGVILLE CITY BOXES

D. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated.
E. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.
1. Adjust box locations up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.
F. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 2726.
G. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.
H. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
I. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling
access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
J. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
methods specified in Section 07 8400.
K. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and
backsplashes.
L. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
M. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
N. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
O. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate
masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
P. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation.
Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
Q. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface
finish thickness.
R. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
S. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
T. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
U. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
V. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits
both supported within 12 inches of box.
W. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
X. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
Y. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
SPRINGVILLE CITY BOXES

SECTION 260553 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Nameplates and labels.
B. Wire and cable markers.

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background.
B. Locations:
1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.
C. Letter Size:
1. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
D. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. Use only for
identification of individual wall switches and receptacles, control device stations, and _______.
2.2 WIRE MARKERS
A. Description: Vinyl cloth type self-adhesive wire markers.

B. Description: Cloth or tape type wire markers.
C. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, outlet boxes, and junction boxes each load
connection.
D. Legend:
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings.
2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams on
drawings.
2.3 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type colored yellow with suitable warning legend
describing buried electrical lines.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines.
B. Secure nameplates to equipment front using screws or adhesive.
C. Secure nameplates to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.
D. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 3 inches
below finished grade.
END OF SECTION
SPRINGVILLE CITY ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION

SECTION 260918 - REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Programmable switching controls.
B. Remote switches.
C. Remote sensors.
D. Power supplies.
E. Relay cabinets.
A. Section 26 0534 - Conduit.
B. Section 26 0537 - Boxes: Switch outlets and installation of switch devices.

C. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate wiring diagrams of system, showing interface with branch circuit wiring.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Advanced Control Technologies, Inc: www.act-solutions.com.
B. Lightolier: www.lightolier.com.
C. Lithonia Lighting: www.lithonia.com.
D. PCI Lighting Controls: www.pcilightingcontrols.com
E. Lutron: www.lutron.com
F. Wattstopper: www.wattstopper.com
2.2 PROGRAMMABLE RELAY PANELS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Advanced Control Technologies, Inc: www.act-solutions.com.
2. Lightolier: www.lightolier.com.
3. Lithonia Lighting: www.lithonia.com.
4. PCI Lighting Controls: www.pcilightingcontrols.com
5. Lutron: www.lutron.com
6. Wattstopper: www.wattstopper.com
7. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
SPRINGVILLE CITY REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHING DEVICES

B. Description: Relay cabinet with power supply, terminal blocks, and shall be microprocessor controlled
with an integral display and with a programming keypad.
C. Relays per Panel: As indicated.

D. Programming Functions:
1. Programmable intelligence shall include Time-Of-Day control, 32 holiday dates, warn occupants
of an impending off, timed inputs, preset control, auto daylight savings, astronomical clock
w/offsets, and local control.
2. Relays may be designated as either normally open or normally closed from software. Relay
status shall not only disclose commanded relay status but next scheduled state to occur.
3. Each control panel shall provide a Warn Off (flash the lights) to inform the occupants of an
impending Off command. The Warn Off command shall provide an adjustable time duration of 1
second to 99 extra minutes. The occupants may exit the premises with adequate lighting or
cancel the Warn Off by overriding the lighting zone. This option occurs with all Off commands
except local overrides.
4. The controller shall permit lighting to be overridden On for after hours use or cleaning. The
controller shall provide optional switch timer assignments or timed overrides. The override
choices for various relays shall provide special event occurrences and the controller shall return
to the programmed state. Also, the controller shall provide priority and masking choices to
customize the functions of switch inputs, thereby enabling switches to function differently at
different times of the day to meet special facility operational requirements. These overrides shall
be hard-wired inputs.
5. Programming the controller shall be through the local integral keypad. Descriptive information
shall assist the user to employ the system without a programming manual.
6. Priorities and/or Masking shall be assigned to inputs, telephone override, and global commands
to insure building integrity. Priorities enable or disable the inputs based on Time-Of-Day
scheduling in the controller. Masks shall permit: On only, Off only and On & Off control for
intelligent after hours utilization of the controlled facility.
7. The lighting control system may be fully programmed through PC programming software.
Programming shall be permitted through a direct RS-232 connection, modem or ethernet.
8. The control system shall provide networking between lighting control panels. One network may
support a maximum of a 127 control panels. Panels shall permit data sharing for global control.
All inputs (no limitation) are transferable over the network to create any switching pattern required.
E. Hardware Features:
1. Operator Interface
a. The control panel programming interface resides in firmware in the control panel. The
programming interface shall consist of a circuit board mounted keypad capable of linking
switch inputs to relay outputs and schedule assignments. Systems that utilize blocking
diode technology for relay assignments shall not be acceptable.
b. The integral keypad shall provide access to the main programming features. The keypad
shall permit the user to manually command any or all relays individually. Each panel shall
control its own loads from internal memory. A control system that relies on a central control
computer/processor or external time clocks shall not be permitted.
2. Contact inputs
a. The control system shall permit 32 dry contacts (Digital/Switch Inputs) for override
purposes. Momentary 3 wire or 2 wire (toggle) inputs shall be supported. Maintained
contacts shall be supported as 2 wire (SPST) inputs. Inputs shall be dry contacts (24 VDC
@ 12 ma. internally supplied to the inputs). An input shall be software linked to any number
of relays for override control.
b. The controller shall provide timers for each switch input. Each switch input timer shall be
capable of 0-999 minutes. Software shall enable or disable switch inputs based on Time
Of Day scheduling.
3. Relay Type

a. The system shall utilize control relays which are rated to 20 amps at 277 VAC. The relays
shall be magnetically held and are provided in groups of eight. Relays that are latched or
mechanically held are not acceptable. The relays shall be rated for 10 million mechanical
operations. A limited 10 year warranty shall be provided on the individual relays.
4. Photocell Control
a. The controller shall accept user adjustable ambient light sensors. The controller shall
provide power for the sensor thereby eliminating any external power supply. Sensors shall
provide for both outdoor and indoor applications and provide a dry contact to the controller
once the threshold is reached. The sensor shall provide user adjustable dead band control.
5. Modular Design
a. The control system shall employ all modular connectors to avoid repeat wiring in case of
component failure. The system CPU board shall be mounted on quick release hinge pins
that shall permit an entire change out of the processor and input board in less than 1 minute.
b. All connections for the switch inputs shall incorporate modular connectors. The relay board
shall be modular and designed for rapid field replacement or upgrading. Systems that do
not employ modular connectors shall not be acceptable.
6. Hardware Output Options
a. Modular Relay Card (MRC)
1) The controller shall provide an option for modular relay control. The Modular Relay
Card (MRC) shall offer the feature of controlling two pole voltages such as 208, 240,
and 480VAC in a Normally Open or Normally Closed configuration. Single pole is
offered for 120 and 277VAC in a Normally Open and Absolute Zero Configuration. This
relay card shall also provide visual indication of relay status. Relays shall be
individually exchangeable with plug in low voltage connectors. Combinations of relays
shall be permitted since relay modules shall snap into and lock in location. Two pole
modules require two relay locations for a maximum of four two pole relays per card. All
other relay modules use 1 relay location for a maximum of eight per card. All Modular
Relay Card components shall be warranted for 10 years.
7. Diagnostic Aids
a. Each control panel shall incorporate diagnostic aids for confirmation of proper operation, or
in case of failure these aids shall guide the individual in rapid troubleshooting of the system.
b. The control panels shall employ both a backlit supertwist LCD and LED=s that indicates:
1) POWER (LED)
2) SYSTEM OK (LED)
3) NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS (LED)
4) ON/OFF STATUS of EACH RELAY (LED & LCD)
5) SYSTEM CLOCK and DATE (LCD)
6) PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION (LCD) (TOD, HOLIDAY,ON/OFF, & PRESET)
c. Control systems that do not provide visual self help diagnostics shall not be acceptable.
8. Memory Back-up
a. The system shall utilize a memory back-up device that is system integrated and shall be
non-serviceable. The data in RAM shall be protected against power interruptions lasting as
long as 7 days. The power interrupt protection circuit shall be entirely maintenance-free.
9. Multi-tapped Transformer
a. The control panel shall incorporate the use of a multi-tapped transformer. The panel shall
not require specification of voltage for each control location. The voltages of 120 & 277 VAC
shall be available with each control panel.
10. Status Indication of Relays
a. The system shall provide visible status indication of all relays through the window of each
control panel. The visual indication shall disclose On/Off status and relay number.
11. Service Override & Priority Override
a. The control panel shall provide a three position master-service override for the control unit.
The service override shall not be accessible from the exterior.

b. The master service override provides a single three position switch with the option of All Off,
Auto, and All On, respectively. This master switch shall operate all of the relays in the
controller. This switch shall override and supersede all commands from the logic board
when the switch is in the All On or All Off position. The master switch shall function to
override all the relays should the logic board programming differ from the space function.
c. The system shall remember the last command to the individual relays. Upon returning the
master override switch to the Auto position, the relays shall return to the most recent
command state. This will occur even if the last command happened during the master
override condition.
d. Additionally, the system shall provide external priority override for the entire panel. Through
an externally maintained contact the override card shall place the panel in a priority state.
This external contact will supersede any other programmed state and will command all the
relays ON or OFF depending on operational choice. This priority state will continue until the
external contact is removed. Once the external override is removed the control panel will
return the relays to the appropriate programmed state.
12. Lockable Enclosure
a. Each control panel shall be enclosed in a lockable NEMA class 1 enclosure. The enclosure
shall be manufactured out of 1/16" steel and shall provide pre-punched knockouts for
efficient installation.
13. Panels
a. The low voltage controller shall exist in two sizes of relay enclosures. The enclosure
maximum sizes shall be either 16 or 32 relays per cabinet. The 16 size will employ two
relays cards and the 32 will utilize 4 relay cards. Relays shall be provided in groups of eight
relays per card.
14. High Voltage Barriers
a. The low voltage controller shall provide as an option the ability to provide a barrier for either
voltage separation or emergency circuit separation. The 16-size enclosure shall permit one
barrier and the 32-size enclosure shall permit up to three locations where the barrier(s) may
be installed. The barrier shall be painted red to denote the difference.
15. PC Interface (RS-232 port)
a. The controller shall permit PC programming through optional software. The controller shall
provide a RJ-12 connection for RS-232 programming. Programming shall be permitted
through either a local connection or remotely through a modem. PC software shall permit
multiple file storage for data archival and for seasonal facility requirements. Operator
commands may be issued directly from the PC keyboard.
2.3 REMOTE SWITCHES
A. Wall Switch: Pushbutton type with separate on and off buttons.
1. Description: Momentary contact, three wire switches, ivory color, rated 3 amperes at 25 VAC.
2.4 REMOTE SENSORS

2.5 POWER LIMITED WIRE AND CABLE
A. Remote Control Cable: Copper conductor, 300 volt insulation rated 60 degrees C, individual
conductors twisted together and covered with PVC jacket.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND DOCUMENTATION

A. Installation
1. The control system shall be installed and fully wired as shown on the plans by the installing
contractor. The contractor shall complete all electrical connections to all control circuits, and
override wiring.
B. Documentation

1. The contractor shall provide accurate "as built" drawings to the owner for correct programming
and proper maintenance of the control system. The "as builts" shall indicate the load controlled
by each relay and the relay panel number.
C. Operation and Service Manuals
1. The factory shall supply all operation and service manuals.
D. Install all wiring in conduit in accordance with Section 26 0534.

3.2 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Commissioning
1. Provide the services of a factory-authorized technician to fully commission the control system.
B. Demonstrate proper operation of system.
1. All system equipment shall operate in accordance with specification and industrial standard
procedures.
2. An operational user program shall exist in the control system. The program shall execute and
perform all functions required to effectively operate the site according to the requirements.
3. Demonstration of program integrity during normal operation and pursuant to a power outage.
4. A factory-authorized technician shall provide a minimum of one training hour on the operation and
use of the control system. Additional support services shall be negotiated between the contractor
and the building owner or manager.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Occupancy sensors.
B. Daylighting controls.
A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Labels for lighting control devices.
D. Section 26 0918 - Remote Control Switching Devices: Remotely controlled devices for lighting control,
including programmable relay panels and remote control switching relays.
E. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Devices for manual control of lighting, including wall switches and
wall plates.
F. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting.

A. NECA 1 - Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2006.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the placement of lighting control devices with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc.
installed under other sections or by others.
2. Coordinate the placement of wall switch occupancy sensors with actual installed door swings.
3. Coordinate the placement of occupancy sensors with millwork, furniture, equipment or other
potential obstructions to motion detection coverage installed under other sections or by others.
4. Coordinate the placement of photo sensors for daylighting controls with windows, skylights, and
luminaires to achieve optimum operation. Coordinate placement with ductwork, piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions to light level measurement installed under other
sections or by others.
5. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior
to proceeding with work.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not install lighting control devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

B. Shop Drawings:
1. Occupancy Sensors: Provide lighting plan indicating location, model number, and orientation of
each occupancy sensor and associated system component.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on device programming and setup.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control devices.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
SPRINGVILLE CITY LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation.
1.8 WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ALL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors, hardware,
components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system.
C. Products for Switching of Electronic Fluorescent Ballasts: Tested and rated to be suitable for peak
inrush currents specified in NEMA 410.
2.2 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Manufacturers:
1. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc; __________: www.hubbellautomation.com
2. Sensor Switch Inc; ___________: www.sensorswitch.com.
3. WattStopper; __________: www.wattstopper.com.
4. Cooper Controls; __________: www.coopercontrol.com
6. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a
single supplier.
B. All Occupancy Sensors:
1. Description: Factory-assembled commercial specification grade devices for indoor use capable
of sensing both major motion, such as walking, and minor motion, such as small desktop level
movements, according to published coverage areas, for automatic control of load indicated.
2. Sensor Technology:
a. Passive Infrared (PIR) Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing
movement of thermal energy between zones.
b. Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing frequency shifts
in emitted and reflected inaudible sound waves.
3. Provide LED to visually indicate motion detection.
4. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, occupancy sensor to turn load on when occupant
presence is detected and to turn load off when no occupant presence is detected during an
adjustable turn-off delay time interval.
5. Turn-Off Delay: Field adjustable, up to a maximum time delay setting of not less than 30
seconds and not more than 30 minutes.
6. Sensitivity: Field adjustable.
7. Integral Photocell: For field selectable and adjustable inhibition of automatic turn-on of load when
ambient lighting is above the selected level.
8. Compatibility: Suitable for controlling incandescent lighting, low-voltage lighting with electronic
and magnetic transformers, fluorescent lighting with electronic and magnetic ballasts, and
fractional motor loads, with no minimum load requirements.
C. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors:

1. All Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors:
a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box at standard
wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrated manual control
capability, and no leakage current to load in off mode.
b. Occupancy sensor to be field selectable as either manual-on/automatic-off or automatic
on/off.

c. Manual-Off Override Control: When used to turn off load while in automatic-on mode, unit to
revert back to automatic mode after no occupant presence is detected during the delayed-off
time interval.
d. Finish: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 2726, unless otherwise
indicated.
e. Provide vandal resistant lenses for passive infrared (PIR) wall switch occupancy sensors.
2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an
area of 900 square feet.
a. Products:
1) Greengate OSW-P-0451-MV.
2) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
D. Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
1. All Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
a. Description: Low profile occupancy sensors designed for ceiling installation.
b. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on the drawings,
provide low voltage units, for use with separate compatible accessory power packs.
c. Provide field selectable setting for disabling LED motion detector visual indicator.
d. Occupancy sensor to be field selectable as either manual-on/automatic-off or automatic
on/off.
e. Finish: White unless otherwise indicated.
2. Ultrasonic Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 500 square feet at
a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees.
E. Power Packs for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors:

1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained low voltage class 2 transformer and relay compatible
with specified low voltage occupancy sensors for switching of line voltage loads.
2. Provide quantity and configuration of power and slave packs with all associated wiring and
accessories as required to control the load indicated on the drawings.
3. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac.
4. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings.
2.3 DAYLIGHTING CONTROLS

A. System Description: Control system consisting of photo sensors and compatible control modules and
power packs, contactors, or relays as required for automatic control of load indicated according to
available natural light; capable of integrating with occupancy sensors and manual override controls.
B. Daylighting Control Photo Sensors: Low voltage class 2 photo sensor units with output signal
proportional to the measured light level and provision for zero or offset based signal.
1. Sensor Type: Filtered silicon photo diode.
2. Sensor Range:
a. Skylight Photo Sensors: 1,000 to 6,000 footcandles.
3. Finish: White unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are
properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C. Verify that openings for outlet boxes are neatly cut and will be completely covered by devices or wall
plates.
D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to lighting

control devices.
F. Verify that the service voltage and ratings of lighting control devices are appropriate for the service
voltage and load requirements at the location to be installed.
G. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1
B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of
lighting control devices provided under this section.
1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
a. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: 48 inches above finished floor.
2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of lighting control devices unless otherwise indicated.
3. Locate wall switch occupancy sensors on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from
edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain direction
prior to proceeding with work.
C. Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to branch
circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
E. Install lighting control devices plumb and level, and held securely in place.
F. Where required and not furnished with lighting control device, provide wall plate in accordance with
Section 26 2726.
G. Where applicable, install lighting control devices and associated wall plates to fit completely flush to
mounting surface with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate.
Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use
oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.
H. Occupancy Sensor Locations:
1. Location Adjustments: Locations indicated are diagrammatic and only intended to indicate which
rooms or areas require devices. Provide quantity and locations as required for complete coverage
of respective room or area based on manufacturer's recommendations for installed devices.
2. Locate ultrasonic occupancy sensors a minimum of 4 feet from air supply ducts or other sources
of heavy air flow and as per manufacturer's recommendations, in order to minimize false triggers.
I. Daylighting Control Photo Sensor Locations:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, locate photo sensors for open loop systems to accurately measure
the level of daylight coming into the space, while minimizing the measured amount of lighting
from artificial sources.
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect each lighting control device for damage and defects.
C. Test occupancy sensors to verify proper operation, including time delays and ambient light thresholds
where applicable. Verify optimal coverage for entire room or area.
D. Test daylighting controls to verify proper operation, including light level measurements and time delays
where applicable.
E. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective lighting control devices.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
B. Adjust occupancy sensor settings to minimize undesired activations while optimizing energy savings,
and to achieve desired function as indicated or as directed by Architect.
C. Where indicated or as directed by Architect, install factory masking material or adjust integral blinders
on passive infrared (PIR) occupancy sensor lenses to block undesired motion detection.
D. Adjust daylighting controls under optimum lighting conditions after all room finishes, furniture, and
window treatments have been installed to achieve desired operation as indicated or as directed by
Architect. Readjust controls calibrated prior to installation of final room finishes, furniture, and window
treatments that do not function properly as determined by Architect.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original
factory finish.

A. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of lighting control devices to Architect, and correct
deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. General purpose transformers.

B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Nameplates.
C. Section 26 0534 - Conduit: Flexible conduit connections.

D. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards.
A. IEEE C57.94 - Recommended Practice for Installation, Application, Operation, and Maintenance of
Dry-Type General Purpose Distribution and Power Transformers; 1982 (R2006).
B. IEEE C57.96 - Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers; 1999 (R2004).
C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; 2006.
D. NECA 409 - Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Dry-Type Transformers; 2002.
E. NEMA ST 20 - Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 1992 (R1997).
F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008
G. NEMA TP 1 - Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers; 2002.
H. NEMA TP 2 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Distribution
Transformers; 2005.
I. NEMA TP 3 - Standard for the Labeling of Distribution Transformer Efficiency; 2000.
J. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.

L. UL 506 - Standard for Specialty Transformers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
M. UL 1561 - Standard for Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Include voltage, kVA, impedance, tap configurations, insulation system class and rated
temperature rise, efficiency, sound level, enclosure ratings, outline and support point dimensions,
weight, required clearances, service condition requirements, and installed features.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide dimensioned plan and elevation views of transformers and adjacent
equipment with all required clearances indicated.
SPRINGVILLE CITY LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy
plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the
purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.7 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products; ______: www.eaton.com.

B. General Electric Company; ______: www.geindustrial.com.
C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products; ______: www.schneider-electric.us.
D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Source Limitations: Furnish transformers produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical
distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier.
2.2 ALL TRANSFORMERS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, dry type transformers for 60 Hz operation designed and

manufactured in accordance with NEMA ST 20 and listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
B. Unless noted otherwise, transformer ratings indicated are for continuous loading according to IEEE
C57.96 under the following service conditions:
1. Altitude: Less than 3,300 feet.
2. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 86 degrees F average or 104 degrees F maximum
measured during any 24 hour period.
C. Core: High grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and low hysteresis and
eddy current losses. Keep magnetic flux densities substantially below saturation point, even at 10
percent primary overvoltage. Tightly clamp core laminations to prevent plate movement and maintain
consistent pressure throughout core length.
D. Impregnate core and coil assembly with non-hydroscopic thermo-setting varnish to effectively seal out
moisture and other contaminants.
E. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV.

F. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding strap.
G. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.
H. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data, ratings, wiring diagrams, and overload capacity
based on rated winding temperature rise.
2.3 GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS
A. Description: Self-cooled, two winding transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL
1561; ratings as indicated on the drawings.
B. Insulation System and Allowable Average Winding Temperature Rise:
1. Less than 15 kVA: Class 185 degrees C insulation system with 115 degrees C average winding
temperature rise.
2. 15 kVA and Larger: Class 220 degrees C insulation system with 150 degrees C average

winding temperature rise.
C. Coil Conductors: Continuous aluminum windings with terminations brazed or welded.
D. Winding Taps:
1. Less than 3 kVA: None.
2. 3 kVA through 15 kVA: Two 5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.
3. 15 kVA through 300 kVA: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and four 2.5 percent
full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.
E. Energy Efficiency: Standard efficiency complying with NEMA TP 1.

1. Test efficiency according to NEMA TP 2.
2. Label transformer according to NEMA TP 3.
F. Sound Levels: Standard sound levels complying with NEMA ST 20.

G. Mounting Provisions:
1. Less than 15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting.
2. 15 kVA through 75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting.
3. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.
H. Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20.
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following
installation locations:
2. Construction: Heavy gage steel.
a. Less than 15 kVA: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated.
b. 15 kVA and Larger: Ventilated.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations.
4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.
A. Factory test transformers according to NEMA ST 20.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

B. Verify that suitable support frames and anchors are installed where required and that mounting
surfaces are ready to receive transformers.
C. Perform pre-installation tests and inspections on transformers per manufacturer's instructions and as
specified in NECA 409. Correct deficiencies prior to installation.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.
B. Install transformers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install transformers in accordance with NECA 409 and IEEE C57.94.

D. Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 26 0534, 2 feet minimum length, for connections
to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.
E. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances as specified on transformer nameplate and in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.
F. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
G. Remove shipping braces and adjust bolts that attach the core and coil mounting bracket to the
enclosure according to manufacturer's recommendations in order to reduce audible noise

transmission.
H. Where not factory-installed, install lugs sized as required for termination of conductors as shown on
the drawings.
I. Install transformer identification nameplate in accordance with Section 26 0553.
A. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 4000.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.
B. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque
settings.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from transformer components according to manufacturer's instructions.
B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Power distribution panelboards.
B. Lighting and appliance panelboards.

B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

B. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2006.

C. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards
Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007.
D. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,
integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com.
B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.

C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.
D. Siemens: www.siemens.com
E. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type.
B. Panelboard Bus: Aluminum, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard.
C. Minimum fully-rated integrated short circuit rating:
1. 240 Volt Panelboards: 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PANELBOARDS

D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: With integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole; UL
listed. For air conditioning equipment branch circuits provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR.
E. Circuit Breaker Accessories: Trip units and auxiliary switches as indicated.

F. Enclosures: NEMA Type 3R if installed outside, NEMA Type 1 if installed inside.
G. Covers: Hinged trim - trim has piano hinge down one side. Door opens by single latch; Entire trim
opens by removing screws.
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS

A. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard.
B. Panelboard Bus: Aluminum, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard;
provide insulated ground bus where scheduled.
C. Minimum fully-rated Integrated Short Circuit Rating:
1. 240 Volt Panelboards: 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical.
D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, bolt-on type, with common trip
handle for all poles; UL listed.
1. Type SWD for lighting circuits.
2. Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits.
3. Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled.
4. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
E. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.

F. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20 inches wide for
480 volt panelboards.
G. Covers: Hinged trim - trim has piano hinge down one side. Door opens by single latch; Entire trim
opens by removing screws.
H. Provide a minimum of six spare 20 amp, 1-pole breakers in each branch panel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and NECA 1.
B. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
C. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4
inches above floor.
D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting
changes required to balance phase loads.
F. Provide protection for installed breakers during construction to prevent physical damage, paint
splatters, etc.
G. Provide 4" high concrete curb under floor standing distribution panelboards.
H. Arrange conductors neatly within enclosure, and secure with suitable nylon ties.
I. All panelboards shall be keyed alike.

J. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 0553.
K. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling.
Identify each as SPARE.

1. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch.
L. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 0526.
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to
balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire
branch circuits.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 262701 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Metering transformer cabinets.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

B. Product Data: Provide ratings and dimensions of transformer cabinets and meter bases.
C. Submit utility company-prepared drawings.

A. Perform work in accordance with utility company written requirements and NFPA 70.
1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. Review service entrance requirements
and details with Utility Company representative.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. GE Industrial: www.geindustrial.com.
B. Milbank Manufacturing: www.milbankmfg.com.

C. Square D: www.squared.com.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Metering Transformer Cabinets: Sheet metal cabinet with hinged door, conforming to utility company
requirements, with provisions for locking and sealing.
1. Size: As required by utility.
B. Meter Base: As required by utility company.
C. Other Components: As required by utility company.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Arrange with utility company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project.
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on utility company drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install transformer pad, metering transformer cabinets, and meter base as required by utility company.
B. Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
SPRINGVILLE CITY ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE

END OF SECTION
SPRINGVILLE CITY ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE

SECTION 262717 - EQUIPMENT WIRING
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Electrical connections to equipment.

A. Section 26 0534 - Conduit.
B. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 V and Less).
C. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices.
A. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 1999 (R 2005).
B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's
instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.
B. Determine connection locations and requirements.

C. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment.
D. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.
1. Colors: Conform to NEMA WD 1.
2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment
grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.
3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit
overcurrent protection.
B. Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 26 2818.

C. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 2726.
D. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0534.

E. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 0519.
F. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 0537.
PART 3 EXECUTION
SPRINGVILLE CITY EQUIPMENT WIRING

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.
3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with
watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures
encountered.
D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.
E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.

F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment
connection boxes.
G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment
wiring requirements.
H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.
I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment
wiring requirements.
END OF SECTION
SPRINGVILLE CITY EQUIPMENT WIRING

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Wall switches.
B. Receptacles.
C. Wall plates.

B. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.
C. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices: Devices for automatic control of lighting, including
occupancy sensors.

Association; 2006.
B. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 1999 (R 2005).
C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.
E. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and
configurations.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
B. Furnish two of each style, size, and finish wall plate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Hubbell Incorporated; ______: www.hubbell-wiring.com.

B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc; ______: www.leviton.com.
C. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc; ______: www.legrand.us

E. Source Limitations: Where possible, for each type of wiring device furnish products produced by a
single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.
2.2 APPLICATIONS
SPRINGVILLE CITY WIRING DEVICES

A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.
B. Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all receptacles
installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.
C. Provide GFI receptacles for all receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.
D. Provide GFI receptacles for all receptacles installed in kitchens.
E. Provide GFI receptacles for all receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.
2.3 ALL WIRING DEVICES
A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
2.4 WALL SWITCHES

A. Wall Switches: General Duty, AC only general-use snap switch, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1.
1. Body and Handle: plastic with toggle handle.
2. Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics.
B. Verify color with Architect before ordering devices.
C. Switch Types: Single pole, double pole, 3-way, and 4-way.
D. Approved Manufacturer
1. Hubbell: CS1221 series
2. Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding
2.5 RECEPTACLES
A. Receptacles: General duty, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1.
1. Device Body: plastic.
2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.
3. Convenience Receptacles: Type 5 to 20.
4. Approved Manufacturers
a. Hubbell: CR5252 series
b. Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding.
B. GFCI Receptacles: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet
regulatory requirements.
1. Approved Manufacturer
a. Hubbell: GF5352I
b. Leviton: 6899-I
2.6 WALL PLATES
A. All Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.
1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring
devices.
2. Size: Standard; __________.
3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.
B. Decorative Cover Plates: nylon.

C. Jumbo Cover Plates: nylon.
D. Weatherproof Cover Plates: Corrosion resistant, in-use type

1. Pass & Seymour: WIUC10-GL
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are
properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring
devices.
F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1, including mounting
heights specified in that standard unless otherwise indicated.
B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of
wiring devices provided under this section.
C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices
exceeds 300 V.
E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect
more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.
F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and
tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure
terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment
grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
H. Provide GFI receptacles with integral GFI protection at each location indicated. Do not use
feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.
I. Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
J. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.
K. Install wall switches with OFF position down.
L. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as
instructed by manufacturer.
M. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles
with grounding pole on left.
N. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered
without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized
rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.
O. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or
designated for future use.

P. Mount wall switches on lock side of doors not more than 12 inches from trim and in accordance with
barrier free design standards. Prior to rough-in, coordinate with architectural drawings to determine
lock-side of door.
Q. Label source panel and circuit number on the back of all device cover plates.
R. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.

S. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper.
T. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
U. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
V. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
W. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above
accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
X. Provide GFI receptacles in areas required by the National Electrical Code whether indicated on the
drawings or not.
A. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor.
B. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor unless noted otherwise.
C. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above counter.
A. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 4000.
B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.
C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized to verify proper operation.
D. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
E. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.
F. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions.
G. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original
factory finish.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 262818 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Fusible switches.
B. Nonfusible switches.
A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002
(R2007).
B. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum);
National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001 (R2006).

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Same as panelboard manufacturer.

2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch.
1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position.
2. Handle lockable in OFF position.
3. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses.
B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch.
1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position.
2. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1.
1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.

C. Label equipment, such as Fan Coil Unit FC-1. Label disconnects to indicate equipment served. Use
1/16 inch thick laminated plastic composition material with contrasting color core. Engraved letter
shall be 1/4 inch high. Attach labels with screws.
D. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed.
A. Perform field inspection in accordance with Section 01 4000.
END OF SECTION
SPRINGVILLE CITY ENCLOSED SWITCHES

SECTION 262913 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Manual motor controllers.
B. Magnetic motor controllers.

C. Combination magnetic motor controllers and disconnects.
A. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Engraved nameplates.
B. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated
Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000
(R2005).
C. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices; National Electrical
D. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures; National Electrical Manufacturers
E. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum);
National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001 (R2006).
F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching
and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Same as panelboard manufacturer.

2.2 MANUAL CONTROLLERS
A. Manual Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose, Class A, manually operated, full-voltage
controller with overload element, and toggle operator.
2.3 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS

A. Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for
induction motors rated in horsepower.
B. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.
C. Enclosures: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1.
SPRINGVILLE CITY ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 normally open contacts in addition to seal-in contact.
B. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5, standard duty type.
1. Green run light
C. Pushbuttons: Unguarded type.
D. Indicating Lights: Transformer, LED type.

E. Selector Switches: Rotary type.
F. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, as scheduled. Provide fused primary, secondary,
and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.
2.5 DISCONNECTS
A. Combination Controllers: Combine motor controllers with disconnects in common enclosure. Obtain
IEC Class 2 coordinated component protection.
B. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole; UL
listed.
C. Motor Circuit Protector: Circuit breakers with integral instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole; UL
listed.
D. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle.
E. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Fuse
clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
C. Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.
D. Height: 5 ft to operating handle.

E. Provide fuses for fusible switches; refer to Section 26 2813 for product requirements.
F. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor
characteristics.
G. Provide engraved plastic nameplates; refer to Section 26 0553 for product requirements and location.
H. Neatly type label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower,
full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. Place label in clear plastic
holder.
END OF SECTION
SPRINGVILLE CITY ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Interior luminaires.
B. Ballasts.
C. Lamps.
D. Luminaire accessories.

A. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.
B. Section 26 0918 - Remote Control Switching Devices: Remote controls for lighting, including
programmable relay panels and remote control switching relays.
C. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices: Automatic controls for lighting including occupancy
sensors.
D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers.
E. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting.
Association; 2006.
B. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical
C. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors
Association; 2006.
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.
E. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection
Association; 2009.
F. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each fixture that is not a standard product of
the manufacturer.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed
information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings,
service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include
model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.

B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
SPRINGVILLE CITY INTERIOR LIGHTING

B. Furnish 10% of the total of each plastic lens type used on the project, minimum two of each type.
Deliver to owner in protected, factory packaging.
C. Furnish 10% replacement lamps of the total of each lamp type, minimum two of each type. Deliver to
owner in protected, factory packaging.
D. Furnish two of each ballast type.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.2 LUMINAIRES
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.
C. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
D. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts,
reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp
and distribute the light.
F. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors,
hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.
G. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage,
distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.
2.3 FIXTURE TYPES
A. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included on the Drawings.

2.4 BALLASTS
A. All Ballasts:
1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).
2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and
state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.
2.5 LAMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com.
2. Philips Lighting Co of NA: www.lighting.philips.com.
B. All Lamps:
1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire.
2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not
specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp
efficiency standards.
4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish
products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are
determined by the Architect to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature.
C. Lamp Types: As specified for each fixture.

D. Provide 130-volt incandescent lamps.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of
luminaires provided under this section.
B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general
workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).
D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.
E. Mount fixtures as called for on drawings. Determine type of ceiling being installed in each space and
furnish fixtures suitable for exact type, including roof/floor or ceiling/floor fire rated design with fire
tenting required by Architect. All coordination and materials to be provided without additional cost to
owner.
F. Review lighting drawings and confirm ballast voltages for each fixture, or need for two ballasts to
accommodate dual-level switching, or need for dimming ballasts to interface with dimming control,
before ordering. Contractor shall not be eligible for additional compensation if fixtures are delivered
with incorrect voltage ratings or too few ballasts as a result of inaccurate catalog numbers on drawings.
G. Provide all necessary supports, brackets, adapters and miscellaneous equipment for mounting and
installation of fixtures.
H. Install fixtures securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500 (commercial
lighting).
I. Install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide
pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
J. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.

K. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and
with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
L. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires in grid ceiling directly from building
structure.
M. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
N. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory
requirements for fire rating.
O. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.

P. Install wall mounted luminaires and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings.
Q. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

R. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature
conditions within fixture; use flexible conduit.
S. Connect luminaires and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 26 0537 using
flexible conduit.
T. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature
conditions within luminaire.
U. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

V. Install specified lamps in each exit sign and luminaire.
W. Install lamps in each luminaire.
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.
C. Perform field inspection in accordance with Section 01 4000.
D. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.
E. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace
excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by
Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.
B. Aim and adjust fixtures as directed.

C. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and
manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore
finishes to match original factory finish.
B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.

C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.

3.7 SCHEDULE - See Drawings
END OF SECTION

SECTION 271005 - STRUCTURED CABLING
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Telecommunications service entrance to building(s).
B. Cabling and pathways inside building(s).

C. Distribution frames, cross-connection equipment, enclosures, racks, and outlets.
D. Modular jacks and device plates.
E. Grounding and bonding the telecommunications distribution system.

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Electrical system grounding and
bonding.
B. Section 26 0534 - Conduit.

A. CEA-310 - Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment; Consumer Electronics Association;
Revision E, 2005.
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; 2008.
C. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General

Requirements; Rev B, 2001; Addenda 1-7.
D. TIA/EIA-568-B.2 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced
Twisted Pair Cabling Components; Rev B, 2001; Addenda 1-11.
E. TIA-569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces; 2009.
F. TIA/EIA-606 - Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure; Rev A, 2002.
G. ANSI/J-STD-607 - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications; Rev A, 2002.
H. UL 444 - Communications Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
I. UL 1863 - Standard for Communications-Circuit Accessories; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
2. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings: Show compliance with requirements on isometric schematic diagram of network
layout, showing cable routings, telecommunication closets, rack and enclosure layouts and locations,
service entrance, and grounding, prepared and approved by BICSI Registered Communications
Distribution Designer (RCDD).
D. Manufacturer Qualifications.
E. Installer Qualifications.
F. Test Plan: Complete and detailed plan, with list of test equipment, procedures for inspection and
testing, and intended test date; submit at least 60 days prior to intended test date.
G. Field Test Reports.
SPRINGVILLE CITY STRUCTURED CABLING

H. Project Record Documents: Prepared and approved by BICSI Registered Communications
Distribution Designer (RCDD).
1. Record actual locations of outlet boxes and distribution frames.
2. Show as-installed color coding, pair assignment, polarization, and cross-connect layout.
3. Identify distribution frames and equipment rooms by room number on contract drawings.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers, sources of supply, and
operation and maintenance instructions; include copy of project record documents.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: At least 3 years experience manufacturing products of the type specified.
B. Installer Qualifications: A company having at least 5 Years experience in the installation and testing of
the type of system specified, and:
1. Employing a BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD).
2. Supervisors and installers factory certified by manufacturers of products to be installed.
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Keep stored products clean and dry.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. A Lifetime Performance Warranty covering all components, equipment and workmanship shall be
submitted in writing with system documentation. The warranty period shall begin on the system's first
use by the owner.
B. The project must be pre-registered with Manufacturer before installation has begun.
C. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
D. Correct defective Work within a 2 year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Cabling and Equipment Solutions:

1. Nextlan
2. Commscope Uniprise
3. Belden
4. Equal as approved by Architect - All solutions must be end-to-end and be able to show shared
engineering resources.
2.2 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Provide a complete, warrentied, end-to-end, permanent system of cabling and pathways for voice and
data communications, including cables, conduits and wireways, pull wires, support structures, patch
panels, enclosures, racks and cabinets, and outlets.
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568 and TIA/EIA-569, latest editions.
2. Provide fixed cables and pathways that comply with NFPA 70 and ANSI/J-STD-607 and are UL
listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified.
3. Provide connection devices that are rated for operation under conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F at
relative humidity of 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing.
4. In this project, the term plenum is defined as return air spaces above ceilings, inside ducts,
under raised floors, and other air-handling spaces.
B. Capacity:
1. Building Entrance: By others.
2. Horizontal Cabling: Copper.
3. Offices and Work Areas: Provide one voice outlet and two data outlets in each work area.

4. Provide additional outlets where indicated on drawings.
C. Main Distribution Frame (MDF): Centrally located support structure for terminating cables that extend
to telecommunications outlets, functioning as point of presence to external service provider.
1. Locate main distribution frame as indicated on the drawings.
2. Capacity: As required to terminate all cables required by design criteria plus minimum 25
percent spare space.
D. Cabling to Outlets: Specified horizontal cabling, wired in star topology to distribution frame located at
center hub of star; also referred to as "links".
2.3 PATHWAYS
A. Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0534; provide pull cords in all conduit; minimum size 3/4".
B. Underground Service Entrance: PVC, Type EPC-40 conduit.
2.4 COPPER CABLE AND TERMINATIONS

A. Copper Horizontal Cable: TIA/EIA-568 Category 6 solid conductor unshielded twisted pair (UTP), 23
AWG, 100 ohm; 4 individually twisted pairs; covered with blue jacket and complying with all relevant
parts of and addenda to latest edition of TIA/EIA-568 and UL 444.
1. In locations other than in plenums, provide NFPA 70 type CMG general purpose, CMR
riser-rated, or type CMP plenum-rated cable.
2. In plenums, provide NFPA 70 type CMP plenum-rated cable.
B. Copper Cable Terminations: Insulation displacement connection (IDC) type using appropriate tool;
use screw connections only where specifically indicated.
C. Jacks and Connectors: RJ-45, non-keyed, terminated with 110-style insulation displacement
connectors; high impact thermoplastic housing; complying with same standard as specified horizontal
cable and UL 1863.
1. Performance: 500 mating cycles.
2. Voice and Data Jacks: 4-pair, pre-wired to T568A configuration, with color-coded indications for
T568B configuration.
2.5 CROSS-CONNECTION EQUIPMENT
A. Connector Blocks for Category 5e and Up Cabling: Type 110 insulation displacement connectors;
capacity sufficient for cables to be terminated plus 25 percent spare.
B. Patch Panels for Copper Cabling: Sized to fit EIA standard 19 inch wide equipment racks; 0.09 inch
thick aluminum; cabling terminated on Type 110 insulation displacement connectors; printed circuit
board interface.
1. Jacks: Non-keyed RJ-45, suitable for and complying with same standard as cable to be
terminated; maximum 48 ports per standard width panel.
2. Capacity: Provide ports sufficient for cables to be terminated plus 25 percent spare plus
mounting space for all active componenets/equipment required to cross-connect to tany/all
modular jack ports on the patch panels.
3. Labels: Factory installed laminated plastic nameplates above each port, numbered
consecutively; comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers.
4. Provide incoming cable strain relief and routing guides on back of panel.
5. Patch Cords: Provide one patch cord for each pair of patch panel ports.
C. Cable Management
1. Equip each rack or cabinet with vertical cable section.
2. Equip each rack or cabinet with horizontal cable managers above and below each patch section.
a. 7 rings
b. 6 pass-through holes
c. Hinged front cover
3. Use velcro cable wraps on all cable - tie wraps are not acceptable.
2.6 ENCLOSURES

A. Backboards: Interior grade plywood without voids, 3/4 inch thick; UL-labeled fire-retardant.
1. Size: 48 inches wide by 96 inches high.
2. Do not paint over UL label.
3. Provide one 48" multi-outlet power strip with integral surge protection and outlets at 6" o.c.
(minimum 7 outlets) mounted at center of terminal board.
B. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: CEA-310 standard 19 inch wide component racks.
1. Floor Mounted Racks: 16 gage steel construction with corrosion resistant finish; vertical and
horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, and grounding lug.
C. Outlet Boxes: For flush mounting in walls; depth as required to accommodate cable manufacturer's
recommended minimum conductor bend radius.
1. Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.
2. Faceplates: High impact thermoplastic, complying with system design standards and UL 514C.
3. Labels: Comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers; label each jack on the face plate as
to its function with a unique numerical identifier.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Comply with latest editions and addenda of TIA/EIA-568, TIA/EIA-569, ANSI/J-STD-607, NFPA 70, and
SYSTEM DESIGN as specified in PART 2.
3.2 PATHWAYS
A. Underground Service Entrance: Install conduit at least 24 inches below finish grade; encase in at least
3 inches thick concrete for at least 60 inches out from the building line.
B. Install with the following minimum clearances:
1. 48 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray equipment, and
uninterruptible power systems.
2. 12 inches from power conduits and cables and panelboards.
3. 5 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures.
4. 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes.
C. Conduit:
1. Run 3/4" conduit from telephone/computer network outlet box to termination rack.
2. Install three UTP cables from each telephone/data outlet to terminal board unless indicated
otherwise on Drawings. Route conductors in bundled, tied groups.
3. Do not install more than 2 (two) 90 degree bends in a single horizontal cable run.
4. Install insulated bushings on all stubbed conduit ends.
5. Leave pull cords in place where cables are not initially installed.
6. Conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors except where
specifically indicated to be exposed.
a. Conduit may remain exposed to view in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and
telecommunications rooms.
b. Treat conduit in crawl spaces and under floor slabs as if exposed to view.
c. Where exposed to view, install parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and
structural members.
d. Under floor slabs, locate conduit at 12 inches, minimum, below vapor retarder; seal
penetrations of vapor retarder around conduit.
D. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with ANSI/J-STD-607 and NFPA 70.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND CABLING
A. Cabling:
1. Terminate cables at each outlet with specified modular jack assembly.
2. Patch appropriate computer outlet locations to network switches as directed by the owner.

3. Do not bend cable at radius less than manufacturer's recommended bend radius; for unshielded
twisted pair use bend radius of not less than 4 times cable diameter.
4. Do not over-cinch or crush cables.
5. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended cable pull tension.
6. When installing in conduit, use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer and do not chafe
or damage outer jacket.
B. Service Loops (Slack or Excess Length): Provide the following minimum extra length of cable, looped
neatly:
1. At Distribution Frames: 120 inches.
2. At Outlets - Copper: 12 inches.
C. Copper Cabling:
1. Category 5e/6: Maintain cable geometry; do not untwist more than 1/2 inch from point of
termination.
2. For 4-pair cables in conduit, do not exceed 25 pounds pull tension.
3. Copper Cabling Not in Conduit: Use only type CMP plenum-rated cable as specified.
D. Floor-Mounted Racks and Enclosures: Permanently anchor to floor in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Provide seismic bracing as directed by structural engineer.
E. Field-Installed Labels: Comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers.

1. Cables: Install color coded labels on both ends.
2. Outlets: Label each jack on its face plate as to its type and function, with a unique numerical
identifier.
3. Patch Panels: Label each jack as to its type and function, with a unique numerical identifier.
4. Patch Cords: Label with jack identifier corresponding to initial installation.

A. Comply with inspection and testing requirements of specified installation standards.
B. Visual Inspection:
1. Inspect cable jackets for certification markings.
2. Inspect cable terminations for color coded labels of proper type.
3. Inspect outlet plates and patch panels for complete labels.
4. Inspect patch cords for complete labels.
C. Testing - Copper Cabling and Associated Equipment:

1. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks.
2. Category 5e/6 Links: Perform tests for wire map, length, attenuation, NEXT, and propagation
delay.
D. Final Testing: After all work is complete, including installation of telecommunications outlets, and
telephone dial tone service is active, test each voice jack for dial tone.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 281300 - ACCESS CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Security access devices.
B. Access control panel.

A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
B. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 V and Less).
1.3 REFERENCES
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Security Access System: Control access to building and selected areas using encoded cards.
B. The Security Management System specified shall be fully integrated and installed as a complete
package by the Access/Security Control Contractor including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Control panel
2. Door hardware and accessories
3. Readers
4. Computer and Monitor
5. Printers (for encoded cards)
6. Alarm relays
7. Miscellaneous cable, wire, associated connectors, and hardware
8. Power supplies
C. The SMS shall be capable of monitoring, recording, and displaying card access activity and
supervised alarm inputs/outputs on a continuous, real time basis. The installation shall comply with
local, state, and federal code requirements as applicable.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Provide system wiring diagram showing each device and wiring connection required.
C. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
C. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Security Access System:

1. DoorKing, Inc: www.doorking.com.
2. Bosch Security Systems: www.boschsecurity.us.
3. SimplexGrinnell: www.simplexgrinnell.com.
SPRINGVILLE CITY ACCESS CONTROL

2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Access Control Panel:
1. All points in the system shall be monitored and/or controlled through an "intelligent" Master
Control Unit. The control unit shall contain its own microprocessor and memory with a minimum
300 hours battery backup.
2. Provide the following features:
a. Real time, day of the week and calendar.
b. Automatic clock synchronization from operator workstation.
c. Time schedules.
d. Holiday schedules.
e. Temporary schedule overrides
f. Automatic Daylight Savings Time Switcher
g. Software timers with one second resolution.
h. User-defined alphanumeric software and hardware point descriptors.
i. Resident diagnostics which continuously monitor the operation of the unit, enunciate faults
(including continuous looping of control loops, unreliable data) and provide continuous
operation using the last reliable data.
j. Test mode to drive a selected point (not the physical service) to a selected value and
observe the consequential effect.
k. Password protection.
l. Alarm processing program including the ability to redirect alarms according to alarm priority
and time schedules.
m. Trend logging and event logging programs. Minimum 100 samples per point.
n. Analog totalizing (integration).
o. Pulse accumulation providing totalization and rate values.
p. Spare points: Allow for all software associated with the required spare points.
B. Encoded Card Readers:
1. The reader shall be proximity type. It shall read the ID number of the card or tag when presented
to the surface of the reader without physical contact. When installed according to manufacturer's
instructions, primary operation of the reader shall be unidirectional; that is, having its greatest
read range from the front surface with the minimum reading range of cards and tags at its back
surface.
2. Read range shall be nominally 6 inches from the surface when used with a card. The reader may
be mounted directly on any material including metal without the use of standoffs, or concealed
behind any building material except metal.
3. Product: AWID SP-6820 or equivalent.
C. Encoded Cards:
1. Photo identification and proximity technology combined.
2. Dimensions: 2.125" x 3.375" x 0.035" max
D. Electric Strikes:
1. Coordinate requirements with door manufacturer
2. Provide power supplies as required to energize strikes
E. Motion Detectors:
1. Request to Exit Passive Infrared Sensor
a. UL Listed
b. Ceiling, wall, corner, flush, and swivel mountable brackets to be available.
c. Type: Detection Systems DS-160 or equivalent
d. Operation: power requirements 10-14vdc, Operating Temperature 32 to 120 EF. N.O and
N.C contacts.
F. Door Contact / Status Switch

1. UL Listed
2. 3/4" diameter recessed magnetic contacts with factory installed wire leads, minimum 1 ft. long -
22AWG.
3. Self-lock mounting

4. Installation shall include the application of mounting compound for added adhesive strength.
5. Where field conditions prohibit the use of a recessed magnetic contact, surface mounted switch
shall be used.
6. Type: Sentrol 1070C or equivalent
7. Operation: N.O. and N.C. Magnetic contacts
G. System Cable:
1. UL Listed
2. NEC approved
3. Plenum rated where required
4. All cabling shall be shielded unless specified otherwise by the card access manufacturer.
5. As a minimum, standard 18 AWG cable shall be installed unless in direct conflict with
manufacturers specifications
6. All cabling used in the implementation of systems integration shall be in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Use 16 AWG minimum size conductors for detection and signal circuit conductors. Install wiring in
conduit.
C. Make conduit and wiring connections to door hardware devices furnished and installed under Section
08 7100.

B. Manufacturer Services: Furnish services of technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final
connections, system testing, and to train Owner personnel.
A. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required response to each.
B. Provide 1 hour of instruction each for two persons.
1. Conduct instruction at project site with manufacturer's representative.
3.4 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of security access system for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 282300 - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Cameras.
B. Control and monitoring equipment and software.

C. Cable and accessories.
A. Section 28 1300 - Access Control.


A. Description: Provide video communications between points of surveillance indicated on Drawings and
central monitoring station.
B. Configuration: Internet Protocol
C. Distribution: Ethernet
1.5 SUBMITTALS

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements, including system
wiring diagram.
C. Product Data: Provide showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements for each
component.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of cameras and routing of cable.
E. Operation Data: Instructions for starting and operating system.

F. Maintenance Data: Routine trouble shooting procedures.

B. Installer Qualifications: Authorized installer of specified manufacturer with service facilities within 150
miles of Project.
C. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bosch Security Systems: www.boschsecurity.us.
2. Honeywell Video Systems: www.honeywellvideo.com.
3. SimplexGrinnell: www.simplexgrinnell.com.
4. Sanyo Network Solutions: www.sanyocctv.com
B. Cameras: General purpose wired color video camera.
1. 1/3-inch format CCD Imager
SPRINGVILLE CITY VIDEO SURVEILLANCE

2. Lens: Fixed focal length, 1/3-inch format lens with automatic iris.
3. Ratings:
a. Input Power: 24 volts, 60Hz.
b. Resolution: 720 x 480.
4. Network protocol: TCP/IP, PPP, FTP, HTTP, SMTP, NTP
5. Pre-/post alarm buffer: 16 MB
6. Frame rate: Max 30 fps (640 x 480 pixels)
7. Alarm I/O interface: alarm in - 1 (NO/NC), alarm out - 1 (with motion detector)
8. Housing: Indoor.
C. Cameras: Wireless color video camera.

1. 1/3-inch format CCD Imager
2. Lens: Fixed focal length, 1/3-inch format lens with automatic iris.
3. Ratings:
a. Input Power: 24 volts, 60Hz.
b. Resolution: 720 x 480.
4. Network protocol: TCP/IP, PPP, FTP, HTTP, SMTP, NTP
5. Wireless interface: IEEE802.11b, 801.11g and 802.11n
6. Wireless security: WEP, WPA, WPA2
7. Pre-/post alarm buffer: 16 MB
8. Frame rate: Max 30 fps (640 x 480 pixels)
9. Alarm I/O interface: alarm in - 1 (NO/NC), alarm out - 1 (with motion detector)
10. Housing: Weatherproof.
D. Network Archiving Software
1. Simultaneous recording of images from up to 8 sources
2. Multiple video streams from 1, 4, or 8 cameras
3. Simultaneous recording and playback
4. Configurable camera alarm alerting events.
5. Time/Date search
6. Alarm event search
E. Network Archiving Server
1. Processor: Intel Core 2 Duo 2.93 GHz (64-bit Dual Core)
2. Memory: 4 GB DDR3 1333
3. OS: Windows 7 professional 32-bit
4. Monitor: 23" HD LCD
5. Hard Drive: 1TB SATA II 7200rpm
6. Optical Drive: DVD±RW 16x SATA
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Main Video Cable: Category 5E.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Interface installation of video surveillance with security access systems.
A. Provide the services of manufacturer's technical representative to prepare and start systems and
supervise final wiring connections and system adjustments.

A. Demonstrate system operation and provide two hours of instruction with manufacturer's training
personnel.
B. Conduct walking tour of project and briefly describe function, operation, and maintenance of each
component.
3.5 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide service and maintenance of system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 283100 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Fire alarm system design and installation, including all components, wiring, and conduit.
B. Transmitters for communication with supervising station.

C. Maintenance of fire alarm system under contract for specified warranty period.
A. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard No. 72 for protected premises
signaling systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. The system shall be
electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors.
B. The system shall be an active/interrogative type system where each device is repetitively scanned,
causing a signal to be transmitted to the main fire alarm control panel (FACP) indicating that the
associated initiating device and notification appliance circuit wiring is functional. Loss of such a signal
at the main FACP shall result in a trouble indication as specified hereinafter for the particular input.
C. Operation of manual station or automatic activation of any smoke detector or heat detector shall -
1. Cause system evacuation horns to sound and lamps to flash.
2. The LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the Fire Alarm condition, including
the type of alarm point and its location within the protected premises.
3. All system output programs assigned via control by event equations to be activated by the
particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated System Outputs (alarm indicating
appliances and/or relays) shall be activated.
4. Initiate off-site alarm notification.

A. Section 21 1300 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Supervisory, alarm, and actuating devices
installed in sprinkler system.
A. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and

Less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (R2008).
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; 2008.

C. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code and Signaling Code; 2010.
D. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; 2009.
E. UL 1635 - Digital Alarm Communicator System Units

F. UL 1971 - Signaling Devices for the Hearing-Impaired.
G. UL 864 - Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

H. UL 268 - Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
I. UL 38 - Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes for Use with Fire-Protective Signaling Systems
J. UL 346 - Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See General Conditions - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Evidence of designer qualifications.
SPRINGVILLE CITY FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

C. Design Documents: Submit all information required for plan review and permitting by authorities
having jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, riser diagrams, and description of operation:
1. Copy (if any) of list of data required by authority having jurisdiction.
2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time.
3. Clear and concise description of operation, with input/output matrix similar to that shown in NFPA
72 Appendix A-7-5-2.2(9), and complete listing of software required.
4. System zone boundaries and interfaces to fire safety systems.
5. Location of all components, circuits, and raceways; mark components with identifiers used in
control unit programming.
6. Circuit layouts; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors; conduit fill calculations; spare
capacity calculations; notification appliance circuit voltage drop calculations.
7. List of all devices on each signaling line circuit, with spare capacity indicated.
8. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each component, including wiring diagrams, installation
instructions, and circuit length limitations.
9. Description of power supplies; if secondary power is by battery include calculations
demonstrating adequate battery power.
10. Certification by either the manufacturer of the control unit or by the manufacturer of each other
component that the components are compatible with the control unit.
11. Certification by the manufacturer of the control unit that the system design complies with the
contract documents.
12. Certification by Contractor that the system design complies with the contract documents.
D. Evidence of installer qualifications.

E. Evidence of instructor qualifications; training lesson plan outline.
F. Evidence of maintenance contractor qualifications, if different from installer.
G. Inspection and Test Reports:

1. Submit inspection and test plan prior to closeout demonstration.
2. Submit documentation of satisfactory inspections and tests.
3. Submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Test Form," filled out.
H. Operating and Maintenance Data: Revise and resubmit until acceptable; have one set available during
closeout demonstration:
1. Complete set of specified design documents, as approved by authority having jurisdiction.
2. Additional printed set of project record documents and closeout documents, bound or filed in
same manuals.
3. Contact information for firm that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble call-back
service.
4. List of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing.
5. Replacement parts list with current prices, and source of supply.
6. Detailed troubleshooting guide and large scale input/output matrix.
7. Preventive maintenance, inspection, and testing schedule complying with NFPA 72; provide
printed copy and computer format acceptable to Owner.
8. Detailed but easy to read explanation of procedures to be taken by non-technical administrative
personnel in the event of system trouble, when routine testing is being conducted, for fire drills,
and when entering into contracts for remodeling.
I. Project Record Documents: Have one set available during closeout demonstration:
1. Complete set of floor plans showing actual installed locations of components, conduit, and zones.
2. "As installed" wiring and schematic diagrams, with final terminal identifications.
3. "As programmed" operating sequences, including control events by device, updated input/output
chart, and voice messages by event.
J. Closeout Documents:
1. Certification by manufacturer that the system has been installed in compliance with his
installation requirements, is complete, and is in satisfactory operating condition.
2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out completely and signed by installer and authorized

representative of authority having jurisdiction.
3. Maintenance contract.
K. Maintenance Materials, Tools, and Software: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1. Furnish spare parts of same manufacturer and model as those installed; deliver in original
packaging, labeled in same manner as in operating and maintenance data and place in spare
parts cabinet.
2. In addition to the items in quantities indicated in PART 2, furnish the following:
a. All tools, software, and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm system using
Owner's personnel; minimum modification capability to include addition and deletion of
devices, circuits, and zones, and changes to system description, operation, and evacuation
and instructional messages.
b. One copy, on CD-ROM, of all software not resident in read-only-memory.
A. Designer Qualifications: NICET Level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician or registered fire
protection engineer, employed by fire alarm control panel manufacturer, Contractor, or installer, with
experience designing fire alarm systems in the jurisdictional area of the authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum 3 years documented experience installing fire alarm
systems of the specified type and providing contract maintenance service as a regular part of their
business.
1. Authorized representative of control unit manufacturer; submit manufacturer's certification that
installer is authorized; include name and title of manufacturer's representative making
certification.
2. Installer Personnel: At least 2 years of experience installing fire alarm systems.
3. Supervisor: NICET level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician; furnish name and address.
C. Maintenance Contractor Qualifications: Same entity as installer or different entity with specified
qualifications.
D. Instructor Qualifications: Experienced in technical instruction, understanding fire alarm theory, and
able to provide the required training; trained by fire alarm control unit manufacturer.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide control panel manufacturer's warranty that system components other than wire and conduit are
free from defects and will remain so for 1 year after date of Substantial Completion.
B. Provide installer's warranty that the installation is free from defects and will remain so for 1 year after
date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fire Alarm Control Units: Products of the following are acceptable:

1. Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Gamewell Company
2. Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Fire Control Instruments, Inc
3. Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Fire-Lite
4. Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Notifier
5. Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Silent Knight
6. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc: www.sbt.siemens.com.
7. SimplexGrinnell
8. GE Securty Vigilant
9. Radionics
10. Mircom
11. Bosch
12. EST
13. Provide all control units made by the same manufacturer.

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
1. For other acceptable manufacturers of control units specified, submit product data showing
equivalent features and compliance with contract documents.
2.2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. Fire Alarm System: Provide a new automatic fire detection and alarm system:
1. Comply with the following; where requirements conflict, order of precedence of requirements is
as listed:
a. The Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA).
b. The requirements of the State Fire Marshal.
c. The requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction.
d. Applicable local codes.
e. The contract documents (drawings and specifications).
f. NFPA 101.
g. NFPA 72; where the word "should" is used consider that provision mandatory; where
conflicts between requirements require deviation from NFPA 72, identify deviations clearly
on design documents.
2. Master Control Unit (Panel): New, located as shown on drawings.
B. Supervising Stations and Fire Department Connections:
1. Public Fire Department Notification: By on-premises supervising station.
2. On-Premises Supervising Station: Existing proprietary station operated by Owner, located at
Administration Building.
3. Means of Transmission to On-Premises Supervising Station: Directly connected noncoded
system.
4. Means of Transmission to Remote Supervising Station: Digital alarm communicator transmitter
(DACT), 2 telephone lines.
C. Circuits:
1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC): Class B, Style A.
2. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B, Style W.
D. Spare Capacity:
1. Initiating Device Circuits: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity.
2. Notification Appliance Circuits: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity.
3. Master Control Unit: Capable of handling all circuits utilized to capacity without requiring
additional components other than plug-in control modules.
E. Power Sources:
1. Primary: Dedicated branch circuits of the facility power distribution system.
2. Secondary: Storage batteries.
3. Capacity: Sufficient to operate entire system for period specified by NFPA 72.
4. Each Computer System: Provide uninterruptible power supply (UPS).
2.3 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES
A. Supervision: Provide supervisory signals in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following:
1. Sprinkler water control valves.
B. Alarm: Provide alarm initiation in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following:
1. Sprinkler water flow.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. General:
1. Provide flush mounted units where installed in finish areas; in unfinished areas, surface
mounted unit are acceptable.
2. Provide legible, permanent labels for each control device, using identification used in operation
and maintenance data.

B. Fire Alarm Control Units, Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances: Conventional or addressable
type; listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Master Control Unit:

1. The main FACP Central Console shall contain a microprocessor based central processing unit
(CPU). The FACP shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to
make up the system: Automatic detectors, annunciators, and other system controlled devices.
2. The main FACP and Central Console shall perform the following functions:
a. Supervise and monitor all detectors and monitor modules connected to the system for
normal, trouble and alarm conditions.
b. Supervise all notification circuits throughout the facility.
c. Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble, supervisory or alarm condition on operator's
terminal, panel display, and annunciators.
3. System Capacity and General Operation
a. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall include a full featured operator interface control and
annunciation panel which shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display, individual, color
coded system status LEDs, and an alpha-numeric keypad for Field Programming and
Control of the Fire Alarm System.
b. All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall be achieved without
special equipment and without interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the Fire Alarm
Control Panel.
c. The system shall include emergency evacuation signal utilizing intelligence such that loss
of operation by the main FACP will not result in the loss of evacuation signal throughout the
balance of the building.
d. The main communication bus (options bus) shall be capable of Class A or Class B
configuration with a total bus length of 5,900 feet (1,798 m).
4. Display
a. The System Display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the system
operator and may also be used to program all system operational parameters.
b. The System Display shall provide an 80-character back-lit alphanumeric Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD). It shall also provide 5 Light-Emitting-Diodes (LEDs), which will indicate the
status of the following system parameters: AC POWER, SYSTEM ALARM; SYSTEM
TROUBLE, DISPLAY TROUBLE, and SIGNAL SILENCE.
c. The System Display shall provide a touch key-pad with control capability to command all
system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and field programming.
Two different password levels will be accessible through the Display Interface Assembly to
prevent unauthorized System control or programming.
d. The System Display shall include the following operator control switches: SIGNAL
SILENCE, LAMP TEST, RESET, SYSTEM TEST, and ACKNOWLEDGE
5. Serial Interface Board
a. The Serial Interface Board shall provide the EIA-232 interface between the Fire Alarm
Control Panel and the UL Listed Electronic Data Processing (EDP) Peripherals.
b. The Serial Interface Board shall allow the use of multiple printers, CRT monitors, and other
peripherals connected to the EIA-232 ports.
c. The Serial Interface Board shall provide one EIA-485 port for the serial connection of the
optional Annunciator and Control Subsystem components.
6. Enclosures:
a. The control panels shall be housed in UL listed cabinets suitable for surface or semi-flush
mounting. Cabinets shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat, and
manufacturer's standard finish.
b. The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for
viewing of all indicators. For convenience, the door may be hinged on either the right or
left-hand side.
7. Power Supply:
a. The Main Power Supply shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz, and shall provide all necessary
power for the FACP plus 25% spare capacity for future expansion.
b. It shall provide meters to indicate battery voltage and charging current.

8. Operators Terminal:
a. Provide the following functions in addition to any other functions required for the system.
1) Acknowledge (ACK/STEP) Switch:
(a) Signal Silence Switch.
(b) Activation of the Signal Silence Switch shall cause all programmed Alarm
Indicating Appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm
activation. The selection of indicating circuits and relays which are silenceable by
this switch shall be fully field programmable within the confines of all applicable
standards.
2) System Reset Switch.
(a) Activation of the System Reset Switch shall cause all electronically-latched
initiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output
devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition.
3) System Test Switch.
(a) Activation of the System Test Switch shall initiate an automatic test of all
Addressable detectors in the system. The System Test shall activate the
electronics in each intelligent sensor, simulating an alarm condition and causing
the transmission of the alarm condition from that sensor to the Fire Alarm Control
Panel. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall interpret the data from each sensor
installed in the system. A report summarizing the results of this test shall be
displayed automatically on the System Liquid Crystal Display, as well as on any
CRTs or printers in the System.
4) Lamp Test Switch.
9. Field Programming
a. The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without the
need for special tools or electronic equipment and shall not require field replacement of
electronic integrated circuits.
b. All programming shall be accomplished through the standard FACP keyboard or through
the Video Display Terminal.
10. Off-Site Alarm Notification System
a. Provide telephone line connection from telephone terminal board to fire alarm control panel.
b. Provide dialer device to notify off-site personnel of alarm or abnormal conditions.
c. Connect to fire alarm control panel so specified conditions initiate off-site call. Use one
alarm code for alarm and second code for supervisory/trouble alarm.
11. Audible Horn Alarm Annunciation -
a. Provide separate and distinct alarm signals for alarm and trouble conditions.
b. Alarm signal shall also operate strobe lights, if specified.
c. Provide alarm silence switches at control panel.
d. Trouble alarm shall be horn integral to control panel.
e. Supervisory alarm may be same audible alarm as trouble alarm, but with separate visual
annunciation.
D. Initiating Devices:
1. Standard Smoke Detectors
a. Flush mounted, photoelectric
b. UL listed compatible with the fire alarm control panel.
c. Shall have a flashing status LED for visual supervision. When the detector is actuated, the
flashing LED will latch on solid. The LED shall flash at a 1/sec rate if the chamber is out of
calibration range. The detector may be reset by actuating the control panel reset switch.
2. Detector Bases
a. Flush mounted detector bases shall contain no electronics and support all flush series
detector types.
3. Standard Manual Station
a. Standard double action, single stage
b. Polycarbonate construction with internal toggle switch.
c. Finished in red with silver "PULL IN CASE OF FIRE" lettering
d. Suitable for mounting on North American 2 2 (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 2 (38mm)
deep 4 square boxes with 1-gang covers.

E. Notification Appliances:
1. Low Profile Horn-Strobes
a. Audible output of 92 dBA at 10 ft. when measured in reverberation room per UL-464.
b. Integrally mounted flashing light unit with block letters 'FIRE'. Multi-candela with
field-selectable settings of 15cd, 30cd, 60cd, 75cd & 110cd, and flash rate between one and
three Hertz. All units shall flash in synchronization with each other.
c. The horn shall have a selectable steady or synchronized temporal output.
d. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring.
e. Low profile horn/strobes shall mount in a North American 1-gang box.
F. Surge Protection: In accordance with IEEE C62.41.2 category B combination waveform and NFPA 70;
except for optical fiber conductors.
G. Batteries
1. Shall be 12 volt, Gell-Cell type.
2. Battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than twenty-four
hours plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure.
3. The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level checks
refilling, spills and leakage shall not be required.
H. Locks and Keys: Deliver keys to Owner.
I. Instruction Charts: Printed instruction chart for operators, showing steps to be taken when a signal is
received (normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble); easily readable from normal operator's station.
1. Frame: Stainless steel or aluminum with polycarbonate or glass cover.
2. Provide one for each control unit where operations are to be performed.
3. Obtain approval of Owner prior to mounting; mount in location acceptable to Owner.
4. Provide extra copy with operation and maintenance data submittal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and the contract documents.
B. Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finished areas.
C. Label pull and junction boxes "FIRE ALARM" with red indelible ink.
D. Loop wires through each device on zone for proper supervision. Tee-taps not permitted.
E. Provide dust protection for installed smoke detectors until finish work is completed and building is
ready for occupancy.
F. Protect conductors from cuts, abrasion and other damage during construction.
G. Minimum conductor size shall be 14 AWG unless otherwise specified.
H. Do not install ceiling mounted detectors within 3 feet of air discharge grills. Coordinate with other
trades as required.
I. Post copy of wire identification list inside fire alarm panel door or other area accessible to fire alarm
service personnel.
J. Install conductors and make connections to all, water flow switches, valve tamper switches, and low
air pressure switches.
K. Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation.
L. Install instruction cards and labels.
3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION

A. Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests.

B. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections
and tests and for observation by their personnel.
C. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person with equivalent qualifications to supervise
inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments.
D. Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct; perform preliminary tests as
required.
E. Provide all tools, software, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing.
F. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities;
document each inspection and test.
G. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with contract
documents.
3.3 OWNER PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION

A. Provide the following instruction to designated Owner personnel:
1. Hands-On Instruction: On-site, using operational system.
B. Administrative: One-hour session(s) covering issues necessary for non-technical administrative staff;
classroom:
1. Initial Training: 1 session pre-closeout.
C. Basic Operation: One-hour sessions for attendant personnel, security officers, and engineering staff;
combination of classroom and hands-on:
1. Initial Training: 1 session pre-closeout.
2. Refresher Training: 1 session post-occupancy.
D. Furnish the services of instructors and teaching aids; have copies of operation and maintenance data
available during instruction.
3.4 CLOSEOUT
A. Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner.
1. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests.
2. Have at least one copy of operation and maintenance data, preliminary copy of project record
drawings, input/output matrix, and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration.
3. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during
demonstration.
4. Demonstration may be combined with inspection and testing required by authority having
jurisdiction; notify authority having jurisdiction in time to schedule demonstration.
5. Repeat demonstration until successful.
3.5 MAINTENANCE
A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance
service.
B. Provide to Owner, at no extra cost, a written maintenance contract for entire manufacturer's warranty
period, to include the work described below.
C. Perform routine inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance required by NFPA 72, including:
1. Maintenance of fire safety interface and supervisory devices connected to fire alarm system.
2. Repairs required, unless due to improper use, accidents, or negligence beyond the control of the
maintenance contractor.
3. Record keeping required by NFPA 72 and authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner:
1. Provide on-site response within 2 hours of notification.
2. Include allowance for call-back service at no extra cost to Owner.

E. Provide a complete description of preventive maintenance, systematic examination, adjustment,
cleaning, inspection, and testing, with a detailed schedule.
F. Maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit, listing the date and time of each inspection and call-back
visit, the condition of the system, nature of the trouble, correction performed, and parts replaced.
Submit duplicate of each log entry to Owner's representative upon completion of site visit.
G. Comply with Owner's requirements for access to facility and security.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 31 10 00 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain.
2. Removing existing vegetation.
3. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.
4. Disconnecting, capping or sealing site utilities.
5. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.
1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's
property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without
permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities
B. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.
C. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures
are in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Section 312000
"Earth Moving."
1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.
B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and
sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not
enter or cross protection zones.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SITE CLEARING

C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until
permanent vegetation has been established.
D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.
3.3 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place.
1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.
B. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services
according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
C. Removal of underground utilities is included in earthwork sections and with applicable fire suppression,
plumbing, HVAC, electrical, communications, electronic safety and security and utilities sections and
Section 024116 "Structure Demolition" and Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition."
3.4 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new
construction.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials
including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or
stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere
with other Project work.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SITE CLEARING

SECTION 31 20 00 - EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade walks pavements turf and grasses and plants.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
5. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving.
6. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides
of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow
of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions
indicated.
1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines
and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement
material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and
dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work
directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical
appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.
I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt
pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement
concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below
subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.
K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within
buildings.
A. Comply with requirements of the Project’s geotechnical investigation report.
B. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
SPRINGVILLE CITY EARTH MOVING

A. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before beginning
earth moving operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from
excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487,
or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension,
debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture
content at time of compaction.
D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and
not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not
more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel;
ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve
and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and
identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed
with a description of the utility; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm)
thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective
jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm)
deep; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement,
lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.
B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary
protection before placing subsequent materials.
3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and
subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials,
and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock
excavation or removal of obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock,
replace with satisfactory soil materials.
3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If
applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete
formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by
hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and
grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and
subgrades.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit.
Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or
conduit unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and
conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,
fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.
1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material, 4 inches (100 mm) deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding course.
3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired dump truck to identify
soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction
activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete
foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day
compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when approved by Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.
3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade,
and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to
provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of
conduits.
C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of
bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is
specified in "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
D. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or
conduit less than 30 inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely
encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing
roadway subbase course. Concrete is specified in "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any
dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and
along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit.
Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150
mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.10 SOIL FILL
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will
bond with existing material.
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to
within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds
optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.
3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for
material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly
along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 698:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300
mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.
3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.
4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent.
3.13 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with
compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested with a 10-
foot (3-m) straightedge.
3.14 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS
A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as follows:
1. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
2. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in
layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than
3 inches (75 mm) thick.
3. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines,
cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 698.
3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE
A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade
as follows:
1. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of equal
thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75
mm) thick.
2. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than
95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests
and inspections.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent
earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify
design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based
on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.
D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction
specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact
and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.17 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces
become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations
or weather conditions.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with
additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and
eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and
legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

SECTION 31 22 16 - FINE GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:

1. Perform fine grading work required to prepare site for paving finish grading and for landscape finish
grading and soil preparation as described in Contract Documents.
1. Section 31 05 01: Common Site Construction Requirements.
2. Section 31 10 00: Site Clearing.
3. Section 32 12 16: Finish grading for asphalt paving.
4. Section 32 13 13: Finish grading for concrete paving.
5. Section 32 91 13: Finish grading and soil preparation for landscaping.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society For Testing And Materials:

1. ASTM D 1557-02, 'Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort.'
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 31 22 13.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not commence work of this Section until grading tolerances specified in Section 31 22 13 are met.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection: Protect utilities and site elements from damage.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. Before grading, dig out weeds from planting areas by their roots and remove from site. Remove
rocks larger than 1-1/2 inches in size and foreign matter such as building rubble, wire, cans, sticks,
concrete, etc.
2. Remove imported paving base material present in planting areas down to natural subgrade or other
material acceptable to Architect.
3. Limit use of heavy equipment to areas no closer than 6 feet from building or other permanent
structures
SPRINGVILLE CITY FINE GRADING

3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Site Tolerances:
1. Maximum variation from required grades shall be 1/10 of one foot.
2. To allow for final finish grades of parking lot and planting areas, fine grade elevations before
placing topsoil are:
a. Sod Areas: 4 inches below top of walk or curb (plus allow for depth of soil amendments/soil
conditioners).
b. Shrub Areas: As necessary in order to meeting planting requirements noted on detail sheets
and/or as directed by Springville City.
B. Do not expose or damage existing shrub or tree roots.
C. Distribute approved imported or stockpiled topsoil. Remove organic material, rocks and clods greater
than 1-1/2 inch in any dimension, and other objectionable materials.
D. Slope grade away from building for 12 feet minimum from walls at slope of 1/2 inch in 12 inches
minimum unless otherwise noted. Direct surface drainage in manner indicated on Drawings by molding
surface to facilitate natural run-off of water. Fill low spots and pockets with specified fill material and
grade to drain properly.
SPRINGVILLE CITY FINE GRADING

SECTION 32 01 01 - PLANT MAINTENANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Provide maintenance for new landscaping as described in Contract Documents.
1. Section 32 90 01: Common Planting Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PERFORMANCE
A. General:
1. Before beginning maintenance period, plants shall be in at least as sound, healthy, vigorous, and in
approved condition as when delivered to site, unless accepted by Landscape Architect in writing at
final landscape inspection
2. Maintain landscaping from completion of landscape installation to 30 days after Substantial
Completion Meeting.
3. Replace landscaping that is dead or appears unhealthy or non-vigorous as directed by Landscape
Architect at end of maintenance period. Make replacements within 10 days of notification. Lawn
that does not live and has to be replaced shall be guaranteed and maintained an additional 30 days
from date of replacement.
B. Sodded Lawn:
1. Maintain sodded lawn areas until lawn complies with specified requirements and throughout
maintenance period.
2. Water sodded areas in sufficient quantities and at required frequency to maintain sub-soil
immediately under sod continuously moist 3 to 4 inches deep.
3. Cut grass first time when it reaches 3 inches high. Continue to mow at least once each week
throughout maintenance period. Remove clippings.
4. Apply weed killer as necessary to maintain weed-free lawn. Apply weed killer in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions during calm weather when air temperature is between 50 and 80 deg F.
5. At end of 30 day maintenance period, fertilize lawns with 16-16-8 (or as otherwise recommended
by Fertilizer Manufacturer and/or Springville City) at rate recommended by Fertilizer Manufacturer.
C. Trees, Shrubs and other Plants:

1. Maintain by pruning, cultivating, and weeding as required for healthy growth.
2. Restore planting basins.
3. Tighten and repair stake and guy supports and reset trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical
positions as required.
4. Spray as required to keep trees, shrubs and other plants free of insects and disease.
5. Provide supplemental water by hand as needed in addition to water from sprinkling system.
SPRINGVILLE CITY PLANT MAINTENANCE

SECTION 32 12 16 - ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Hot-mix asphalt patching.
2. Hot-mix asphalt paving.
3. Pavement-marking paint.
1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for aggregate subbase and base courses and for aggregate
pavement shoulders.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and
performance properties.
1. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix
proposed for the Work.
2. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.
A. Material Certificates: For each paving material, from manufacturer.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by authorities

having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located.
B. Comply with Section 02741 “Hot Mix Asphalt” of the State Specifications.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of Salt
Lake City for asphalt paving work.
1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard
specifications do not apply to this Section.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is
imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met:
1. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C).
2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and rising at time of
placement.
3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C) at time of
placement.
B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum
ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials or 55 deg F for water-based materials,
and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C).
SPRINGVILLE CITY ASPHALT PAVING

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
A. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured, crushed blast-
furnace slag. The combined dry mineral aggregate shall be uniformly graded and conform to the following
gradation:
SIEVE SIZE IDEAL GRADATION (% PASSING) TOLERANCE

1/2 inch 100
No. 4 70 +10
No. 16 35 +7
No. 50 17 +6
No. 200 7 +2
B. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073 or AASHTO M 29, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone,
gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.
C. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242 or AASHTO M 17, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material.
2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Asphalt cement: AC-10 penetration grade.
B. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320 or AASHTO MP 1a, PG 64-22
C. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 or AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 or AASHTO M 208
cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.
2.3 FABRIC
A. Polypropylene material, nonwoven and needlepunched.
B. Fabric shall be laid down in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and instructions and in
accordance with the following instructions:
1. The fabric shall be laid smoothly in order that no wrinkles are present. Any wrinkles will be cut and
tacked between layers.
2. The fabric shall be overlapped both side-to-side and end-to-end, a maximum of 6" and a minimum
of 3".
3. All overlaps shall be tacked between overlaps.
A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or
wettable powder form.
B. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #32 Alkyd Traffic Marking Paint.

1. Color: White, Yellow, Blue
C. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint.

1. Color: White, Yellow, Blue
D. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1.
2.5 MIXES
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having
jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in AI MS-2, "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and
Other Hot-Mix Types"; and complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is
located.

2. Base Course: Follow base course recommendation as identified in Table 4: Base Course
Gradation Requirements on page 12 of the Geotechnical Investigation Report prepared by PSI on
April 21, 2010
3. Surface Course:
B. Develop mix design according to Marshall Method to achieve optimum asphalt content as shown by test
data curves based on testing samples containing 1/2 percent increments of asphalt content. Samples
shall include minimum of two with asphalt content above optimum and two with asphalt content below
optimum.
1. Make tests in accordance with ASTM D 1559 and ASTM D 1075 (50 blow count Marshall).
2. Final design shall meet following criteria:
a. Stability: 1200 pounds minimum.
b. Flow: 8 minimum, 18 maximum.
c. Air voids: 2 percent minimum, 4 percent maximum.
d. Voids in mineral aggregate: 15 percent minimum.
e. Asphalt cement by weight of total: 5 percent minimum.
f. Dry Strength: 200 psi.
g. Index of Retained Strength: 75 percent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and
areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
B. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PATCHING
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound
base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300 mm) into adjacent sound
pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material.
Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.
B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat concrete pieces
firmly.
1. Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches,
extending into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces
vertically. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.
C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a
rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove
spillages and clean affected surfaces.
D. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch and, while still
hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from
substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.
B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written
application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before
applying paving materials.
C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to
0.7 L/sq. m).

1. A tack coat is required on all existing pavements and concrete where they come into contact with
new pavement. The tack coat material shall conform to the quality and be applied as specified in
Section 02748 of the State Specifications. A prime coat will not be required on base material or
subgrade.
2. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
3. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove
spillages and clean affected surfaces.
3.4 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING
A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by
hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course
to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.
1. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C).
2. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in
asphalt-paving mat.
B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width
are required.
C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove
excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix;
use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
3.5 JOINTS
A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of
depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.
1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints.
2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm).
4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes work at a
subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered" method according to
AI MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of Paving Operations."
3.6 COMPACTION
A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive
displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate compactors in areas
inaccessible to rollers.
1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).
B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge.
Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness.
Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.
C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt
is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been
uniformly compacted to the following density:
1. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to
ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.
D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.
E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper
alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.
F. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.
G. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the compacted thickness of 3 1/2” within the
following tolerances:
1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.
B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the
following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or
longitudinally to paved areas:
1. Base Course: 1/4 inch.
2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch.
3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum
allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3.8 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Owner.
B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking.
C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with
uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film
thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm).
1. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. (0.72 kg/L).
B. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.
C. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that
it does not comply with specified requirements.
3.10 DISPOSAL
A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally
dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

SECTION 32 31 13 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Chain-link fences.
2. Swing gates.
3. Cantilevered gates
4. Gate operators and controls.
A. Delegated Design: Design chain-link fences and gates, including comprehensive engineering analysis by
a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Chain-link fence and gate framework shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7:
1. Minimum Post Size and Maximum Spacing: Determine according to CLFMI WLG 2445, based on
mesh size and pattern specified and on the following:
a. Wind Loads: 90 mph.
b. Exposure Category: B.
c. Fence Height: 8 feet (2.43 m).
d. Material Group: IA, ASTM F 1043, Schedule 40 steel pipe.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated
C. Samples: For each polymer-coated product and for each color and texture specified, in 6-inch (150-mm)
lengths for components and on full-sized units for accessories.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For chain-link fences and gate framework indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
A. Product Certificates: For each type of chain-link fence and gate, from manufacturer.
B. Product Test Reports: For framing strength according to ASTM F 1043.
C. Sample of special warranty.
A. Gate Operator Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
SPRINGVILLE CITY CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

1.7 WARRANTY
components of chain-link fences, gates and gate operators that fail in materials or workmanship within
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials
beyond normal weathering.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC
A. General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage
knuckle or twist. Comply with CLFMI Product Manual and with requirements indicated below:
1. Fabric Height: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Steel Wire Fabric: Wire with a diameter of 0.192 inch (4.88 mm) to match existing.
a. Mesh Size: To match existing.
b. Zinc-Coated Fabric: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 1, 1.2 oz./sq. ft. (366 g/sq. m) with zinc
coating applied before weaving.
3. Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages.
2.2 FENCE FRAMING
A. Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, including rails, braces, and line; terminal; and
corner posts. Provide members with minimum dimensions and wall thickness according to
ASTM F 1043 or ASTM F 1083 based on the following:
1. Fence Height: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Brace Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043.
3. Metallic Coating for Steel Framing:
a. Type A zinc coating.
2.3 TENSION WIRE
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, marcelled tension wire complying with
ASTM A 817 and ASTM A 824, with the following metallic coating:
1. Type II, zinc coated with minimum coating weight matching chain-link fabric coating weight.
2.4 SWING GATES
A. General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for gate posts and single swing gate types.
1. Gate Leaf Width: As indicated.
2. Gate Fabric Height: As indicated.
B. Pipe and Tubing:

1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Comply with ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083; protective coating and finish to
match existing fence framing.
2. Gate Posts: Round tubular steel.
3. Gate Frames and Bracing: Round tubular steel.
C. Frame Corner Construction: Welded.
D. Hardware:
1. Hinges: 180-degree outward swing.
2. Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for padlocking accessible from
both sides of gate.

2.5 EXTERNAL ROLLER CANTILEVER SLIDE GATE
A. Gate Frame: Made in accordance with ASTM F 1184 Type II Class 2, and in compliance with UL-325, and
ASTM 2200. Gate to be pre-engineered for weight, height and opening. Provide frame members of
sufficient size and strength for conditions. .
B. Pipe and Tubing:

1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Comply with ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083; protective coating and finish to
match existing fence framing.
2. Gate Posts: Round tubular steel.
3. Gate Frames and Bracing: Round tubular steel.
4. Chainlink fabric and slats to match adjacent fencing.
C. Frame and truss Construction: Welded.
D. Truck assembly: Swivel type, zinc die cast, with 4 sealed lubricant ball bearing wheels 2" (50 mm) in
diameter. The load bearing wheels have an extruded dynamic load rating of 4,500 pounds each. And 2
side rolling wheels to ensure truck alignment in track. Truck assemblies are held to post brackets using
5/8” (16 mm) diameter stainless steel bolts which have a load rating of 11,000 pounds. Truck assembly to
withstand 2,000 lb (907.2 kg) reaction load.
E. Bottom guide wheel assemblies: Each assembly shall consist of wheels of sufficient size per UL-325 and
ASTM F 2200, straddling bottom horizontal gate rail, allowing adjustment to maintain gate frame plumb
and in proper alignment. Attach one assembly to each guide post.
2.6 FITTINGS
A. General: Comply with ASTM F 626.
B. Barbed Wire Arms: To match existing, with clips, slots, or other means for attaching strands of barbed
wire, and means for attaching to posts , integral with post cap; for each post unless otherwise indicated,
and as follows:
C. Finish:
1. Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz. /sq. ft. (366 g /sq. m) zinc.
2.7 PRIVACY SLATS
A. Material: To match existing.
B. Color: To match existing.
2.8 BARBED WIRE
A. Steel Barbed Wire: Comply with ASTM A 121, for two-strand barbed wire, 0.099-inch- (2.51-mm-)
diameter line wire with 0.080-inch- (2.03-mm-) diameter, four-point round barbs spaced not more than 5
inches (127 mm) o.c.
1. Zinc Coating: Type Z, Class 3.
2.9 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout

complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior
applications.
B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled

expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring,
patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure
without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended in writing by
manufacturer, for exterior applications.

2.10 GATE OPERATORS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide OSCO GSLG-A heavy duty
slide gate operator or comparable product by one of the following:
a. DoorKing.
B. Description: Freestanding units.

a. Direct motor to gear reducer.
b. C-face brake.
c. #50 roller chain.
d. ¾ HP motor.
e. Steel housing with powder coat finish.
f. Weather resistant cabinet, post mounted.
C. Remote-Control Access Devices:

1. Radio-Control Transmitters: Manufacturer’s standard or compatible, programmable, momentary
contact, wireless transmitter, 318 Mhz controller.
2. Push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
3. 9 V alkaline battery.
4. Visor clip.
5. Provide Eight radio-control transmitters.
D. Master Control, Wired Controller: Manufacturer’s standard programmable, momentary-contact, three-

position, wired controller.
1. Connect to Owner dispatch center.
2. Push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
3. Wiring to each gate-operator
E. Vehicle Sensor Loop: Manufacturer’s standard or compatible loop for placement in asphalt paving.
1. Place on secure side of gate at north entrance.
2. Opens gate when the presence of a vehicle is detected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing,
earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Do not begin installation before final grading and mow strips are completed unless otherwise
permitted by Architect.
C. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet (152.5 m) or
line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures,
benchmarks, and property monuments.
D. Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements indicated.
E. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in firm,
undisturbed soil.
F. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.
1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position
during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.
2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp for
consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.
a. Concealed Concrete: Top 2 inches (50 mm) below grade to allow covering with surface
material.
G. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull posts at
changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 15 degrees or more.

H. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at spacing to match existing.
I. Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing.
Provide horizontal tension wire at the following locations:
1. Extended along top and bottom of fence fabric.
J. Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 1 inch (25.4 mm) between finish
grade or surface and bottom selvage unless otherwise indicated.
K. Privacy Slats: Install slats to match existing.
L. Barbed Wire: Install barbed wire uniformly spaced as indicated on Drawings. Pull wire taut, install
securely to extension arms, and secure to end post or terminal arms.
M. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening
without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed
means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and
lubricate where necessary.
N. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection,
distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range.
Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
3.2 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust gate
operators and control systems.

SECTION 32 84 23 - UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Furnish and install landscape irrigation system per submitted and approved plans as Described in
Contract Documents complete with accessories/fittings necessary for proper installation and
function.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's cut sheets for each element of system.
2. Parts lists for operating elements of system.
3. Manufacturer's printed literature on operation and maintenance of operating elements of system.
B. Product Data:
1. Irrigation plans for all new lawn and planter areas. Irrigation system shall be designed and
stamped by a Utah Licensed Landscape Architect. Contractor may use their own Landscape
Architect or have In-Site Design Group provide the irrigation drawings.
2. Contractor is responsible for costs associated with producing stamped irrigation plans.
3. Irrigation construction details shall also be submitted with the irrigation drawings.
4. All lawn areas shall have matched precipitation rates and have head to head coverage. All planter
areas shall be irrigated with Rainbird drip system using ½” XB tubing and Rainbird XB10, XB20
and PC-05 emitters. Contact In-Site Design Group and Springville City for further requirements
which need to be met when designing the irrigation system.
C. Quality Assurance / Control:

1. Results of service pressure test before beginning work on system.
2. Notification to In-Site Design Group of whether the irrigation system will be connected to the
culinary water line or a pressurized irrigation line.
D. Closeout:
1. Record Drawings:
a. As installation occurs, prepare accurate record drawing (electronic) to be submitted before
final inspection, including:
1) Detail and dimension changes made during construction.
2) Significant details and dimensions not shown in original Contract Documents.
3) Field dimensioned locations of valve boxes, manual drains, quick-coupler valves, control
wire runs not in mainline ditch, and both ends of sleeves.
4) Take dimensions from permanent constructed surfaces or edges located at or above
finish grade.
5) Take and record dimensions at time of installation.
b. Reduce copy of record drawing to half-size, color key circuits, and laminate both sides with 5
mil thick or heavier plastic. Mount on 1/4 inch plywood board. Drill two 1/2 inch holes at top
of board and hang on hooks next to controller.
2. Operations And Maintenance Manual Data:
a. Provide the following:
1) Instruction manual that contains complete instructions for system operation and
maintenance, including winterizing and watering schedule.
2) Complete instructions on how to drain entire backflow preventor or filter to prevent
freezing.
3) Provide complete watering schedule for grow-in and long term watering.
SPRINGVILLE CITY UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION

A. Qualifications:
1. Use only trained personnel familiar with required irrigation system installation procedures.
2. Perform installation under direction of foreman or supervisor with five years minimum experience in
sprinkling system installations.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials shall be in accordance with latest rules and regulations,
and other applicable state or local laws. Nothing in Contract Documents is to be construed to permit
work not conforming to these codes. Contractor shall apply for all permits and pay for the same.
C. Pre-Installation Conference: Schedule pre-installation conference before irrigation system installation

begins. Demonstrate or describe method to be used to maintain head spacing from concrete and to
stabilize heads.
A. During delivery, installation, and storage protect materials from damage and prolonged exposure to
sunlight.
1.5 SEQUENCING
A. Install sleeves before installation of cast-in-place concrete site elements, paving, etc.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Standard one year guarantee shall include:

1. Filling and repairing depressions and replacing plantings due to settlement of irrigation system
trenches.
2. Adjusting system to supply proper coverage of areas to receive water.
3. Repair and replace any damaged and/or malfunctioning part of the irrigation system.
4. Ensuring system can be adequately drained and winterized including freezing of RPZ backflow
device or filter.
1.7 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. After system is installed and approved, instruct Owner's designated personnel in complete operation and
maintenance procedures.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials:
1. Furnish the following items before Final Closeout Review:
a. Two heavy-duty keys for isolation valves.
b. Two quick coupler keys with brass hose swivel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Rock-Free Soil:

1. Backfill soil around PVC pipe.
2. Soil shall have rocks no larger than 1-1/2 inch in any dimension.
B. Pea Gravel:
1. For use around drains, valves, quick couplers, and rotor heads.
2. 1/2 inch maximum dimension, washed rock.
C. Sand: Fine granular material naturally produced by rock disintegration and free from organic material,
mica, loam, clay, and other deleterious substances.
D. Native Material: Soil native to project site free of wood and other deleterious materials and rocks over 1-
1/2 inches.
E. Topsoil: Imported or stockpiled topsoil material. Remove rocks, roots, sticks, clods, debris, and other
foreign matter over 1-1/2 inches longest dimension encountered during trenching.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Pipe, Pipe Fittings, And Connections:
B. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, and
capacities indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply
with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections;
provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in potable water systems. Where more
than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option.
C. Piping: Provide pipe fittings and accessories of same material and weight/class as pipes, with joining
method as indicated.
D. PVC Pipe: AWWA Class 200 Pipe for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
E. Ductile Iron Pipe: Polyethylene wrapped Ductile Iron Class 350, with cement mortar lining complying
with AWWA C104.
1. Fitting: Ductile iron AWWA C110; cement lined AWWA C104; and rubber-gasket joints, AWWA
C111.
2. Fittings NPS 4 to NPS 8: PVC pressure fittings complying with AWWA C907, for gasketed joints
and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
F. Pipe, Pipe Fittings and Connections:

1. Pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with Manufacturer's name, size, schedule,
type, and working pressure.
2. Pipe sizes shown on Drawings are minimum. Larger sizes may be substituted if at no additional
cost to Owner.
3. Pipe:
a. Pressure Lines: Class 200 Gasketed O-ring pipe for 4” mainline and Schedule 40 PVC for
mainline 3” and smaller.
b. Lateral Lines: Schedule 40 PVC.
c. Backflow Assembly Piping: Ductile Iron pipe, galv. pipe, copper or brass pipe (per Landscape
Architect) from 2’ before backflow device to 2’ past pressure reducer. Install necessary
fittings.
d. Quick Coupler Piping: Galvanized steel.
4. Fittings: 4” Mainline fittings shall be Harco (or approved equal), 3” and smaller mainline fittings
shall be Schedule 80 fittings except where detailed otherwise.
5. Sleeves for mainline and lateral lines:
a. Under Parking Area and Driveway Paving: Schedule 40 PVC Pipe.
b. All Other: Class 200 PVC Pipe.
c. Sleeve diameter shall be two times larger than pipe installed in sleeve.
6. Sleeves for control wiring:

a. Under parking area, driveway paving and other asphalt paved areas and inside buildings:
Schedule 80 PVC grey electrical conduit.
b. All Other: Class 200 PVC.
c. Sleeve diameter shall be two times larger than wire bundle installed in sleeve.
G. Sprinkler Heads:
1. Each type of head shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
2. Spray Heads and Rotary Nozzles in Lawn Areas:
a. Use the following:.
1) Rainbird: 1804 Series with MPR nozzles with PRS and SAM options.
2) Rainbird: 1804 Series with Rotary Nozzle (R17-24 and R18-24).
3. Gear Driven Rotor Pop-ups:
a. Use the following:
1) Rainbird: 5000 MPR series with appropriate nozzle.
H. Sprinkler Risers:
1. Pop-up rotor sprinkler heads shall have adjustable riser assembly consisting of a marlex street ell,
an 12” nipple, another marlex street ell, another nipple (length as req.) and one more marlex street
ell. These swing joint fittings shall be of schedule 40 PVC plastic and nipples schedule 80 gray
PVC unless otherwise designated on Drawings. Horizontal nipple parallel to side of lateral line
shall be 12 long minimum. All other nipples on swing joint riser shall be of length required for
proper installation of sprinkler heads.
2. Pop-up sprinkler heads and rotary nozzles shall have risers made up one of the following ways:
a. Risers for sprinkler heads 14 inches long minimum and 24 inches maximum.
1) Type Two Acceptable Products:
a) Rainbird: Swing Pipe with barbed fittings.
b) Equal as approved by Landscape Architect or Springville City before installation.
I. Automatic Irrigation Control Wiring, Controller:

1. Control wire shall be UF-UL listed, color coded PVC insulated copper conductor direct burial size
12 or PE insulated 12 AWG color coded wire. Do not use green color coded wire. Runs under
2000 linear feet may be 14 AWG color coded wire.
2. Waterproof Wire Connectors:
a. Type Two Acceptable Products:
1) DBY or DBR by 3M
2) 'One Step' 20111SP by King Safety
3. Equal as approved by Landscape Architect or Springville City before installation
4. Automatic controllers:
a. Category Approved Products.
1) Rainbird ESP Series:
a) Install grounding per manufactures specs. Failure to do this will void
manufacturers warranty
5. Automatic Rain Sensors: Per Landscape Architect or Springville City
6. Weather Station: Per Landscape Architect or Springville City
7. Pump: None
J.Valves:
1. Manual Drain Valves: Brass ball valve with brass 'T' handle on main lines.
2. Automatic Valves:
1) Rainbird: PEB-PRS-D or PESB-PRS-D series
2) Rainbird: XCZ-075 PRF or XCZ-PRB-100-COM Control Zone Kit
3) Equal as approved by Landscape Architect or Springville City before use.
3. Isolation Valves:
a. Category Approved Products:.
1) Resilient wedge (Waterous Brand) flanged gate valve with 2” square top key. Valves 2”
or smaller do not need to be flanged.
4. Backflow Preventor or Filter: As required by local code.
a. Equal as approved by Landscape Architect or Springville City before use.

5. Bronze Pressure Reducer: Install only if static pressure exceeds 110 PSI. Line size pressure
reducer and install per local code. Set to 95 psi or as required for system to operate properly.
Install above ground and inline with RPZ device or filter device.
6. Quick Coupling Valves and Keys:
1) Rainbird: 44LRC with SH-1 Swivel, (2) 44K Valve Keys and (2) 2049 Cover Keys (use
44NP if pressurized irrigation is used).
K. Valve Accessories:
1. Valve manifolds:
a. Pre-manufactured manifolds are not acceptable. Manifolds shall be custom built with
schedule 80 toe nipples, couplers, pipe and misc. fittings as necessary.
2. Valve Box Platforms:
a. Acceptable Products:
1) Orbit: 53000.
3. Plastic Valve Boxes And Extensions:
1) Rainbird.
2) Carson-Brookes.
4. Valve ID tags:
1) Rainbird.
2) Christy.
3) Equal as approved by Landscape Architect before use.
5. Valve Box Supports: Standard size fired clay paving bricks without holes.
L. Joint Restraint Harness:

1. Use a joint restraint harness wherever joints are not positively restrained by flanged fittings,
threaded fittings and/or thrust blocks. Thrust blocks must be on native undisturbed soil. If thrust
block cannot be installed on native undisturbed soil, install a joint restraint.
2. Thrust blocks are not needed if mechanical joint restraints are used. Use Leemco or Harco joint
restraints and fittings.
3. Use a joint restraint harness with transition fittings between metal and PVC pipe, where weak
trench banks do not allow the use of thrust blocks, or where extra support is required to retain a
fitting or joint.
4. Use bolts, nuts, retaining clamps, all-thread, or other joint restraint harness materials which are zinc
plated or galvanized.
5. Use on mainline pipe greater than or equal to 3-inch diameter or any diameter rubber gasketed
pipe.
M. Drip System
1. Approved Products.
a. Rainbird ½” XBS lateral tubing and ¼” distribution tubing per plans.
b. Rainbird: XB10, XB20 and PC-05 emitters, XCZ-075 PRF or XCZ-100-PRB-COM (flow kit w/
filters)
N. Other Components:
1. Provide all other components necessary to complete system and make operational.
2.3 MANUFACTURERS
A. Contact Information:
1. Carson Industries LLC, Glendora, CA www.carsonind.com.
2. Hunter Industries, San Marcos, CA www.hunterindustries.com.
3. King Safety Products, St Charles, MO www.kingsafety.com.

4. Nibco Inc, Elkhart, IN www.nibco.com.
5. Orbit Irrigation Products, Bountiful, UT www.orbitonline.com.
6. Plymouth Products, Div Ametek, Sheboygan, MI www.plymouthwater.com.
7. Rain Bird Sprinkler Manufacturing Corp, Glendora, CA www.rainbird.com.
8. Salco Products, Fontana, CA www.salcodrip.com.
9. Star Sight Innovations, Mountain View, WY www.starsightinnovations.com.
10. 3M, Austin, TX www.3m.com/elpd.
11. Toro Company, Irrigation Div, Riverside, CA www.toro.com.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS
A. To be pre-approved by general contractor and Alpine School District before bidding.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Perform pressure test at stub-out on main water line provided for
irrigation system at water meter location. Notify Architect (min. 60 days before contractor begins
irrigation system installation) of existing static pressure at the new water meter vault location.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Protection:
1. Repair or replace work of this Section damaged during course of the Work at no additional cost to
Owner. If damaged work is new, installer of original work shall perform repair or replacement.
2. Do not cut existing tree roots measuring over 2 inches in diameter in order to install irrigation lines.
Route main and lateral lines around existing trees as necessary.
3. All utilities shall be blue staked before digging. Any damage to utilities shall be repaired at expense
of the contractor with no additional cost to the owner.
B. Layout of Irrigation Heads:

1. Location of heads and piping shown on Drawings is approximate. Actual placement may vary
slightly as is required to achieve full, even coverage without spraying onto buildings, sidewalks,
parking lots, fences, etc.
2. During layout, consult with Landscape Architect to verify proper placement and make
recommendations, where revisions are advisable.
3. Minor adjustments in system layout will be permitted to avoid existing fixed obstructions.
4. Make certain changes from Contract Documents are shown on record drawings.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Trenching And Backfilling:

1. Pulling of pipe is not permitted.
2. Excavate trenches to specified depth. Remove rocks larger than 1-1/2 inch in any direction from
bottom of trench. Separate out rocks larger than 1-1/2 inch in any direction uncovered in trenching
operation from excavated material and remove from areas to receive landscaping.
3. Cover main line pipe with 6” of sand or rock free soil on top, bottom and sides of pipe as noted in
Contract Documents. Remainder of backfill to within 4 inches in lawn areas and 12” in planter
areas shall be rock-free soil as specified under PART 2 PRODUCTS. Top 4 inches of backfill in
lawn areas and top 12” of backfill in planter areas shall be amended topsoil as specified in Section
329113.

4. Do not cover pressure main, irrigation pipe, or fittings until Landscape Architect has inspected and
approved system.
B. Sleeving:
1. Sleeve water lines and control wires under walks and paving. Extend sleeves 18 inches minimum
beyond walk or pavement edge. Cover sleeve ends until pipes and wires are installed to keep
sleeve clean and free of dirt and debris.
2. Position sleeves with respect to buildings and other obstructions so pipe can be easily removed.
C. Grades And Draining:

1. In localities where winterization is required, grade piping so system can be completely drained or
blown out with compressed air. The irrigation system has been designed to be blown out with an
air compressor; however, manual drains shall be installed at isolation valve locations and other
areas as shown on contract documents. Perform the following:
a. Slope pipe to drain to isolation valve locations.
b. At these locations install manual drain per detail and the following:
1) 1” brass ball valve with “T” handle for manual drain. Do not use automatic drain valves.
2) Install 2 inch Class 200 PVC pipe over top of drain and cut at finish grade.
3) Provide rubber valve cap marker.
4) Provide two cubic foot pea gravel sump at outlet of each drain.
c. Slope pipes under parking areas or driveways to drain outside these areas.
d. Provide and install quick-coupling valves per plan for easy blowout of entire system.
D. Installation of Pipe:
1. Install pipe in manner to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by Manufacturer.
2. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, install main lines with minimum of 18” of cover based on
finished grade. All other lateral lines connecting pop-up rotor and pop-up sprays with minimum of
12 inches of cover based on finish grade.
3. Install pipe and wires under driveways or parking areas in specified sleeves 24” below finish grade
or as shown on Drawings.
4. Locate no sprinkler head closer than 6 inches from building foundation. Heads immediately
adjacent to mow strips, walks, or curbs shall be one inch below top of mow strip, walk, or curb and
have 2 inches clearance between head and mow strip, walk, or curb.
5. Cut plastic pipe square. Remove burrs at cut ends before installation so unobstructed flow will
result.
6. Make solvent weld joints as follows:
a. Do not make solvent weld joints if ambient temperature is below 45 deg F.
b. Clean mating pipe and fitting with clean, dry cloth and apply one coat of P-70 primer to each.
c. Apply uniform coat of 711 solvent to outside of pipe.
d. Apply solvent to fitting in similar manner.
e. Give pipe or fitting a quarter turn to insure even distribution of solvent and make sure pipe is
inserted to full depth of fitting socket.
f. Allow joints to set at least 24 hours before applying pressure to PVC pipe.
7. Tape threaded connections with teflon tape.
E. Thrust Blocks and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum
water-cementitious materials ratio.
1. Install thrust blocks on entire irrigation system per details and per Springville City specs.
2. Use thrust blocks for fittings on mainline pressure pipe 3 inch diameter or larger or any rubber
gasketed pipe.
3. Use a form to provide the appropriate amount and shape of concrete for the thrust block. Do not
cover the fitting with concrete. The entire fitting must be serviceable when the thrust block is
installed.
F. Joint Restraint Harness:

1. Install harness in the manner recommended by the manufacturer, in accordance with the drawings
these specifications and in accordance with accepted industry practices.

G. Control Valves and Controller:
1. Install valves in plastic boxes with reinforced heavy duty plastic covers. Locate valve boxes within
12 inches of sidewalks and shrub bed edges with tops at finish grade. Do not install more than two
valves in single box.
2. Valve boxes placed in planter areas shall be brown or tan in color. Valve boxes placed in lawn
areas shall be green in color. Valve boxes shall be capable of being bolted closed after
installation.
3. Place 3 inches minimum of pea gravel below bricks supporting valve boxes to drain box. Set valve
boxes over valve so all parts of valve can be reached for service. Set cover of valve box even with
finish grade. Valve box cavity shall be reasonably free from dirt and debris.
4. Wiring:
a. Tape control wire to side of main line every 10 feet. Where control wire leaves main or lateral
line, enclose it in Class 200 PVC conduit or Sch. 80 Grey electrical conduit as directed.
b. Use waterproof wire connectors at splices and locate all splices within valve boxes.
c. Use wire as noted on contract documents or an approved equal.
d. Run one spare common wire from panel continuously from valve to valve throughout system
similar to common wire for use as a replacement if a wire fails. Run one extra control wire per
valve box for use as a replacement if a wire fails. Spare wires shall be different colors and
shall be different color than other wires, except use of green wire is not acceptable. Mark
spare control wires in control box as unconnected wires. Extend spare control wires 30
inches and leave coiled in each valve box.
5. Power to controller to be supplied by Springville City. Springville City will dictate the exact location
for the Irrigation Controller. Springville City shall provide proper grounding for controller per
manufacturers written specifications. Irrigation contractor shall coordinate controller and sleeving
with Springville City and other trades. Please see electrical engineers plans and specs for
additional information.
6. See manufacturers specifications for grounding and surge protections information. Install
grounding for surge protection for irrigation controller, rain sensor, weather station, pump, etc. per
manufacturers written instructions. Contractor shall adhere to the manufacturers specifications
and/or electrical specifications for grounding installation.
H. Backflow Preventor or Filter:

1. Install 24 inches minimum from structures or hardscaping.
2. When installed adjacent to any structure, mount test cocks on side away from structure.
3. After installation, remove handles and turn over to Owner together with extra maintenance
materials.
4. Install backflow device or filter in an approved strong box with lock.
I. Sprinkler Heads:
1. Before installation of sprinkler heads, open control valves and use full head of water to flush out
system.
2. Set sprinkler heads and quick-coupling valves perpendicular to finish grade.
3. Do not install sprinklers using side inlets. Install using base inlets only, unless approved otherwise
in writing by Architect.
4. Set sprinkler heads 2” away from existing walks, curbs, and other paved areas and to grade by
using specified components or other method demonstrated in Pre-Construction Conference.
J.Drip Assembly:
1. Install pipe in manner to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by Manufacturer.
2. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, install lateral lines connecting drip tubing with minimum of
12 inches of cover based on finish grade.
3. Locate drip emitter on uphill side of plant within rootball zone.
4. Drip tubing shall be set on top of soil and fabric but underneath decorative cobble rock.
5. Drip tubing shall be stapled to ground at 6 foot maximum intervals and within 12 inches of
intersections (all directions).
6. Cut emitter tubing square. Remove burrs at cut ends before installation so unobstructed flow will
result.
7. Assemble as per Drawings for number of emitters, diffuser caps, root watering systems, etc. per
plant and per details.
8. For assembly using Rainbird tubing – Install per manufacturers specifications and per Drawing.
9. Flush system prior to attaching drip emitters.

10. Arrange valve stations to operate in an easy-to-view progressive sequence around project site.
Tag valves with waterproof labels showing final sequence station assignments.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic pipe joint construction is specified in Division 33 Section "Common Work Results for Utilities."
Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Join pressure piping according to the following:
1. Join ductile-iron pressure piping according to AWWA C660 or AWWA M41 for push-on joints.
2. Join ductile-iron special fittings according to AWWA C660 or AWWA M41 for push-on joints.
3. Join PVC pressure piping according to AWWA M23 for gasketed joints.
4. Join PVC water-service piping according to ASTM D 2855 for solvent-cemented joints.
C. Join dissimilar pipe materials with pressure-type couplings.
A. Notify the Construction Project Representative three (3) days in advance of testing.
B. Pipelines jointed with rubber gaskets or threaded connections may be subjected to a pressure test at any
time after partial completion of backfill. Pipelines jointed with solvent-welded PVC joints shall be allowed
to cure at least 24 hours before testing.
C. Subsections of mainline pipe may be tested independently, subject to the review of the Construction
Project Representative.
D. Furnish clean, clear water, pumps, labor fittings, and equipment necessary to conduct test or retests.
E. Hydrostatic Pressure Test:
1. Subject solvent-weld mainline pipe to a continuous hydrostatic pressure equal to 150 PSI for two
hours. Test with mainline components installed.
2. Backfill to prevent pipe from moving under pressure. Expose couplings and fittings.
3. Leakage will be detected by visual inspection. Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, or
appurtenance. Repeat the test until the pipe passes test.
4. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited.
F. Volumetric Leakage Test:
1. Backfill to prevent pipe from moving under pressure. Expose couplings and fittings.
2. Purge all air from the pipeline before test.
3. Subject mainline pipe to an operating pressure of 150 PSI for two hours. Maintain constant
pressure. The amount of additional water pumped in during the test shall not exceed 1.52 gallons
per 100 joints of 3-inch diameter pipe, 1.96 gallons per 100 joints of 4-inch diameter pipe, and 2.90
gallons per 100 joints of 6-inch diameter pipe. Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve or
appurtenance. Repeat the test until the pipe passes test.
4. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited.
G. Operational Test:
1. Activate each remote control valve in sequence from controller. The Construction Project
Representative will visually observe operation, water application patterns, and leakage.
2. Replace defective remote control valve, solenoid, wiring, or appurtenance to correct operational
deficiencies.
3. Replace, adjust, or move water emission devices to correct operational or coverage deficiencies.

4. Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, sprinkler, or appurtenance to correct leakage problems.
Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited.
5. Repeat test(s) until each lateral passes all tests. Repeat tests, replace components, and correct
deficiencies at no additional cost to the Owner.
H. Inspections: A certified water auditor approved by Springville City and/or Landscape Architect will review
irrigation system before substantial completion (a complete audit with catch cans is not necessary unless
requested by Springville City). Upon approval of irrigation system, reviewer will provide signed
acceptance certificate to be included in Operations and Maintenance Manual. Certificate will include
name and signature of reviewer, reviewer's company, date of review, and reviewer's telephone number.
Contractor shall bear the cost of any fees charged by the certified water auditor.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust sprinkler heads to proper grade when turf is sufficiently established to allow walking on it without
appreciable harm. Such lowering and raising of sprinkler heads shall be part of original contract with no
additional cost to Owner.
B. Adjust sprinkler heads (install additional heads if necessary) for proper distribution and trim so spray
does not fall on buildings. Adjust sprinkler heads for proper distribution and trim so spray is minimized
on sidewalks or parking areas. Install van nozzles where necessary. Adjust quantity and size of drip
emitters for plants as necessary depending on how much, if any, overspray from lawn areas falls into
planter areas. Contractor is responsible to make sure plants and lawn areas are not over or under
watered.
C. Adjust watering time of valves to provide proper amounts of water to turf and plants.

SECTION 32 90 01 - COMMON PLANTING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Common procedures and requirements for landscaping work.
1. Section 32 05 01: Common Earthwork Requirements.
2. Section 32 84 23: Underground Irrigation.
A. Qualifications:
1. Trained personnel familiar with required planting procedures and Contract Documents shall
perform planting.
2. Planting shall be performed under direction of foreman or supervisor with minimum five years
experience in landscape installations.
B. Pre-Installation Conferences:
1. Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 31 22 13.
2. Schedule planting pre-installation conference after completion of Fine Grading specified in Section
31 22 16, but before beginning landscape work. In addition to requirements of specs:
a. Establish responsibility for maintenance of new landscaping during all phases of construction
period.
b. Prepare two typical landscape planting excavations and conduct percolation test to verify that
water drains away within two hours. Discuss results of percolation tests with Landscape
Architect and Owner's representative.
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of Manufacturer. Protect
materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site.
B. Deliver sod, plants, trees, and shrubs and other plants in healthy and vigorous condition and store in
location on site where they will not be endangered and where they can be adequately watered and kept
in healthy and vigorous condition.
1.4 SEQUENCING
A. Do not plant trees, shrubs or other plants until major construction operations are completed. Do not
commence landscaping work until work of Sections 31 22 16 and 32 84 23 has been completed and
approved.
B. Coordinate installation of planting materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant
material required.
SPRINGVILLE CITY COMMON PLANTING REQUIREMENTS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS
A. To be pre-approved by general contractor and Springville City before bidding.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect site and Contract Documents to become thoroughly acquainted with locations of irrigation,
ground lighting, and utilities. Repair damage to these and other items adjacent to landscaping caused
by work of this Section or replace at no additional cost to Owner.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Before proceeding with work, verify dimensions and quantities. Report variations between Drawings and
site to Landscape Architect before proceeding with landscape work.
1. Plant totals are for convenience of Contractor only and are not guaranteed. Verify amounts shown
on Drawings.
2. All planting indicated on Drawings is required unless indicated otherwise.
B. Protection:
1. Take care in performing landscaping work to avoid conditions that will create hazards. Post signs
or barriers as required.
2. Provide adequate means for protection from damage through excessive erosion, flooding, heavy
rains, etc. Repair or replace damaged areas.
3. Keep site well drained and landscape excavations dry.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Hand excavate as required.
B. Maintain grade stakes until parties concerned mutually agree upon removal.
C. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill or adverse drainage
conditions, notify Architect before planting.
A. Inspection:
1. Landscape Architect will inspect landscaping installation approximately two weeks before
Substantial Completion. Replace landscaping that is dead or appears dead as directed by
Architect within 10 days of notification and before Substantial Completion.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Replace damaged plantings at no additional cost to Owner.

3.7 CLEANING
A. Immediately clean up soil or debris spilled onto pavement and dispose of deleterious materials.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect planted areas against traffic or other use immediately after planting is completed by placing
adequate warning signs and barricades.
B. Provide adequate protection of planted areas against trespassing, erosion, and damage of any kind.
Remove this protection after Architect has accepted planted areas.

SECTION 32 91 13 - FINISH GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Perform finish grading and soil preparation work required to prepare site for installation of
landscaping as described in Contract Documents.
2. Furnish and implement top soil as described in Contract Documents.
3. Furnish and apply soil amendments and conditioners as described in Contract Documents.
1. Section 31 10 00: Site Clearing.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society For Testing And Materials:

1. ASTM 1557-02, 'Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort.'
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Chemical / nutrient analysis of imported top soil.
2. Product literature and chemical / nutrient analysis of soil amendments, conditioners and fertilizers.
B. Samples: Sample of soil amendments and conditioner for approval before delivery to site. Include
product analysis list.
C. Quality Assurance / Control:

1. Delivery slips indicating amount of soil amendments and conditioner delivered to Project site.
2. Submit test on imported topsoil by licensed laboratory before use. Imported topsoil shall meet
minimum specified requirements and be approved by Architect before use.
3. Submit report stating location of source of imported topsoil and account of recent use.
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 31 22 13.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil:
1. A topsoil test/report needs to be provided by the Landscape Contractor. Topsoil used in
landscaped areas, whether imported or from site, shall be fertile, loose, friable soil meeting
following criteria:
a. Chemical Characteristics:
1) Acidity / alkalinity range: pH 5.5 to 8.0
SPRINGVILLE CITY FINISH GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION

2) Soluble Salts: less than 3.0 mmhos/cm
3) Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR): less than 6.0
4) Organic Matter: greater than two percent
b. Physical Characteristics:
1) Gradation as defined by USDA triangle of physical characteristics as measured by
hydrometer.
a) Sand: 15 to 60 percent.
b) Silt: 10 to 60 percent.
c) Clay: 5 to 30 percent.
2) Clean and free from toxic minerals and chemicals, noxious weeds, rocks larger than 1/2
inch in any dimension, and other objectionable materials.
3) Soil shall not contain more than 2 percent by volume of rocks measuring over 3/32 inch
in largest size.
2. When calculating quantities for topsoil and amendments, a compaction factor of 15% should be
added therefore instead of adding just 4” of topsoil in lawn areas for example, the contractor will
really be responsible for spreading 4.7” of topsoil in lawn areas. The same rule applies for soil
amendments in lawn and planter areas.
3. Incorporate the following soil amendments/conditioners into topsoil used from site and/or imported
topsoil meeting the above specifications as well as the following:
a. Acceptable Fertilizers And Application Rates:
1) Type(s) and rate(s) as necessary based on Topsoil Testing Report of imported and/or
on-site top soil.
2) Equal as approved by Landscape Architect before installation.
b. Acceptable Soil Amendments and Conditioners And Application Rates (Note: topsoil and soil
amendments/conditioners do not need to be installed in landscape areas without plants and
where only cobble rock and boulders are shown) :
1) The contractor shall install organic matter/soil conditioner based on the soil report. This
material shall be incorporated into the top 4” of imported topsoil.
2) Type One Acceptable Products.
a) “Soil Pep” and Utelite Soil Conditioner
~ In lawn areas, mix 4” depth of imported topsoil with soil amendments per soils
test recommendations.
~ In planter beds, see planting details and notes for soil amendment procedures.
b) EPA Class 'A' co-compost or compost with SAR less than 3.0, EC less than 4.0,
and CN ratio of 15 to 25:1 passing through 1/2 inch mesh screen or other product
approved by Architect before use. See Section 016000. Use at same rate as “Soil
Pep”.
c) Equal as approved by Landscape Architect before installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not commence work of this Section until grading tolerances specified in Section 31 22 16 are met.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection: Protect utilities and site elements from damage.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. Disk, till, or aerate with approved agricultural aerator to depth of 4 inches in lawn areas and 12” in
planter areas. Cross rip or till subgrade before placing topsoil in all areas.
2. Seven days maximum before beginning planting:
a. Loosen area 4 inches deep, dampen thoroughly, and cultivate to properly break up clods and
lumps.
b. Rake area to remove clods, rocks, weeds, roots, and debris.
c. Grade and shape landscape area to bring surface to true uniform planes free from
irregularities and to provide drainage and proper slope to catch basins.
3. Limit use of heavy equipment to areas no closer than 6 feet from building or other permanent
structures. Use hand held tillers for preparation of subsoil in areas closer then 6 feet.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Site Tolerances:
1. Total Topsoil Depth:
a. Lawn Planting Areas: 4 inches minimum plus depth of amendments/soil conditioner.
b. Shrub Planting Areas: Amend planter pits per details and notes.
2. Finish grade of planting areas before planting and after addition of soil additives shall be specified
distances below top of adjacent pavement of any kind:
a. Sodded Areas: 1-3/4 inches to 2 inches below.
b. Shrub Areas: 4 inches below in 3 inch deep Decorative Cobble Rock and Bark Mulch areas.
B. Do not expose or damage existing shrub or tree roots.
C. Distribute approved topsoil. Remove organic material, rocks and clods greater than 1/2 inch in any
dimension, and other objectionable materials.
D. Where topsoil depth is 12 inches or greater, place topsoil in layers not to exceed 12 inches and, to
prevent settling, compact to 85 percent relative density in accordance with ASTM D 1557. Do not place
topsoil whose moisture content makes it prone to compaction during placement process.
E. Slope grade away from building for 12 feet minimum from walls at slope of 1/2 inch in 12 inches
minimum unless otherwise noted. High point of finish grade at building foundation shall be 6 inches
minimum below finish floor level. Direct surface drainage in manner indicated on Drawings by molding
surface to facilitate natural run-off of water. Fill low spots and pockets with topsoil and grade to drain
properly.
F. Add specified soil amendments at specified rates to lawn and planter areas. Roto-till or otherwise mix
amendments evenly into top 4 inches of topsoil in lawn areas and into top 12 inches in other planter
areas. Incorporate and leach soil amendments which require leaching, such as gypsum, within such
time limits that soil is sufficiently dry to allow proper application of fertilizer, soil amendments and
conditioners.
G. After landscape areas have been prepared, take no heavy objects over them except lawn rollers.
Immediately before planting lawn and with topsoil in semi-dry condition, roll areas that are to receive
lawn in two directions at approximately right angles with water ballast roller weighing 100 to 300 lbs,
depending on soil type. Rake or scarify and cut or fill irregularities that develop as required until area is
true and uniform, free from lumps, depressions, and irregularities.

SECTION 32 92 23 - SODDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Furnish and install sodded lawn as described in Contract Documents.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Assurance / Control:

1. Written certification confirming lawn seed quality and mix.
A. Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod in accordance with requirements of 'American Sod Producers (ASPA)
Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials and Transplanting / Installing.'
B. Cut and lift sod by method acceptable to Landscape Architect. Cut sod in pieces approximately 3/4 to one inch
thick. Roll or fold sod so it may be lifted and handled without breaking or tearing and without loss of soil.
C. Schedule deliveries to coincide with topsoil operations and laying. Keep storage at job site to minimum without
causing delays.
1. Deliver, unload, and store sod on pallets within 24 hours of being lifted.
2. Do not deliver small, irregular or broken pieces of sod.
D. During wet weather, allow sod to dry sufficiently to prevent tearing during lifting and handling. During dry
weather, protect sod from drying before installation. Water as necessary to insure vitality and to prevent excess
loss of soil in handling. Sod that dries out before installation will be rejected.
1.4 SEQUENCING
A. Do not commence work of this Section until work of Sections 32 91 13 and 32 93 00 has been completed and
approved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Certified Sod:
1. Superior sod grown from certified, high quality, seed of known origin or from plantings of certified grass
seedlings or stolons:
a. Assure satisfactory genetic identity and purity.
b. Assure over-all high quality and freedom from noxious weeds or an excessive amount of other crop
and weedy plants at time of harvest.
2. Sod shall be composed of three varieties minimum of Kentucky Bluegrass.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SODDING

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Site Tolerances: Final grade of soil after sodding of lawn areas is complete shall be approx. one inch below top
of adjacent curbing, edging or pavement of any kind.
B. Laying of Sod:
1. Lay sod during growing season. Sodding during dry summer period, at freezing temperatures, or over
frozen soil is not acceptable.
2. Lay sod within 36 hours of being lifted.
3. Lay sod in rows with joints staggered. Butt sections closely without overlapping or leaving gaps between
sections. Cut out irregular or thin sections with a sharp knife.
4. Lay sod flush with adjoining existing sodded surfaces.
5. Do not sod slopes steeper than 3:1. Consult with Architect for alternate treatment.
C. After Sodding Is Complete:

1. Roll horizontal surface areas in two directions perpendicular to each other.
2. Repair and re-roll areas with depressions, lumps, or other irregularities. Heavy rolling to correct
irregularities in grade will not be permitted.
3. Water sodded areas immediately after laying sod to obtain moisture penetration through sod into top 4
inches of topsoil.
A. Inspection:
1. Sodded areas will be accepted at final inspection if:
a. Sodded areas are properly established.
b. Sod is free of bare and dead spots and is without weeds.
c. No surface soil is visible when grass has been cut to height of 2 inches.
d. Sodded areas have been mowed a minimum of twice.
2. Areas sodded after November 1st will be accepted following spring (May 1st) approximately one month
after start of growing season if specified conditions have been met.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SODDING

SECTION 32 93 00 - PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Furnish and install landscaping plants as described in Contract Documents.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Nursery & Landscape Association / American National Standards Institute:

1. ANLA / ANSI Z60.1-2004, 'American Standard for Nursery Stock.'
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Top dressing decorative cobble rock and bark mulch for approval before delivery to site.
A. Deliver healthy and vigorous trees, shrubs and other plant material.
1. Do not prune before delivery, except as approved by Landscape Architect.
2. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, whipping, and other handling and
tying damage.
3. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy natural shape.
4. Provide protective covering during delivery.
B. Handle balled stock by root ball or container. Do not drop trees and shrubs during delivery.
C. Deliver trees, shrubs and other plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install
immediately.
1. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set planting materials in shade and protect
from weather and mechanical damage.
2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, saw dust, or other acceptable material
approved by Architect. Do not place on pavement.
3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
4. Water root systems of trees and shrubs stored on site with fine mist spray. Water as often as
necessary to maintain root systems in moist condition.
1.5 SEQUENCING
A. Do not commence work of this Section until work of Section 32 91 13 has been completed and
approved.
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. Provide written warranties confirming following:
SPRINGVILLE CITY PLANTS

1. Furnished shrubs, perennials and ornamental grasses guaranteed to live and remain in strong,
vigorous, and healthy condition for 1 year minimum from date landscape installation is accepted as
complete.
2. Trees guaranteed to live and remain in strong, vigorous, and healthy condition for one year from
date landscape installation is accepted as complete.
1.7 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Provide written instructions covering maintenance requirements by Owner for first 60 days of guarantee
period beyond Contract maintenance period specified in Section 32 01 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Plants:
1. Conform to requirements of Plant List and Key on Drawings and to ANSI Z60.1.
2. Nomenclature: Plant names used in Plant List conform to 'Standardized Plant Names' by American
Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature except in cases not covered. In these instances,
follow custom of nursery trade. Plants shall bear a tag showing the genus, species, and variety of
at least 30 percent of each species delivered to site.
3. Quality:
a. Plants shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, free from plant disease, insect pests or their eggs,
noxious weeds, and have healthy, normal root systems. Container stock shall be well
established and free of excessive root-bound conditions.
b. Do not prune plants or top trees prior to delivery.
c. Plant materials shall be subject to approval by Architect as to size, health, quality, and
character.
d. Bare root trees are not acceptable.
e. Provide plant materials from licensed nursery or grower.
4. Measurements:
a. Measure height and spread of specimen plant materials with branches in their normal position
as indicated on Drawings or Plant List.
b. Measurement should be average of plant, not greatest diameter. For example, plant
measuring 15 inches widest direction and 9 inches in narrowest would be classified as 12 inch
stock.
c. Plants properly trimmed and transplanted should measure same in every direction.
d. Measure caliper of trees 6 inches above surface of ground.
e. Where caliper or other dimensions of plant materials are omitted from Plant List, plant
materials shall be normal stock for type listed.
f. Plant materials larger than those specified may be supplied, with prior written approval of
Architect, and:
1) If complying with Contract Document requirements in all other respects.
2) If at no additional cost to Owner.
3) If sizes of roots or balls are increased proportionately.
5. Shape and Form:
a. Plant materials shall be symmetrical or typical for variety and species and conform to
measurements specified in Plant List.
b. Well grown material will generally have height equal to or greater than spread. However,
spread shall not be less than 2/3's of height.
B. Planting Mix in Plant Pits: See planting details.
C. Planting Tablets: Do not use.
D. Tree Stakes:

a. 2 inch diameter Lodgepole Pine.
b. Equal as approved by Landscape Architect or Springville City before installation.
E. Tree Staking Ties:

a. 32 inch Cinch-Tie tree ties by V.I.T. Products Inc, Escondido, CA www.vitproducts.com.
b. Equal as approved by Landscape Architect or Springville City before installation.
F. Pre-Emergent Herbicide:
1. Category Four Approved Products (contractor is responsible to verify that selected pre-emergent
herbicide is suitable for use on all plant material specified for this project). See Section 01 6000 for
definitions of Categories.
a. Chipco Dimension Granular by The Andersons Inc, Maumee, IL www.andersonsinc.com.
b. Elanco XL2G granular by Crop Data Management Systems, Marysville, CA www.cdms.net.
c. Ronstar G granular by Bayer CropScience, Monheim, Germany www.bayercropscience.com.
d. Surflan AS liquid by United Phosphorous Inc, Trenton, NJ www.upi-usa.com.
e. Oryzalin 4 A.S. liquid by FarmSaver, Seattle, WA www.farmsaver.com.
f. Equal as approved by Landscape Architect or Springville City before installation.
G. Weed Barrier:
a. DeWitt #5 20 year woven polypropylene weed barrier.
b. Equal as approved by Landscape Architect before bidding.
H. Cobble Rock Mulch:

1. Acceptable Products:
a. “Southtown” Crushed Stone in 3/4” minus screened size from Nephi Sandstone in Nephi,
Utah.
H. Shredded Bark Mulch:

a. Shredded bark mulch (3” depth).
J. Edging:
a. Bend-A-Board Edging. 1” x 4” size and “Brown” in color.
K. Mowcurb:
a. 4” x 6” flat concrete mowcurb per plans.
PART 1 - EXECUTION
1.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before proceeding with work, check and verify dimensions and quantities. Report variations between
Drawings and site to Landscape Architect before proceeding with work of this Section.
B. Plant totals are for convenience only and are not guaranteed. Verify amounts shown on Drawings. All
planting indicated on Drawings is required unless indicated otherwise.

1.2 PREPARATION
A. Layout individual tree, shrub and other plant locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations
and outline areas. Secure Landscape Architect's acceptance before planting. Make minor adjustments
as may be requested.
1.3 INSTALLATION
A. Excavation:
1. If underground construction work or obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting holes,
Landscape Architect will select alternate locations.
2. Plant Excavation Size:
a. Diameter: Three times diameter of root ball or container minimum.
b. Depth:
1) Perennials: Twelve inch depth (see detail)
2) Shrubs and ornamental grasses: Depth of rootball in container (see details).
3) Trees: Depth of rootball in burlap or container (see detail).
3. Roughen sides and bottoms of excavations.
B. Planting:
1. Before planting, test two typical planting excavations with water and verify that water drains away
within two hours. Inform Architect in writing if water does not drain properly. Do not plant trees,
shrubs or other plants in holes that do not properly drain.
2. See details for additional information on planting procedures.
3. Make adjustments in positions of plants as directed by Landscape Architect.
4. Thoroughly water trees, shrubs and other plants immediately after planting.
5. At base of each tree in lawn areas, leave min. 48 inch diameter circle free of any grass or plants for
ornamental trees and leave min. 60 inch diameter circle free of any grass or plants for large shade
trees and large evergreen trees.
C. Supports for New Trees: See details for more information.
D. Post Planting Weed Control:

1. Apply specified pre-emergent herbicide to shrub and perennial planting areas and grass-free areas
at tree bases after completion of planting.
2. Areas shall be free of existing weed growth prior to application of herbicide.
E. Weed Barrier Fabric:

1. Before placing weed barrier fabric, bark and cobble rock, apply a pre-emergent herbicide to soil.
After placing weed barrier fabric, plants, bark and cobble rock, rake cobble rock and bark smooth,
wet to entire depth, allow to dry, then apply a secondary application of pre-emergent to top of
cobble rock and bark mulch.
2. Before planting and after application of herbicide in shrub beds, apply covering of specified weed
barrier fabric.
3. Achieve 100 percent coverage over ground areas.
4. Overlap seams 6 inches minimum and fold over as per Contract Documents.
5. Staple at 5 feet on center each way with two at each corner.
F. Mulching:
1. After initial application of herbicide, mulch tree, shrub, grass and perennial planting areas with layer
of Decorative Cobble Rock or Bark Mulch as specified. Apply a secondary pre-emergent herbicide
application once plants, bark and cobble rock have been installed as noted above.
2. Cover grass-free area at tree bases with weed barrier and 3” inches of bark mulch.
3. Place top dressing mulch to uniform depth for a neat finished appearance.

G. Mowcurb:
1. Compact subgrade and soil under mowcurb to a minimum of 85%.
2. Install extruded concrete mowcurb per plans including
3. Provide control joints at 10’ O.C.

SECTION 33 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Piping joining materials.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Sleeves.
4. Identification devices.
5. Grout.
6. Piping system common requirements.
7. Equipment installation common requirements.
8. Concrete bases.
9. Metal supports and anchorages.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather
conditions.
B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact
by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within
unheated shelters.

1. Dielectric fittings.
2. Identification devices.
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
B. Steel Piping Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and
that certification is current.
C. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness, unless
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
SPRINGVILLE CITY COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless
otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
H. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
2.2 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Dielectric Fittings, General: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with
separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Company.
c. Epco Sales, Inc.
d. Hart Industries, International, Inc.
e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
g. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
3. Description: Factory fabricated, union, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
a. Pressure Rating: [150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum] [250 psig (1725 kPa)] at 180 deg F (82
deg C).
b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Company.
c. Epco Sales, Inc.
d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
e. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
3. Description: Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65
to DN 100) and larger.
a. Pressure Rating: [150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum] [175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum] [300
psig (2070 kPa)].
b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint
copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D. Dielectric Couplings:

a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corporation.
c. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
3. Description: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, NPS 3
(DN 80) and smaller.
a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
b. End Connections: Threaded.
E. Dielectric Nipples:
a. Perfection Corporation.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c. Victaulic Company.
d. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
3. Description: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining.
a. Pressure Rating: [300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C)] <Insert pressure and
temperature>.
b. End Connections: Threaded or grooved.
2.3 SLEEVES
A. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations are specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals
for Plumbing Piping."
B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
D. Cast-Iron Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for
attaching to wooden forms.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped.
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power
characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
B. Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap-on type. Include
color-coding according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-coded, pressure-sensitive-

vinyl type with permanent adhesive.
D. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Full-band pipe markers, extending 360
degrees around pipe at each location.
E. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe
markers, at least three times letter height and of length required for label.

F. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application
length.
1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions of
flow, or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
G. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive vinyl tape, at least 3
mils (0.08 mm) thick.
1. Width: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches (150 mm);
2-1/2 inches (65 mm) for larger pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-
inch (13-mm) sequenced numbers. Include 5/32-inch (4-mm) hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick, [polished brass] [or] [aluminum].
2. Material: 0.0375-inch- (1-mm-) thick stainless steel.
3. Material: 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick plastic laminate with 2 black surfaces and a white inner layer.
4. Material: Valve manufacturer's standard solid plastic.
5. Size: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) in diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Shape: As indicated for each piping system.
I. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link or beaded chain; or brass S-hooks.
J. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate

engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening.
1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment
identification.
2. Thickness: [1/16 inch (1.6 mm)] [1/8 inch (3 mm)], unless otherwise indicated.
3. Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), for units up to 20 sq. in. (130 sq. cm) or 8 inches (200 mm) in
length, and 1/8 inch (3 mm) for larger units.
4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.
K. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes:
1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.
2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above.
5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and
speed.
7. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches (65 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6
inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.
2.5 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and
recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DIELECTRIC FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Dry Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric unions.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Dielectric flanges.

B. Wet Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric couplings or dielectric nipples.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Dielectric nipples.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and utilities Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems.
Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump
sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on the Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or
parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
E. Install piping at indicated slopes.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
I. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other wet areas [2
inches (50 mm)] <Insert dimension> above finished floor level.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
a. [PVC] [Steel] Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger, penetrating gypsum-board
partitions.
L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements.
3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and utilities Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and
clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings
and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is
specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do
not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
G. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end pipe coupling with coupling housing, gasket, lubricant,
and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end.
Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy
(0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32.
I. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using
copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
J. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Assemble joints for plain-end copper tube and mechanical pressure seal fitting
with proprietary crimping tool to according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
K. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according
to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings
according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings
according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.
L. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
M. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
N. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper
towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
O. Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's
3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Install dielectric fittings at connections of dissimilar metal pipes.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect
equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Extend grease
fittings to an accessible location.
C. Install equipment to allow right of way to piping systems installed at required slope.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.
1. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot
noninsulated piping.
2. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following:
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units. Mark each
pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious.
c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors or enter inaccessible enclosures.
d. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of
equipment.
1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) high for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24
inches (610 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) high for distances up to 72 inches (1800 mm), and
proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to
three-fourths of size of principal lettering.
2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish among multiple units,
inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of
hazards and improper operations.
C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions.
3.7 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written
instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in
both directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install
dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and
anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use [3000-psi (20.7-MPa)] <Insert strength>, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and
reinforcement as specified in [Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."] [Section 033053
"Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."]
3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support
and anchor piped utility materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.9 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and
anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.

SECTION 33 11 16 – WATER PIPE INSTALLATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS:
A. Requirements for pipe and fittings of the type, class and size designated for the facility’s culinary
water system in these specifications. All pipe and materials furnished and installed for culinary use
shall comply with National Sanitary Foundation (NSF) Standard 61. Also, all plastic pipe must be
approved by the NSF for potable water use and shall be stamped "NSF-PW" on the pipe indicating
such approval.
B. Piping layout on the approved Contractor’s drawings shall be considered diagrammatic for all piping
not shown with detailed dimensions.
C. With written permission from the Engineer, piping alignment may be varied from that shown on the
approved Contractor’s drawings, to avoid structural or mechanical difficulties, or to avoid the work of
other contractors. The Contractor shall complete all Work in accordance with the best practice of the
trade, and to the satisfaction of the Owner.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Mains: Water distribution pipes, located in streets or rights-of-ways, to which water service
connections are made for users of the system.
B. Taps: The actual connection made to water mains, which includes drilling an opening into the main,
threading, installing a tapping saddle when appropriate, and installing a valve into the opening.
C. Saddle: A fitting placed on a pipe to reinforce the pipe wall, through which, a tapping hole is drilled.
D. Fittings: Any component of a pipeline, excluding the pipe itself and vales and meters, which is used
for connecting pipe sections; changing line direction or size; connecting meters, valves, tanks, etc.; or
starting or terminating pipelines.
E. Runs - Any identified section of a pipeline.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (PVC)
A. Shall be rigid thermoplastic pressure (Class Rated) pipe meeting the requirements of ANSI/AWWA
Standard C900 or C905 (latest revision) NSF approved with bell-end or coupling joints fitted with
positive sealing elastomeric gaskets, except as noted. The pressure class or the dimensional ratio
and the size shall be as shown on the Drawings. For sizes less than 4 inches OD, PVC pipe shall be
"Schedule Rated" material meeting the requirements of ASTM D1785 of the schedule and size shown
on the Drawings.
B. PVC pipe, 2-inch and smaller, shall be jointed by solvent welding. No disturbance of the joints,
including backfill, will be allowed until solvent welded joints are cured. PVC pipe greater than 2-inch
diameter shall be joined by means of gasketed joints.
2.2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (DI)
A. Buried ductile iron pipe shall be Pressure Class 350 and Thickness Class 51, and shall meet
requirements of ANSI/AWWA C-151. Pipe joints shall be bell and spigot or mechanical, meeting
requirements of ANSI/AWWA C-111. Sleeve type flexible couplings must be shown on the approved
Contractor’s drawings where required.
B. Exposed ductile iron pipe, shall be Pressure Class 350 and Thickness Class 53, and shall meet
requirements of ANSI/AWWA Standard C-151. Pipe joints shall be flanged or MTC (mechanical type
couplings, which shall be Victaulic grooved couplings, as manufactured by Victaulic Company of
America or approved equal). Flanged joints shall meet requirements of ANSI/AWWA C-115, and
MTC joints shall meet requirements of ANSI/AWWA C-606. Sleeve type flexible couplings must be
shown on the approved Contractor’s drawings where required.
SPRINGVILLE CITY WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

C. The interior surface of all DI pipe shall be coated with a standard coating of cement-mortar in
accordance with ANSI/AWWA Standard C-104. Field coating of DI pipe will not be acceptable.
2.3 HDPE PIPE
A. PE Pipe for pressure lines shall be smooth, solid wall, high density polyethylene pipe manufactured
from PE 3408 Material conforming to ASTM D1248, Type III, Class C, Cat. 5, Grade P34 with a P3408
rating from the Plastic Pipe Institute. Fittings for this pipe shall be molded from a polyethylene
compound equal to or exceeding the properties of the pipe being supplied.
2.4 FITTINGS
A. PVC fittings for PVC pipe sizes 2 through 4 inches shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C-907.
Fittings for larger size PVC and DI pipe in underground service shall be DI and shall meet the
requirements of NSF 61 and ANSI/AWWA C-110 with a standard coating cement mortar on the interior
surfaces which complies with AWWA C-104. DI fittings meeting these requirements may be used with
PVC piping 4-inch and larger.
B. Fittings for exposed ductile iron piping shall be push on bell and spigot or mechanical joint in
accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C-111, flanged in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C-
115, or mechanical type coupling (Victaulic) couplings, in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C-606.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. Unless otherwise required in these specifications or on the approved Contractor’s drawings, all bolting
materials for underground pipe, fittings, valves, and components shall be industry standard. Bolting
materials for exposed piping above ground or in underground vaults and manholes shall be 316
stainless steel unless otherwise shown on approved Contractor’s drawings.
2.6 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
A. Flexible couplings for underground DI and PVC pipe sizes 2 through 16 inch shall be fabricated of steel
or ductile iron. For pipe sizes larger than 16 inch, flexible couplings shall be steel. Sleeves shall have
smooth inside taper and there shall be no surface irregularities on any sealing surface. Gaskets shall
be suitable for the project application. Coupling components shall be factory coated with an FDA
approved epoxy coating, applied to an average 12 mil thickness. All flexible couplings shall meet the
minimum requirements of Smith Blair 400 series. Flexible couplings on exposed pipe shall be steel,
unless otherwise approved by the City.
2.7 FLANGES
A. 3”-12” Compact flanged fittings shall be ductile iron and shall be produced in accordance with laying
lengths specified in ANSI/AWWA C10/A21.10. Flange surface shall be faced and drilled in accordance
with ANSI Class 125 B16.1.
1. Nominal body thickness shall be Manufacturer’s Standard, but shall not be less than those specified
in ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 “Standards for Ductile Iron Compact Fittings”.
2. Flange thickness shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Standards. Working pressure
rating shall be 250 psi for water.
3. Fittings shall be made in the United States of America and shall not have been refurbished or
reworked by anyone other than the manufacturer. When greater than 250 psi is called for on the
plans, then the Supplier shall furnish higher class rated flanges. Standard Class 125 template for
drilling shall be used for all flanges.
4. Drilling templates shall be in multiples of four, so that fittings may be made to face in any quarter.
Bolt holes shall straddle the centerline and shall be equally spaced. Misalignment of bolt holes of
two opposing flanges shall not exceed 0.12 inches.
5. Blind flanges 12 inches and over shall be provided with lifting eyes.
6. Insulated flanges shall be provided where required.
B. Stainless steel threaded studs shall be used on all valve flange connections, or in other applications,
where space restrictions preclude the use of regular bolts. Both studs and/or bolts shall extend through
the nuts at least 1/4 inch.

C. Gaskets shall be full faced, 1/16-inch thick compressed sheets of Aramid fiber base, with nitrile binder
and non stick coating, suitable for temperatures to 700°, pressures to 1000 psig and a pH range of 1 to
11.
1. Blind flange gaskets shall cover the entire inside face of the flange and shall be cemented in place.
Gaskets shall be as manufactured by John Crane, style 2160; Garlock, style 3000; or approved
equal.
2.8 NON-METALLIC PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION

A. Furnish and install tracer wire directly under non-metallic lines, during their installation.
B. Unless otherwise described, the tracer wire shall be a #12 copper insulated direct bury tracer wire, and
shall be brought to the surface of the ground at all valves and risers. Where splices in the wire are
required, the Contractor shall solder the connections. Tee splices shall be made with a minimum of 4 turns
wrapped tightly around the bared portion of the main tracer. Do not cut main tracer wire. Line splices shall
be made by crossing the two bare sections of wire with a minimum of 4 turns in opposite directions. Solder
and finish connection using a no. 1 welding tip with a soft non-carbonizing flame or propane torch and
rosen flux with no. 60/40 rosin core solder. Acid core solder shall not be allowed under any circumstances.
Use only enough heat to insure a smooth solder joint. Heat should be applied to the wire, not to the solder.
Allow cooling and do not move the wire while cooling. Insulate by applying several turns of 3M 88 or
approved equal electrical tape around the soldered joint. Extend the tape well over the wire insulation in all
directions.
C. A plastic (2-inch minimum width) marking tape specifically manufactured for burial and underground
utility identification shall be placed above the pipe at the center of the backfill. This tape shall in no
instances be used in place of locator wire, but must be used additionally. Marking tape shall be installed
continuously not more than 12-inches above the pipeline.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS AND MATERIALS
A. "Y" STRAINERS - shall be constructed of high-tensile ASTM A126 Class B Cast Iron with blow-off
connections, self-aligning cylindrical screens and shall be equal to Watts Regulator Series 77F or better
quality.
B. POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT - Where soil conditions are determined to be severely corrosive and
when shown on the DRAWINGS or required in the Contract Documents, tubular polyethylene
encasement shall be installed around buried ductile iron piping and fittings in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C-105.
C. PIPE PENETRATION OR CASING SEALS - Where required on approved Contractor’s drawings, seals
for pipe penetrations in core drilled structure walls, sleeves, or pipe casings shall be link seals by
Thunderline Corporation, or approved Equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANDLING AND REJECTION OF MATERIALS
A. Care shall be taken during handling of pipe, to avoid impact, which might cause damage. Dropping pipe
during unloading will not be permitted. Inspect pipe in the field before and after laying. If any cause for
rejection is discovered in a pipe before or after laying, it shall be removed and replaced by the
Contractor, at no cost to the Owner. Any pipe found to be unfit or rejected due to cracks, broken bells or
spigots, irreparable chipped lining, etc., shall be removed from the job site.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Prior to pipe laying and jointing, sufficient dewatering effort shall be provided sufficient to maintain the
ground water level at or below the surface of the trench bottom or base of the bedding course. The
dewatering operation, however accomplished, shall be carried out in such a manner as to not
permanently disturb natural underground water conditions.
B. When connections are to be made to any existing pipe or appurtenances, for which the actual elevation
or position cannot be determined without excavation, the Contractor shall excavate and expose the
existing pipe or appurtenances before laying any new pipe. The Owner and/or Engineer shall be
allowed to inspect the existing pipe or appurtenances before any connection is made. Any adjustments
in line or grade, which may be necessary to accomplish the intent shown on the approved Contractor’s
drawings, shall be made.

C. At the close of each day, or whenever the work ceases for any reason, the end of the pipe shall be
securely closed, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
D. When making connections, pipe shall be cut in a neat and workmanlike manner, so as to provide a
smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Flanges, flexible couplings and other connections
shall come together at the proper orientation. The fit shall not be made by springing any piping, nor
shall orientation or alignment be corrected by taking up on any flange bolts. Flange bolts, union halves,
flexible connectors, etc., shall slip freely into place. If the proper fit is not obtained, the piping shall be
altered to fit.
E. All pipe laid shall be retained in position by mechanical means, if necessary, so as to maintain alignment
and joint closure until sufficient pipe bedding and backfill has been completed to adequately hold the
pipe in place. All pipe shall be laid to conform to the prescribed line and grade shown on the plans,
within specified limits. No blocking of any kind shall be used to adjust the pipe to grade, except when
used with concrete embedment. Bedding materials shall be placed so the bottom surface of the pipe
will have full bearing for the entire barrel length. The pipe shall rest on not less than 1/4 of its outside
perimeter. Bell holes shall be dug as required to assure uniform support along the barrel, but shall be
no larger than necessary.
F. After the pipe is laid, additional bedding material shall be placed in 6-inch lifts to a level even with the
spring line of the pipe. The portion of the trench from the spring line to 12 inches above the top of the
pipe shall then be filled and compacted in the same way.
G. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, pipe shall be laid upgrade from the point of connection on
the existing pipeline or from a designated starting point. Pipe shall be installed with the bell end forward
or upgrade, unless approved otherwise. When pipe laying is not in progress, the forward end of the pipe
shall be kept closed with an approved temporary plug.
H. Locate culinary water piping at least 10 feet horizontally from any existing or proposed parallel sewer or
wastewater leach line. Should conditions prevent the 10-foot separation, the water line may be laid
closer than 10 feet to sewer lines (but not leach lines) provided:
1. The water line is laid 18 inches above the top of the sewer line, but deep enough to prevent
freezing, and
2. The water line is laid in a separate trench, or
3. The water line is laid on an undisturbed earth shelf on one side of the sewer line trench, or
4. The water line is laid in a sewer or drain line trench, which has been backfilled and compacted to
not less than 95% of maximum density, as determined by ASTM D-690.
I. Where potable water lines cross sewer lines, the water line shall be at least 18 inches above the sewer
line for ten feet on each side of the sewer line, measured as the perpendicular distance from the water
line to the sewer line. When such vertical separation is impossible to achieve, a vertical separation of
less than 18 inches may be allowed provided:
1. Both the water line and the sewer line shall be constructed of ductile iron pipe or thermoplastic pipe
joined by either mechanical or bolted flange joints. Thermoplastic pipe may also use solvent
welded joints, and
2. When making such crossing, install the water line in such manner that the center of a full joint of
pipe is on the centerline of the sewer line to isolate the water line joints as far as possible.
J. Care should be taken to properly align the pipe before joints are forced home. Gaskets shall be
lubricated in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. During insertion of the spigot end, the
pipe shall be partially supported by hand, sling or crane to minimize unequal lateral pressure on the
gasket and to maintain concentricity until the gasket is properly positioned. Since the most flexible
gasketed joints tend to creep apart when the end pipe is deflected and straightened, such movement
shall be held to a minimum once the joint is home.
K. No exposed piping shall be installed until all equipment to which the pipe is to be attached has been
installed and it can be determined where piping and fittings shall be located to make a neat, efficient
arrangement. Piping shall be aligned with equipment connections such that no external load or stress
will be transferred to any equipment from the piping. Piping shall be installed with a sufficient number of
unions, flexible couplings, or flanged joints, in addition to those shown on the Drawings, to allow for
convenient inspection and maintenance.

L. Exposed pipe work shall be suspended or supported, to prevent sagging or over stressing of the pipe
and connections. Assembly of pipe and fittings shall be accomplished so there will be no distortion or
springing of the pipe. The fit shall not be made nor the alignment corrected by taking up on any flange
bolts. Joints shall come together in proper orientation, and Flange bolts, union halves, flexible
couplings, and etc. shall slip freely into place. If the proper fit is not obtained, the piping shall be altered
to make the fit meeting the above requirements.
M. Exposed pipe shall be installed in straight runs parallel to the axis of the structures. Pipe runs shall be
horizontal and vertical; except that gravity drain lines shall be pitched down in the direction of flow at a
slope not less than 1/8 inch per foot.
N. All exposed pipe shall be painted in accordance with these specifications. Factory finished items are not
required to be field painted except touch-up. The color and type of paint used shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
O. Where new fittings, valves, meters, restraints etc., are required to be installed in, or attached to, existing
piping, or where connections are to be made to existing piping, the Contractor shall furnish and install
the necessary components needed to accomplish the Work, whether or not specifically indicated on the
Drawings.
3.3 PIPE SEALS
A. The Contractor shall install link seals where required in core drilled structure walls pipe sleeves, or pipe
casings in accordance with the manufactures instructions.
3.4 PIPE RESTRAINTS
A. The Contractor shall provide either thrust blocks or mechanical pipe restraints in accordance with these
specifications on all piping not connected with bolted flange or welded joints. All restraints shall be in
place before any hydrostatic testing is performed on the system. Pressure pipe shall be properly
blocked or restrained at all fittings; wherever the pipeline makes a change in direction of 11.25 degrees
or more, wherever it changes sizes, or wherever it ends. The Contractor shall allow visual inspection of
every thrust block and mechanical restraint before it is buried.
B. Concrete thrust blocking shall be sized and placed, to provide bearing against undisturbed vertical earth
banks or approved compacted backfill, sufficient to absorb thrust from line pressure. Joints shall be
encased in plastic to prevent concrete from locking the bolts in the event that the line must be reworked.
C. Concrete used for thrust blocks shall have a minimum 28 day compressive strength test of 3500 psi.
D. Mechanical restraint of piping shall be accomplished with one of the following restraining systems or an
approved equal.
E. Grooved Ductile Iron AWWA Couplings by Victaulic Company of America (use only with exposed piping
systems)
F. MEGALUG®thrust restraints by EBAA Iron Sales, Inc.
G. FIELDLOK ® restraint gaskets by U.S. Pipe Company, ductile iron pipe only.
H. All pressure pipe 12” diameter and larger shall have mechanical restraint furnished and installed at all
joints within 60 feet each way from any bend in addition to thrust blocks shown in the drawings.
I. All joints of pipe installed under stream beds or canal crossings, or installed in casing pipes, shall be
protected with mechanical restraints.
J. Restraint protection of above ground or exposed piping in buildings or enclosures shall be accomplished
only with mechanical restraints.
3.5 FLUSHING AND CLEANING
A. Furnish all equipment and labor required to complete the flushing as required by this section. Prior to
proceeding with pressure testing and disinfection of completed lines, the Contractor shall fill the test
section with clean potable water and flush the lines. Certain contaminants, especially in caked deposits,

resist flushing at any velocity. If contaminants enter the line during construction which cannot be
removed by flushing, the interior of the pipe shall be swabbed, as necessary, to remove the debris prior
to proceeding with flushing.
B. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, to establish a 2.5 feet per second (fps) flow velocity in the
line during the flush. Flushing shall proceed until the installed pipe is free of debris. It should be noted
that with 40-psi residual pressure, a 2 1/2 inch hydrant outlet nozzle will discharge approximately 1,000
GPM, and a 4 1/2 inch hydrant outlet nozzle will discharge approximately 2,500 GPM. Flow required to
produce the required flushing velocity indicated above is provided in the table below.
Pipe Diameter (inches) Flow (gpm) to Produce 2.5 fps

4 100
6 200
8 400
10 600
12 900
16 1600

SECTION 33 31 13 - SANITARY SEWERAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sanitary sewerage outside the building.
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete structures.
A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Backwater valves and cleanouts.

2. Manhole cover inserts.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments for the following:
1. Precast concrete manholes, including frames and covers.
A. Do not store plastic structures, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.
B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
A. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned.
B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the
following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to
requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. PVC Backwater Valves and Cleanouts:

a. Canplas, Inc.
b. IPS Corp.
c. NDS, Inc.
d. Plastic Oddities, Inc.
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
SPRINGVILLE CITY SANITARY SEWERAGE

2. Manhole Cover Inserts:
a. FRW Industries, Inc.
b. Knutson Manufacturing Co.
c. Parson Environmental Products, Inc.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials.
2.3 PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 794, open and closed profile, bell and spigot for gasketed
joints.
1. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
2.4 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS
A. Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1173, rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly fabricated to mate
with OD of pipes to be joined, for nonpressure joints.
1. Sleeve Material for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.

2. Sleeve Material for Dissimilar Pipe: Compatible with pipe materials being joined.
B. Bushing-Type Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1173, rubber or elastomeric bushing fabricated to mate with OD of smaller
pipe and ID of adjoining larger pipe, for nonpressure joints.
1. Material for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.

2. Material for Dissimilar Pipe: Compatible with pipe materials being joined.
2.5MANHOLES
A. Normal-Traffic Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth
indicated, with provision for rubber gasketed joints.
1. Diameter: 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required to
prevent flotation.
3. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (100-mm) minimum
thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral
floor.
4. Riser Sections: 4-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated.
5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of
cone of size that matches grade rings.
6. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber.
7. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (150- to 229-mm) total
thickness, that match 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and cover.
8. Steps: Fiberglass, individual steps or ladder. Include width that allows worker to place both feet on one
step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor into base, riser, and top
section sidewalls with steps at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps for manholes less
than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep.
9. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to
base section.
B. Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile-iron castings designed for heavy-duty
service. Include 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 7- to 9-inch (178- to 229-mm) riser with 4-inch (100-mm) minimum
width flange, and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering "SANITARY
SEWER" cast into cover.
C. Manhole Cover Inserts: Manufactured, plastic form, of size to fit between manhole frame and cover and designed
to prevent stormwater inflow. Include handle for removal and gasket for gastight sealing.

1. Type: Solid.
2.6 BACKWATER VALVES
A. PVC Backwater Valves: Similar to ASME A112.14.1, horizontal type; with PVC body, PVC removable cover, and
PVC swing check valve.
2.7 CLEANOUTS
A. PVC Cleanouts: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same
material as sewer piping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installing green warning
tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures.
1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.
3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. General: Include watertight joints.
B. Gravity-Flow Piping: Use the following:
1. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN100 and DN150): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, solvent-cemented joints, or
gaskets and gasketed joints.
3.4 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLING AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Special Pipe Couplings: Use where required to join piping and no other appropriate method is specified. Do not
use instead of specified joining methods.
1. Use the following pipe couplings for nonpressure applications:

a. Sleeve type to join piping, of same size, or with small difference in OD.
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of
underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations
into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert.
Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to
manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain
swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is completed.
C. Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, unless
direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are
connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E. Install gravity-flow piping and connect to building's sanitary drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate
piping as indicated.

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install piping with 36-inch (1000-mm) minimum cover.
F. Extend sanitary sewerage piping and connect to building's sanitary drains, of sizes and in locations indicated.
Terminate piping as indicated.
3.6 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated.
B. Refer to Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for basic piping joint construction and installation.
C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: As follows:
1. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321.
2. Join profile sewer pipe fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3. Install according to ASTM D 2321.
D. System Piping Joints: Make joints using system manufacturer's couplings, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application. Use couplings that
are compatible with and that fit both systems' materials and dimensions.
F. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface.
3.7 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
B. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.
C. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches
(76 mm) above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install precast concrete manhole sections with gaskets according to ASTM C 891.
3.8 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer
pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so
cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300
mm) deep. Set with tops 1 inch (25 mm) above surrounding grade.
C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.
A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag
in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed.
1. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.
2. Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if required by
B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after
approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.

2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not

less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within
allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
C. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and
defects.
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice.
4. Submit separate reports for each test.
5. If authorities having jurisdiction do not have published procedures, perform tests as follows:
a. Sanitary Sewerage: Perform hydrostatic test.
1) Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal. per inch of nominal pipe size per mile (4.6 L
per millimeter of nominal pipe size per kilometer) of pipe, during 24-hour period.
2) Close openings in system and fill with water.
3) Purge air and refill with water.
4) Disconnect water supply.
5) Test and inspect joints for leaks.
6) Option: Test ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600, Section "Hydrostatic
Testing." Use test pressure of at least 10 psig (69 kPa).
END OF SECTION 02530

SECTION 33 41 00 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes gravity-flow, nonpressure storm drainage outside the building, with the following
components:
1. Cleanouts.
2. Precast concrete manholes.
A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head of water.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For manholes and catch basins. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
manhole frames and covers and catch basin frames and grates.
C. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations.
D. Field quality-control test reports. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials.
2.3 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Corrugated PE Drainage Pipe and Fittings NPS 10 and Smaller: AASHTO M 252M, Type S, with smooth
waterway for coupling joints.
1. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 252M, corrugated, matching tube and fittings.
2. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings NPS 12 and Larger: AASHTO M 294M, Type S, with smooth
waterway for coupling joints.
3. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294M, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings.
2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, with bell-and-spigot ends for
gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
B. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 18 and Larger: ASTM F 679, T-1 wall thickness, with bell-and-spigot
ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
SPRINGVILLE CITY STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

2.5 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining
underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-
resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
B. Sleeve Materials:
1. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.
2. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
3. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being
joined.
C. Unshielded Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring and corrosion-resistant-
metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.
b. Fernco Inc.
c. Logan Clay Products Company (The).
d. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
e. NDS Inc.
f. Plastic Oddities, Inc.
g. As approved by engineer.
D. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-
resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg.
b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.
c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
d. As approved by engineer
E. Ring-Type Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger
pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Fernco Inc.
b. Logan Clay Products Company (The).
c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
d. As approved by engineer.
2.6 MANHOLES
A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with
provision for sealant joints.
1. Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as
required to prevent flotation.
3. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for walls and
base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor.
4. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, and of length to provide depth indicated.
5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of
cone of size that matches grade rings.
6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.
7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe
connection.
8. Steps: Individual FRP steps, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and
designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-
inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60
inches.
9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching
manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.
10. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole
frame and cover.

11. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch minimum width
flange and 26-inch diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using
wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER."
a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 CONCRETE
A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4. Water: Potable.
B. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water-
cementitious materials ratio.
1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.
2.8 CATCH BASINS
A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated,
with provision for sealant joints.
1. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for walls and
base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor.
2. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless flat-slab-top type is indicated.
3. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.
B. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16, structural loading.
Include 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch minimum width flange, and 26-inch diameter flat grate
with small square or short-slotted drainage openings.
1. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Pipe couplings and fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications
below, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer
piping, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD.
b. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between
smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.
B. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use the following pipe materials for each size range:
1. NPS 3 to NPS 6 (DN 80 to DN 150): Hub-and-spigot, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings;
gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. NPS 3 to NPS 6 (DN 80 to DN 150): Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings, soiltight couplings,
and coupled joints.
3. NPS 3 to NPS 6 (DN 80 to DN 150): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.
4. NPS 8 to NPS 15 (DN 200 to DN 375): Hub-and-spigot, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and
fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 15 (DN 200 to DN 375): Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings, soiltight
couplings, and coupled joints.
7. NPS 18 to NPS 30 (DN 450 to DN 750): Corrugated PE pipe and fittings, soiltight couplings, and
coupled joints.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take

design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific
installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of
invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according
to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.
C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections
unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and
fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Install piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in
direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system,
or cast-in-place-concrete supports or anchors.
3. Install piping with 36-inch (915-mm) minimum cover.
4. Install piping below frost line.
5. Install hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook."
6. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
F. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses.
3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic pipe joint construction is specified in Division 33 Section "Common Work Results for Utilities." Where
specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
2. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe
and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.
3. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasket joints.
4. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible couplings.
3.4 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe
fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts.
Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
1. Use light-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas.
2. Use medium-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in paved foot-traffic areas.
3. Use heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas.
4. Use extra-heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in roads.
B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set
with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade.
C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.
3.5 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.
C. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3
inches (76 mm) above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION
A. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's storm building drains specified in
Division 22 Section "Facility Storm Drainage Piping."
B. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.

1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of
existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch
overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect
after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
1. Submit separate report for each system inspection.
2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size
not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within
allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for
leaks and defects.
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance
notice.
4. Submit separate report for each test.
5. Air Tests: Test storm drainage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-
6, and the following:
a. Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417.
C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.


Springville Electric Specs

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Springville Electric Specs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Project Manual

Electric Operations Center

DIVISION SECTION TITLE

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

SPRINGVILLE CITY TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

SPRINGVILLE CITY TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

SPRINGVILLE CITY TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

SPRINGVILLE CITY TABLE OF CONTENTS

Sealed bids will be received by Springville City for:

ELECTRIC OPERATIONS CENTER

Contract Documents will be available for review at the following locations:

Mountainlands Area Plan Room Mountainlands Area Plan Room

Dodge/AGC Plan Room Dodge/AGC Plan Room

SPRINGVILLE CITY NOTICE TO BIDDERS

1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.2 AVAILABILITY OF DOCUMENTS

2. Contract Documents will be available for review at the following locations:

1.3 ELIGIBILITY TO BID

1.4 BONDING AND INSURANCE

SPRINGVILLE CITY SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

1.5 BID SUBMITTAL

1. Completed Bid Form.

SPRINGVILLE CITY SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

1.7 QUESTIONS DURING BIDDING

1.8 BIDS SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE FOR SIXTY(60) DAYS

1.9 BID REVIEW

1.10 CONTRACT TIME AND DAMAGES

1.11 BIDDERS FURTHER OBLIGATIONS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

SPRINGVILLE CITY SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

BID FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF:

ELECTRIC OPERATIONS CENTER

To Whom It May Concern:

Alternate No. 1 – Wash Bay:

Alternate No. 2 – Parking Canopy (Over 4 Stalls):

Alternate No. 3 – Parking Canopy (Over 8 Stalls):

Enclosed is __________as required in the sum of ____________________________________________

SPRINGVILLE CITY BID FORM

This bid shall be good for 60 days after bid opening.

I / We acknowledge receipt of the following Addenda:

CORPORATIONS ONLY FILL IN BIDDERS (OTHER THAN CORPORATIONS)

SPRINGVILLE CITY BID FORM

Project: Electric Operations Center Contractor: ____________________________

Section Type of Work Subcontractor Scheduled

SPRINGVILLE CITY LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS & SCHEDULE OF VALUES

SIGNED BY: DATE:

SPRINGVILLE CITY LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS & SCHEDULE OF VALUES

AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year

The Owner and Contractor agree as follows.

ELECTRONIC COPYING of any

1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT

3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Enclosed is as required in the sum of __________________________________